Panasonic KX-TVS 95 Voice Processing System Installation Manual

Voice Processing System
Installation Manual
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
POWER
Model No.
KX-TVS95
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-TVS95 Voice Processing System.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic
KX-TVS95 Voice Processing System.
We are confident that it will provide your customer or client with many years of
dependable service.
This Voice Processing System was especially tailored for the American environment.
For example, it can be configured for English, a second language, or a third language:
System prompts—Recorded at the factory in English
User 1 prompts—Record in any language you like
User 2 prompts—Recorded at the factory in Spanish
These prompts guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific VPS
operations.
In addition, the VPS supports many other languages through the use of Custom
Service menus. These can be used to greet outside callers who merely need to be
guided to a destination (such as an extension, a mailbox, or a fax machine). Many
languages can be supported as there are 12 keys on a touchtone phone and you can
record up to 100 Custom Service menus. One twelfth of these menus can be recorded
in one language if you desire. Another twelfth can be recorded in another language,
and so on. Thus callers can be guided entirely in their native languages. For a multicultural United States, Custom Service is a truly powerful feature. Please see "Custom
Service" in Appendix A1 SYSTEM FEATURES for more details.
Note
This product is only for connection behind a suitable PBX and should not be connected
directly to the network.
Panasonic World Wide Web Address: http://www.panasonic.com/csd
for customers in the United States or Puerto Rico.
2
Installation Manual
List of Enhancements
Compared to the KX-TVS90 Voice Processing System, these models are enhanced by the
following new features:
•
Personal Custom Service
Allows a subscriber to set the following Custom Services in his personal greeting
(Personal Custom Service):
•
Transfer to Mailbox
•
Transfer to Extension
•
Transfer to Outside
•
Custom Service
•
VM Service (Voice Mail Service)
•
AA Service (Call Transfer Service)
A caller can select a desired service from those above while listening to the personal
greeting or recording a message. (See page 242.)
•
Subscriber Tutorial
When a subscriber accesses his mailbox for the first time, the VPS guides him to set
up the mailbox with some Help messages. Simply by following the messages, he can
set up these items:
•
Password
•
Owner’s Name
•
Personal Greetings (No Answer Greeting/Busy Greeting/After Hours Greeting)
(See page 247.)
•
Call Transfer to Outside
Enables the VPS to transfer a call to an outside line from the following services:
•
Custom Service
•
Call Transfer Service
•
Personal Custom Service
•
Caller ID Callback
(See page 226.)
•
DID Call Routing
As well as Caller ID Call Routing, up to 200 DID numbers can be assigned to be
automatically forwarded to a desired destination. The VPS automatically forwards
calls from the assigned DID numbers to a programmed extension, mailbox (including
System Group Distribution List) or Custom Service. (See page 228.)
•
Toll Saver
Allows a subscriber to check his mailbox from a pre-assigned DID/Caller ID number
without necessarily making the VPS answer the call. Without Toll Saver, the VPS will
always answer the call and therefore he will incur toll charges. With Toll Saver, the
VPS can let him know that there are no new messages without answering his call.
(See page 298.)
•
Improvement of System Security
By default, the System/Message Managers cannot access the VPS from their
telephones until the System Administrator enables the relevant settings and sets a
password for access. The System/Message Managers always need to enter this
Installation Manual
3
password to access the VPS. (See page 311.)
The System Administrator can also choose to set a default password for subscribers’
mailboxes. If this setting is enabled, a default password is automatically assigned
when mailboxes are created (See page 312.)
•
Additional PBX Connectivity
Allows the VPS to be connected to a KX-TDA/KX-TAW series PBX to enable new
features such as One-Touch Two-Way Transfer. (See page 326.)
•
New Utility Commands
The following utility commands have been added:
•
TURN (See page 203.)
This allows you to easily turn off and turn on System and User prompts.
•
PREP (See page 205.)
This allows you to visualize Personal Custom Service menus.
4
Installation Manual
Important Information
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow all product warnings, cautions, and instructions.
Handle the unit carefully. Do not drop or otherwise expose the unit to physical shock.
If the unit malfunctions, disconnect the unit from the telephone line and check the line by
reconnecting the telephone. If the telephone operates properly, have the VPS repaired by
a qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technician.
Install the unit so that the power cord is not obstructed in any way. Do not connect this unit
to an extension cord.
Keep the unit free of dust, moisture, condensation, high temperature exposure (more than
40 °C {104 °F}) and vibration. Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight.
Mount the unit on a stable wall surface. Do not mount the VPS inside of a separate
enclosure unless it is properly ventilated.
Read all the information contained in this manual.
This unit is designed to operate at one specific voltage and current setting. The proper
voltage and current required for this unit are listed on the product label.
This unit is equipped with a 3-wire grounding plug. The plug will only fit into a grounded
power outlet. Do not modify this plug in any way. If it cannot be inserted into the outlet,
have the outlet replaced by a licensed electrician.
Unplug and transport the unit to a service technician if the power supply cord is frayed or
damaged, if the cabinet is cracked or broken, or when the unit has been exposed to
moisture, has been dropped, or is not otherwise operating properly.
Unplug the unit from its power source before cleaning.
Do not block the vent slots and openings located on the front and top of the unit.
Do not disassemble this product. Dangerous electrical shock could result. The unit must
only be disassembled and repaired by qualified Panasonic Factory Service Technicians.
Do not insert wires, pins, or any other material into the unit’s vent slots or access points.
This could result in electrical shock and serious unit malfunction.
Do not install the unit near water or moisture, heating appliances, or electrical noise
generating devices such as televisions, monitors, fluorescent lamps, or electric motors.
Do not overload wall outlets. Overloaded outlets could result in fire and/or electrical
shock.
Do not use solvents, liquid cleaners, water, or abrasive powders to clean this unit. Use
only a damp soft cloth for cleaning.
Do not use the telephone during a lightning storm or to report a gas leak in the vicinity of
the leak.
WARNING
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Installation Manual
5
When you ship the product
Carefully pack and send it prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original
carton. Attach a postage-paid letter, detailing the symptom, to the outside of the carton.
DO NOT send the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices. They are NOT
equipped to make repairs.
Product service
Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory.
Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the back of
the unit. You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and
retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the
event of theft.
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
For your future refer ence
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DEALER’S TEL. NO.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVICED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH EXPOSES ANY INTERNAL PARTS,
DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN
THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING
THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT,
AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
6
Installation Manual
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH A GROUNDING CONTACT PLUG. FOR
SAFETY REASONS, THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO A
GROUNDING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Note
Before you start setting or changing system parameters, we recommend that you turn off
the Call Progression Mode with the OFLN command. While off, the power LED of the VPS
will flash and the VPS will not answer any incoming call. After you finish programming,
use the ONLN command to turn on the Call Progression Mode (normal operation). Please
see 7.2.1 Off-line Set (OFLN) and 7.2.2 On-line Set (ONLN) for more details.
Trademarks
•
HyperTerminal is either a registered trademark or a trademark of HILGRAEVE,
INCORPORATED in the United States and/or other countries.
•
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the
United States.
•
Procomm Plus is either a registered trademark or a trademark of DATASTORM
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. in the United States and/or other countries.
•
Smartcom is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer
Products, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
•
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
•
Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Installation Manual
7
F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
Notify The Telephone Company
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the following format:
•
US:ACJVM04BKX-TVS90
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer. If required, provide the
telephone company with the following technical information:
•
The telephone numbers to which the system will be connected
•
Make: Panasonic
•
Model: KX-TVS95
•
Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.4B
•
Facility Interface Code: 02LS2
•
Service Order Code: 9.0F
•
Required Network Interface Jack: RJ11C
Ringer Equivalence No. (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to
an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To
be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the
REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the following format:
•
US:ACJVM04BKX-TVS90
The digits represented by 04 are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
Telephone Service Problems
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice
isn’t practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations,
and Procedures
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone
company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
maintain uninterrupted service.
8
Installation Manual
Trouble with this equipment
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact
a Factory Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer. If the equipment is causing harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment
until the problem is resolved.
Connection to the Party Line
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
Combined Use with Alarm Equipment
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions
about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures.
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this device.
Installation Manual
9
Table of Contents
1
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................17
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
2
INSTALLATION ..............................................................................29
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................................... 30
Installation ............................................................................................................... 30
Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 31
UNPACKING........................................................................................................... 32
MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL................................................................... 33
FRAME GROUND CONNECTION.......................................................................... 34
INSTALLATION STEPS ......................................................................................... 35
CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 37
Connecting to the PBX ............................................................................................ 37
Opening the Ferrite Core......................................................................................... 37
Connection for APT Integration ............................................................................... 38
Connection for DPT Integration ............................................................................... 38
Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration ............................................................... 39
TERMINAL CONNECTION ..................................................................................... 40
Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal ............................................ 40
Connecting the RS-232C Cable .............................................................................. 40
RS-232C Signals ..................................................................................................... 42
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T PHONE
SYSTEMS .......................................................................................43
3.1
3.1.1
10
WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO ............................................................. 18
Why Voice Processing?........................................................................................... 18
Basic Operations ..................................................................................................... 18
VPS Limitations ....................................................................................................... 19
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE ................................... 20
System Administration............................................................................................. 20
System Management............................................................................................... 20
Subscriber Use ........................................................................................................ 20
SYSTEM BASICS ................................................................................................... 21
General.................................................................................................................... 21
System Components ............................................................................................... 21
Which Phone Systems are Compatible? ................................................................. 23
Installer Equipment and Software Requirements .................................................... 24
Specifications .......................................................................................................... 25
Hardware ................................................................................................................. 25
Recommendations for System Configuration .......................................................... 25
DIGITAL INTEGRATION ........................................................................................ 26
General.................................................................................................................... 26
APT Integration........................................................................................................ 26
Connection Example—APT Integration................................................................... 26
DPT Integration ....................................................................................................... 26
Connection Example—DPT Integration................................................................... 27
GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION ........................................................................ 44
APT/DPT or Inband Signaling? ............................................................................... 44
Installation Manual
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
4
Why Integration is Important ....................................................................................44
How the VPS and the PBX Communicate ...............................................................44
PBX Requirements for Integration ...........................................................................45
PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS.........................................................47
General Guidelines and Definitions..........................................................................47
RS-232C Settings ....................................................................................................47
Port Settings.............................................................................................................47
PBX Interface Parameters .......................................................................................48
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs......................52
VPS Programming for Inband Integration ................................................................52
KX-T123211D Software Verification and Programming for Inband Integration........53
KX-TA624 Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager’s Extension.........55
KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration.......................................................58
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308 Programming for Inband
Integration via the Manager’s Extension ..................................................................67
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming for Inband Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool.............................................................................68
KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance
Tool ..........................................................................................................................71
KX-TDA/KX-TAW series Programming for Inband Integration.................................75
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL
PBX ................................................................................................. 83
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.2.1
GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION .........................................................84
Why Digital Integration is Important .........................................................................84
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624..............................86
KX-TA624 Software Verification and Programming for Digital Integration via the
Manager’s Extension................................................................................................86
4.3
KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION .................................92
4.4
KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION .....101
4.5
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KXTA1232 AND KX-TD308
106
4.5.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Manager’s Extension..............................................................................................106
4.5.2 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool
111
4.5.3 KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the
Manager’s Extension .............................................................................................114
4.6
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE
PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD SERIES................................119
4.6.1 Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming ...............................................................119
4.6.2 Live Call Screening Password Assignment............................................................119
4.6.3 Live Call Screening Password Canceling ..............................................................120
4.6.4 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via System Programming........120
4.6.5 Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment via Station Programming.........121
4.6.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming ..........................................122
4.6.7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station Programming.........................123
4.6.8 Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via Station Programming ............123
4.6.9 Two-Way Recording Button Assignment via Station Programming .......................124
4.6.10 Two-Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming ..........................125
Installation Manual
11
4.6.11
4.6.12
4.6.13
4.6.14
4.6.15
4.6.16
4.6.17
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4.7.9
4.7.10
4.7.11
4.7.12
4.7.13
4.7.14
4.7.15
4.7.16
4.7.17
5
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM .....................................................141
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
12
Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station Programming ........................ 126
Button Assignment via PC Programming .............................................................. 126
Live Call Screening Activation ............................................................................... 128
Live Call Screening Password Control .................................................................. 129
Two-Way Recording into Mailbox.......................................................................... 129
Two-Way Transfer into Mailbox............................................................................. 129
A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation................................................................... 129
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE
PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PBX .................................................... 130
Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming............................................................... 130
Live Call Screening Password Assignment ........................................................... 130
Live Call Screening Password Canceling.............................................................. 131
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment ................................................ 131
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode Assignment.................................. 132
Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming.......................................... 133
Live Call Screening Button Assignment ................................................................ 134
Two-Way Recording (TWR) Button Assignment ................................................... 135
Two-Way Transfer (TWT) Button Assignment....................................................... 135
One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT) Button Assignment................. 137
Voice Mail Transfer (VTR) Button Assignment...................................................... 138
Button Assignment via PC Programming .............................................................. 138
Live Call Screening Activation ............................................................................... 139
Two-Way Recording (TWR) into Mailbox .............................................................. 140
Two-Way Transfer (TWT) into Mailbox.................................................................. 140
One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT) into Mailbox............................ 140
Voice Mail Transfer (VTR) Programming .............................................................. 140
STARTING UP ...................................................................................................... 142
Before Programming ............................................................................................. 142
Quick Setup ........................................................................................................... 142
Starting the Quick Setup........................................................................................ 143
PORT SETTING OPTIONS................................................................................... 150
Custom Service Setting Example .......................................................................... 150
Custom Service Features ...................................................................................... 151
Custom Service Programming............................................................................... 153
Recording Menus .................................................................................................. 156
Checking Operation............................................................................................... 156
Voice Mail .............................................................................................................. 156
Mailbox Groups ..................................................................................................... 157
Extension Groups .................................................................................................. 157
Interview Service ................................................................................................... 158
Automated Attendant............................................................................................. 159
Department Dialing Service................................................................................... 159
Operator Service ................................................................................................... 159
SETTING PORTS.................................................................................................. 160
Port Service Menu ................................................................................................. 160
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS ..................................................... 162
Automated Attendant Menu................................................................................... 162
Department Dialing................................................................................................ 162
Operator’s Parameters ......................................................................................... 163
Installation Manual
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.6
6
FINAL SETUP ............................................................................... 175
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
7
SETTING MAILBOXES .........................................................................................166
Mailbox Setting Menu.............................................................................................166
Entering a Mailbox .................................................................................................166
Deleting a Mailbox..................................................................................................171
Password Reset .....................................................................................................171
Mailbox Listing ......................................................................................................172
TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER.............................................................................173
MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998).............................................176
Accessing the Message Manager’s Mailbox ..........................................................176
Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service ...........................................................176
Company Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,1).................................................................177
Recording the Company Name (Enter #6*998,5,2) ...............................................177
Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,4).......................................................177
Customizing User Prompts (Enter #6*998,5,6) ......................................................178
SETTING UP MAILBOXES ...................................................................................179
Subscriber Tutorial .................................................................................................179
Changing Password, Owner’s Name, and Personal Greetings .............................181
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM ................................................................................182
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.............. 185
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.2.8
7.2.9
7.2.10
7.2.11
7.2.12
7.2.13
7.2.14
7.2.15
7.2.16
7.2.17
7.2.18
7.2.19
7.2.20
7.2.21
7.2.22
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM .................................................................................186
UTILITY COMMANDS ...........................................................................................188
Off-line Set (OFLN) ................................................................................................189
On-line Set (ONLN)................................................................................................189
Set Password (PASS) ............................................................................................189
Set Time (TIME).....................................................................................................190
Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET).................................................................191
Error Log Display (ELOG) ......................................................................................192
Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE).........................................194
Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)...................................................196
Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN) ...............................................................197
Program Version Display (VERS) ..........................................................................197
Custom Service Report (CREP).............................................................................198
Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)..............................................199
Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL) .........................................................199
Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL) ............................................................199
Modified Prompt List (MPLT) .................................................................................200
Utility Command List (HELP) .................................................................................201
Quick Setup (QSET) ..............................................................................................201
Circuit Condition Display (LMON) ..........................................................................202
Touchtone Information Display (PUTD) .................................................................202
Wait for Caller ID (WCID).......................................................................................203
Turn off System/User Prompt (TURN) ...................................................................203
Personal Custom Service Assignment (PREP)......................................................205
SYSTEM REPORTS ..............................................................................................206
Mailbox Assignments .............................................................................................207
COS (Class of Service) Assignments ....................................................................207
System Service Report ..........................................................................................209
Call Account Report ...............................................................................................209
Installation Manual
13
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.3.8
7.3.9
7.3.10
7.3.11
7.3.12
7.3.13
7.4
7.5
Call Account Report Clear ..................................................................................... 210
Port Usage Report................................................................................................. 210
Port Usage Statistics Clear.................................................................................... 211
Flash Memory Usage Report................................................................................. 211
Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear ................................................................... 212
Mailbox Usage Report ........................................................................................... 212
Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear.............................................................................. 213
Fax Call Report...................................................................................................... 214
Fax Call Statistics Clear ........................................................................................ 214
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE.............................................................................. 215
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................ 218
A SYSTEM FEATURES ..................................................................219
A1
SYSTEM FEATURES ........................................................................................... 220
B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE.........................................253
B1
B2
B3
B4
B4.1
B4.2
B5
B5.1
B5.2
B5.3
B5.4
B6
B6.1
B6.2
B6.3
B6.4
B6.5
B6.6
B6.7
B6.8
B7
B7.1
B7.2
B7.3
SYSTEM NAVIGATION ........................................................................................ 254
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES....................................................... 258
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................... 265
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE.................................... 279
Port Assignment .................................................................................................... 279
Trunk Group Assignment....................................................................................... 281
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS ......................................... 284
Automated Attendant Parameters ......................................................................... 284
Custom Service ..................................................................................................... 291
Intelligent Call Handling......................................................................................... 294
Toll Saver .............................................................................................................. 298
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS .................. 299
System Group Assignment.................................................................................... 299
Time Service.......................................................................................................... 302
Holiday Setting ...................................................................................................... 305
Daylight Saving Time (DST) .................................................................................. 307
Prompt Setting....................................................................................................... 308
System Caller Name Announcement .................................................................... 310
System Security..................................................................................................... 311
Other Parameters .................................................................................................. 313
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS.................................... 324
RS-232C Parameters ............................................................................................ 324
Port Setting............................................................................................................ 325
PBX Interface Parameters..................................................................................... 326
C SYSTEM MANAGER’S GUIDE ....................................................339
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
14
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX......................................... 340
SETTING UP MAILBOXES................................................................................... 341
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS...................................... 344
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK ......................................................................... 351
CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING...................................................... 353
CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE
SETTING ............................................................................................................... 355
CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS) ......................................... 357
Installation Manual
C8
C9
C10
DELIVERING MESSAGES....................................................................................359
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX .....................................362
LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES ............................................363
D MESSAGE MANAGER’S GUIDE ................................................. 365
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX ......................................366
MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX............................................367
SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION ...........................................369
CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX ..................................372
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK..........................................................................374
RECORDING MESSAGES....................................................................................376
REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET ...................................................................381
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE ................................383
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS .......................................................................385
Glossary ............................................................................................. 439
Index ................................................................................................... 451
Installation Manual
15
16
Installation Manual
Section
1
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Installation Manual
17
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1
WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.1
Why Voice Processing?
The VPS handles incoming and outgoing calls. When a call comes in, it answers, forwards to
appropriate extensions, takes and stores messages, and notifies subscribers when messages
are left. Subscribers may send and transfer messages to other subscribers within the system.
The VPS is easy to use, helping callers through the system with step-by-step voice prompts.
Unlike handwritten messages or those left with answering services, VPS messages are
confidential; they are stored in a mailbox and retrieved only with the subscriber’s password.
Other advantages of the VPS are clarity and accuracy, which are commonly lacking with
written messages. The messages come directly from the caller, in the caller’s own voice. To
further ensure accuracy, the system allows the sender to correct or change messages before
saving them. Messages can be erased or transferred by the recipient.
1.1.2
Basic Operations
Greeting Callers:
The VPS greets callers with a prerecorded message that includes directions for leaving and
editing messages. The VPS can list single-digit numbers for each available extension or
mailbox. Callers who know the extension of the person they wish to reach may dial the
extension number at any time. Callers with rotary phones are transferred to a preprogrammed
destination (which is often an operator or the General Delivery Mailbox) to leave a message.
Sending Messages:
Callers can review and edit messages before leaving them in a mailbox. Subscribers can send
messages to an individual or to several mailboxes at once. The message sender can then
verify that the other subscriber has received the message.
Receiving Messages:
There are several different message notification methods that subscribers can use. They can
choose to be notified by message waiting lamp, beeper, or a call from the system to another
line. System programming determines whether a subscriber will be notified each time a
message is left. (Subscribers can choose to receive message notifications differently
depending on the time of day.) Mailbox parameters, which accommodate 5-100 messages,
determine the maximum length of messages. If the system is connected using Digital
Integration, subscribers can press a pre-assigned button to record conversations into their
own mailboxes or other subscribers’ mailboxes while talking on the phone. Digital Integration
also allows subscribers to screen messages as they are being left, or intercept them if
required.
18
Installation Manual
1.1 WHAT THE VPS CAN AND CANNOT DO
1.1.3
VPS Limitations
The VPS does not support:
UCD functions
UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) is a service that distributes calls evenly among extensions;
when all extensions are unavailable, it returns to callers to say that all extensions are busy.
Calls can be forwarded by the VPS to UCD group floating extension numbers of the PBX (KXTD500, KX-TD1232, KX-TD816, KX-TD308, and the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series). The call then
rings at the next available phone.
The VPS supports UCD functions with very limited capabilities. Because the incoming
call is forwarded as an intercom path and not a DIL (direct in line), the following items will not
work:
•
time table
•
overflow function
•
DISA message from a DISA card
•
IRNA
Integration with the wrong PBX or with certain Key Systems presents limitations to the
VPS’ standard functions. We do not recommend these systems for integration with the VPS.
The section 1.3.3 Which Phone Systems are Compatible? explains problems with
compatibility.
Installation Manual
19
1.2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION, MANAGEMENT, AND USE
1.2
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION,
MANAGEMENT, AND USE
1.2.1
System Administration
System Administration is accomplished by the installer using terminal emulation software. It
concerns setting and changing system parameters and diagnosing system problems.
1.2.2
System Management
Two system functions are performed by the customer: System Management and Message
Management.
System Management concerns changing system parameters through the System Manager’s
Mailbox.
Message Management concerns recording voice prompts through the Message Manager’s
Mailbox. These messages include Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialing
menu, Custom Service menus, voice labels for System Group Distribution Lists, user prompts,
multilingual selection menu and System Caller Names.
1.2.3
Subscriber Use
System users are called subscribers. Subscribers are assigned personal mailboxes which
they can customize in the following ways:
•
Setting their password
•
Recording their names
•
Recording personal greetings
•
Setting covering extensions
•
Setting Personal Custom Service
•
Recording questions for an interview mailbox
•
Setting the message reception mode
•
Setting incomplete call handling status
•
Setting call transfer status
•
Entering Personal Group Distribution Lists
•
Setting the message waiting lamp
•
Setting notification by calling
20
Installation Manual
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3
SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.1
General
The KX-TVS95 is initially configured with 2 ports and 6 h of storage.
1.3.2
System Components
Main Cabinet
MODE (DIP Switch)
AC Inlet
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
Power Indicator
POWER
Port 1
Port 2
Ferrite Core
Ground Terminal
RS-232C
Connector
Note
EIA port is at SELV.
Inside View of the Main Cabinet
Memory Card
Master
Slave
System Components
AC Inlet
Connects the power cable to an AC outlet dedicated to the VPS.
Power Indicator
Indicates the system status: when flashing, the system is off-line (not ready to receive calls).
Installation Manual
21
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
MODE (DIP Switch)
By setting one of the following positions and executing power down and up, you can achieve
a desired result:
Table 1-1
Position
Additional Function
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Normal setting. (All switches in 0 position.)
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Initializes RS-232C parameters.
RS-232C default parameters: 9,600, N, 8, 1
2*1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Automated Attendant service.
3*1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Voice Mail service.
4
5
6
Reserved.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
7
Initializes the VPS. Clears all voice data (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts) and returns all system parameters to the
default setting.
Test Mode (Flash Memory Read/Write Test)
Reserved.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Initializes the VPS. Clears all voice data and returns all system
parameters to the default setting.
8
CAUTION
User 1 and User 2 Prompts will be erased!
9
Reserved.
10*2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Automated Attendant service.
11*2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
Auto Configuration is automatically executed and all ports are
set for Voice Mail service.
12
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to System Prompts.
13
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to User 1 Prompts.
14
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
•1
•2
•3
•4
All service prompts are set to User 2 Prompts.
15
Reserved.
*1 For Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems with DPT Integration.
*2 For Panasonic KX-TA624 telephone system with APT Integration.
To change the position, use a pointed object, such as a pen, etc.
22
Installation Manual
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
When setting the DIP Switch to any position (except 0):
1. Disconnect the station wire(s) and wait a few minutes.
2. Disconnect the AC cord from the VPS.
3. Set the DIP Switch.
4. Connect the AC cord to the VPS.
5. Connect the station wire(s) to the VPS and wait approximately 3.5 min.
6. Return the DIP Switch to position 0.
Ground Terminal
Should be connected to a ground source with less than 1
resistance.
RS-232C Connector
Connects an ASCII or VT terminal to the VPS that is necessary to program the system.
Memory Card
(One/system) Stores the proprietary system program, and the voice prompts (about 30 min
worth); has the capacity to record approximately 6 h of messages from callers.
1.3.3
Which Phone Systems are Compatible?
We recommend integration with the following Panasonic phone systems:
•
Panasonic KX-TA624
•
Panasonic KX-TD308
•
Panasonic KX-TD1232
•
Panasonic KX-TD816
•
Panasonic KX-TA1232
•
Panasonic KX-TD500
•
Panasonic KX-TDA series
•
Panasonic KX-TAW series
•
Panasonic KX-T336
•
Panasonic KX-T123211D
We cannot guarantee adequate integration of the VPS with other PBX systems or with
Key Systems. If the customer does not have a recommended Panasonic PBX system,
be sure that the system has the features listed below.
The PBX should have the following features for successful integration:
•
Single line (tip/ring) port circuits (Some PBXs need an OPX card to provide this
connection.)
•
Station to station touchtone signaling
•
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT (single-line telephone)
•
Screened transfer from an SLT
Installation Manual
23
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
•
Message Waiting Notification on proprietary (multi-line) sets (message waiting lamp
accessed by dialing on/off codes)
If the PBX does not have these features, VPS operation will be limited.
See 3.1.4 PBX Requirements for Integration. You will find the following information about each
feature listed:
•
Description
•
Limitations of the system without the feature
•
Tests to determine whether the PBX has the feature
VOICE MAIL
The recommended Panasonic PBX systems have Follow-on ID and Inband Integration. When
callers are transferred to an extension that is forwarded to Voice Mail, Follow-on ID sends
callers directly to the mailbox. Without Follow-on ID, the caller would have to re-enter the
mailbox number when connected to Voice Mail.
Touchtone Integration enables the VPS to recognize the current state of the call and improve
its call handling performance. When enabled, the PBX informs the VPS of the status of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) by sending a code with touchtones before sending the normal
call progress tones. For example, when a caller hangs up before making a selection, the PBX
sends # 9 to the VPS port that answered. This informs the VPS that the caller has hung up.
Upon receiving these digits, the VPS goes on-hook and is ready to handle another call.
DPT (APT/DPT) Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a Panasonic KX-TA624
or other Panasonic KX-T series digital PBX (depending on the software version). This Digital
Integration provides the VPS with more information than Touchtone Integration. This
information enables the system to identify the extension number of the caller, know where from
and why the call is forwarded, and recognize what the caller wants to do. Some features are
available only with Digital Integration (Remote Call Forwarding Set, Live Call Screening, TwoWay Recording, Two-Way Transfer, One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (available only with KXTDA/KX-TAW series), Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom Paging, Auto Configuration, Caller
Name Announcement [system/personal], Caller ID Call Routing, DID Call Routing, Personal
Greeting for Caller ID, Time Synchronization with PBX, Toll Saver).
1.3.4
Installer Equipment and Software Requirements
The installer must have a personal computer or data terminal equipped with terminal
emulation software. We suggest that you use something like HyperTerminal by HILGRAEVE.
Use the personal computer to program the VPS. Terminal emulation software enables the
keyboard to be used as a data entry device.
While both the personal computer and data terminal are working, the personal computer
allows screens to be saved in a file throughout the process. It is often helpful to retrieve these
files later if technical support is needed.
24
Installation Manual
1.3 SYSTEM BASICS
1.3.5
Specifications
Table 1-2
Ports: 2 ports
Voice Storage (approximate): 6 h
Custom Services: 100
Message Retention: 1 to 30 days or unlimited
Number of Mailboxes: 62 Subscriber and 2 Manager Mailboxes
Number of Messages per Mailbox: 100 maximum (programmable)
1.3.6
Hardware
•
•
•
•
1.3.7
2 Flash Memory Cards.
2 Telephone Inputs (RJ11C)
1 RS-232C Connector
1 DIP Switch (4-bit)
Recommendations for System Configuration
General guideline: a ratio of 6/1 (for every 6 lines, 1 port). There are 2 questions to ask when
considering how many ports are desirable:
•
Are the ports answering all incoming calls or just forwarded/transferred calls?
•
If they are answering incoming calls, how busy are the lines?
The guideline above (6/1) usually works well with moderate traffic. However, this may have to
be modified for heavy traffic. Recommendations are outlined in the following charts.
Table 1-3
CO Lines
Port
1-6
1
7-12
2
One port may not support an Automated Attendant configuration with 5 CO lines. The
preceding recommendations for Automated Attendant ports may have to be modified for heavy
traffic.
Table 1-4
CO Lines
Port
1-4
1
5-8
2
Installation Manual
25
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION
1.4
DIGITAL INTEGRATION
1.4.1
General
There are 2 types of Digital Integration: APT Integration and DPT Integration.
APT Integration is available when the VPS is connected to a KX-TA624. DPT Integration is
available when the VPS is connected to a KX-TD/KX-TDA/KX-TAW series or KX-TA1232 PBX
with the proper software level.
1.4.2
APT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-TA624, the VPS ports look like proprietary telephones. The PBX thinks
that the VPS is a proprietary telephone, and the VPS mimics all actions of a proprietary
telephone. Communication between the VPS and the PBX through digital integration requires
the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire connections for each port. To communicate
between the VPS and the PBX through APT Integration, the PBX and VPS must be
programmed to work together.
1.4.3
Connection Example—APT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 7 of the KX-TA624 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4-wire
connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 1 Voice Mail extension and can only
answer 1 call. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires 2 jacks from the PBX.
VPS
KX-TA624
1.4.4
7
Port 1
Extension 107
8
Port 2
Extension 108
DPT Integration
To the Panasonic KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration, the VPS ports look like digital
extensions. The PBX thinks that the VPS is a digital phone, and the VPS mimics all actions of
a digital set. Another advantage of digital integration is that the 2B+D communication provides
2 VPS ports for each Digital Station port. Communication between the VPS and the PBX
through digital integration requires the proper software level in the PBX and 4-wire
connections for each port. To communicate between the VPS and the PBX through DPT
Integration, the PBX and VPS must be programmed to work together.
26
Installation Manual
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION
1.4.5
Connection Example—DPT Integration
For example, you can connect jack 15 of the KX-TD1232 to Port 1 of the VPS with a 4-wire
connection (see diagram below). This connection creates 2 Voice Mail extensions and can
simultaneously answer 2 calls. This means that a fully-configured 2-port system requires only
1 jack from the PBX.
VPS
KX-TD1232
15
Port 1
Extensions 165 and 166
When 1 line cord (4 wire) is connected to Port 1 on the VPS, 2 extensions are provided.
Installation Manual
27
1.4 DIGITAL INTEGRATION
28
Installation Manual
Section
2
INSTALLATION
Installation Manual
29
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read the following precautions before installing the VPS.
2.1.1
Installation
The VPS needs to be mounted on a wall. Improper placement of the system may result in
malfunction, noise, or discoloration. Avoid installing the VPS in the following places:
•
in direct sunlight; in hot, cold, or humid places
•
in new areas where there are thermal springs, etc. (where sulfuric gas may damage
the equipment or contacts).
•
where shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
•
in dusty places or places where water or oil may come in contact with the unit.
•
near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines, elevators or
electric welders.
•
on or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment; near microwave ovens or
air conditioners. (Ideally, the VPS should not be in the room with these items and
should be at least 1.8 m {6 feet} away from televisions.)
Do not obstruct the areas around the PBX and the VPS. Both require space above for
cooling and space on the sides for maintenance and inspection.
30
Installation Manual
2.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2.1.2
Wiring
•
•
•
•
To assure good quality telephone connection, it is recommended new and modifications
to existing installation of customer premise wiring shall use solid twisted pair copper
conductors with minimum 24 gauge that comply with the electrical specifications for
Category 3 wiring as detailed in ANSI/EIA/TIA-570A Building Wiring Standards.
Do not wire the telephone cable parallel to an AC power source, computer, etc. If cables
are run near those wires, shield them with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground
the shields.
Use protectors if running cables on the floor. Avoid running cables under carpets.
Avoid sharing a 120 V AC power supply for computers, telexes, and other office
equipment with the VPS. Induction noise from such equipment may interrupt the VPS
operation.
When making any connections or removing the cover, be sure the power switch is
turned off.
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
•
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed
for wet locations.
•
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
•
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Note
If you live in an area that can have frequent power failures, we strongly recommend that
you purchase a suitable UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for your VPS (and PBX if
needed). The power rating of your VPS may be found in the specifications.
Installation Manual
31
2.2 UNPACKING
2.2
UNPACKING
Unpack the box and check the items below.
Table 2-1
32
Main Unit
1
AC Cord
1
Screws (Wall Mounting)
3
Anchor Plugs (Wall Mounting)
3
Installation Manual
2.3 MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL
2.3
MOUNTING THE VPS ON THE WALL
The wall where the VPS is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the VPS. If
screws other than the ones supplied are used, use the same-sized diameter screws as the
enclosed ones.
To Mount on a Wooden Wall:
1. Place the template (included) on the wall to mark the 3 screw positions.
Template
2. Install the 3 screws (included accessories) into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
Drive the screw
to this position.
3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.
Installation Manual
33
2.4 FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
2.4
FRAME GROUND CONNECTION
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the grounding wire.
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
POWER
To ground
In most of the continental United States, the ground provided by the "Third wire ground" at the
commercial power outlet will be satisfactory. However, in a small percentage this ground may
be installed incorrectly. Therefore, the following test procedure should be performed.
Test Procedure
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a possible reading of up to 250 V AC.
2. Connect the meter probes between the 2 main AC voltage points on the wall outlet. The
reading obtained should be 108 V AC-132 V AC.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third prong terminal (GND).
Either the same reading or a reading of 0 V should be obtained.
4. If a reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC-132 V AC at the other terminal
is not obtained, the outlet is not properly grounded. This condition should be corrected by
a qualified electrician (per article 250 of the National Electrical Code).
5. If a reading of 0 V at 1 terminal and a reading of 108 V AC-132 V AC at the other terminal
is obtained, then set the meter to the "OHMS/RX1" scale, place 1 probe at the GND
Terminal and the other probe at the terminal which gave a reading of 0 V. A reading of
less than 1 should be obtained. If the reading is not obtained, the outlet is not
adequately grounded. See a qualified electrician.
34
Installation Manual
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
2.5
INSTALLATION STEPS
The following is an overview of the standard installation process using Digital Integration.
When necessary, other sections in this manual have been referenced for more detailed
descriptions or instructions.
1. Obtain a list of current users, their extension numbers, their departments, and the type of
systems they use (mailbox, no mailbox, beeper, car phone, etc.).
2. Assess your customers’ needs before setting up the system. You will save yourself time
later by giving customers what they need up front. Ask the office manager how the VPS
will be used. Give examples.
Recommend that your customer use a word processor to log the greetings. You will find
these files much more easily than the worksheet pages if you need to make changes
down the road.
3. Connect the power cord to the VPS.
CAUTION
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the
socket-outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
4. Standard Initialization (For Digital Integration Connection)
a) Program the ports of the PBX for voice processing (see Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL PBX).
Program the KX-TA624, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD816, the
KX-TD308, the KX-TD500, the KX-TDA series, or the KX-TAW series for Voice
Mail integration.
•
KX-TA624
•
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232, KX-TD308, KX-TD500, KX-TDA
series, KX-TAW series
Program may be performed on-site or at the office.
All memory is stored and will be retained when the unit is powered up as
long as the DIP Switch has been reset to position [0] prior to turning the
unit off.
b) Unplug the power cord of the VPS.
c) Plug station wire(s) from the PBX into VPS (see 2.6 CONNECTIONS).
d) Connect the personal computer to the VPS with a Null Modem Cable (see 2.7.2
Connecting the RS-232C Cable).
e)
f)
g)
h)
Set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Plug in the power cord of the VPS.
Wait until the "warning" appears on the screen.
Set the DIP Switch back to position 0.
Installation Manual
35
2.5 INSTALLATION STEPS
CAUTION
If the DIP Switch is not reset to position 0 after initialization, all programming will
be lost when the voice processor loses power!
5. Perform Quick Setup (see Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM).
6. Check Quick Setup:
•
•
The Power Indicator on the Voice Processor should be solid.
The screen output should be: [On Line].
If you do not see the "On Line" message, check the following:
•
•
•
•
•
The line cord to the Voice Processor has 4 conductors.
The programming on the KX-TA624 is correctly set in System Program [130], or
[130] and [131].
The programming on the KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 or KX-TD308 is
correctly set in System Program [117].
The programming on the KX-TD500 is correctly set in the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port
Assignment" screen.
The programming on the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series is correctly set in the
"3.Groups-7.VM(DPT) Group-2.Unit Setting" and "1.Configuration-8.Extension
Port" screens.
7. Set up Class of Service (COS) for each user. Customize voice prompts if necessary (see
Appendix B SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE).
8. Perform Administrative Program through a personal computer (see Appendix B SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE).
CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while the VPS is activated so as not to cause
malfunction.To turn the power off after installing the VPS, unplug the
power cord from the VPS a few minutes after disconnecting station wire(s).
36
Installation Manual
2.6 CONNECTIONS
2.6
CONNECTIONS
2.6.1
Connecting to the PBX
The VPS can be connected to up to 2 extension ports of the PBX. Use a 4-conductor wire for
connection with KX-TA624 that uses APT Integration, and for connection with KX-T series
systems that use DPT Integration. Use a 2-conductor wire for connection to all other PBXs.
4-Conductor Cable
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
Modular Connection
B:
R:
G:
Y:
RJ-11
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
Outer Pins
Inner Pins
Terminal wire
L
T
R
H
2.6.2
RJ-11
5
4
3
2
Opening the Ferrite Core
Insert your finger into the opening of the ferrite core and open it as shown below:
Connect a 4-conductor cable or 2-conductor cable to the VPS and run the cable through the
ferrite core (see the following sections). Close the ferrite core.
Installation Manual
37
2.6 CONNECTIONS
2.6.3
Connection for APT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To KX-TA624
Extension Jacks 07 and 08
(or 15 and 16)
To Extension
Port of the PBX
2.6.4
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
Connection for DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To a KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Any Extension Jack except Jack 01
To Extension
Port of the PBX
38
Installation Manual
Y
G
R
B
Y
G
R
B
2.6 CONNECTIONS
2.6.5
Connection for Non-APT/DPT Integration
Ports 1-2 of the VPS
Telephone Line
Modular Jacks
PORT 1
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 2
To Extension Ports of
Non-APT/DPT Integration PBX
To Extension
Port of the PBX
G
R
G
R
Installation Manual
39
2.7 TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.7
TERMINAL CONNECTION
2.7.1
Requirements for Connecting Programming Terminal
The programming terminal must be connected with a serial cable with an RS-232C connector
at the RS-232C port. This must be a null modem cable. This enables system administration
(system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis) to be performed.
Communication parameters of the VPS have been set to the following values at the factory:
Table 2-2 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
2.7.2
Baud Rate:
9600 bps
Word Bit Length:
8 Bits
Parity:
None
Stop Bit Length:
1 Bit
Connecting the RS-232C Cable
RECOMMENDED:
Before connecting the cable, switch off the power on both the data terminal and the
VPS.
VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM
POWER
Insert the RS-232C cable into the VPS with the connector indicating the same direction.
The cable must be shielded and no longer than 2 m {6.5 feet}.
40
Installation Manual
2.7 TERMINAL CONNECTION
9-pin Cable Printer/IBM®-PC
VPS (9 pin)
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(EIA)
Pin
no.
Pin
no.
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(EIA)
BB
RXD
2
2
RXD
BB
BA
CD
TXD
DTR
3
4
3
4
TXD
DTR
BA
CD
AB
CC
SG
DSR
5
6
5
6
SG
DSR
AB
CC
7
8
RTS
CTS
CA
CB
VPS (9 pin)
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(EIA)
25-pin Cable Printer/PC
Circuit
Signal
type
name
(EIA)
Pin
no.
Pin
no.
1
3
FG
RXD
AA
BB
BB
RXD
2
BA
CD
TXD
DTR
3
4
2
TXD
BA
AB
CC
SG
DSR
5
6
20
7
DTR
SG
CD
AB
5
6
8
CTS
DSR
DCD
CB
CC
CF
Table 2-3 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Circuit Type
Pin
Number
Signal Name
RS-232C
CCITT
1
2
FG
TXD
Frame Ground
Transmitted Data
AA
BA
101
103
3
4
RXD
RTS
Received Data
Request To Send
BB
CA
104
105
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
CC
107
Installation Manual
41
2.7 TERMINAL CONNECTION
Table 2-3 Pin Configuration of the RS-232C
Circuit Type
Pin
Number
2.7.3
Signal Name
RS-232C
CCITT
7
8
SG
DCD
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
AB
CF
102
109
20
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
CD
108.2
RS-232C Signals
Frame Ground (FG)
Connects an external ground to the unit frame, usually the ground pin of the AC power
cord.
Transmitted Data (TXD)—output
Conveys signals from the unit to the terminal/printer. A "mark" condition is held unless
data or BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data (RXD)—input
Conveys signals from the terminal/printer to the unit.
Request To Send (RTS)—output
This lead is held on whenever DSR is on.
Signal Ground (SG)
Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)—output
This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is RS-232C on-line. Circuit DTR
ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the terminal/printer.
It is switched off when the unit is RS-232C off-line.
42
Installation Manual
Section
3
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS
Installation Manual
43
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1
GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
3.1.1
APT/DPT or Inband Signaling?
There are 3 types of integration available on the VPS: Inband Signaling, APT and DPT. The
VPS used with any other brand of telephone equipment requires inband equipment.
KX-TA624 that can use APT Integration is:
•
KX-TA624 Version Y581A or higher.
KX-TD/KX-TDA/KX-TAW series PBXs that can use DPT Integration are:
•
KX-TD308 Version P871F or higher
•
KX-TD816 Version P301O or higher
•
KX-TD1232 Version P231U or higher
•
KX-TD500 Version Q171A or higher
•
KX-TDA series Version 1.0 or higher
•
KX-TAW series Version 1.0 or higher
Likewise, the KX-TA1232 can also use DPT Integration:
•
KX-TA1232 Version P831AA or higher (all versions)
Notes
•
•
3.1.2
To the VPS, the KX-TA1232 looks identical to the KX-TD1232.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may
not be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration (see
4.1.1 Why Digital Integration is Important). For more information, call National Parts
Center at 1-800-833-9626.
Why Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single-line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the VPS operation depends on the
capabilities and features provided by the PBX; its performance will vary when connected with
different PBX systems. For example, Follow-on (or Called Party) ID is a feature of the PBX. If
the PBX does not have this feature, the VPS cannot transfer calls directly to the correct
mailbox and play the Busy or No Answer greeting for that mailbox.
3.1.3
How the VPS and the PBX Communicate
To the PBX, the VPS looks like SLT sets. The PBX thinks that the VPS is an SLT, and the VPS
mimics all actions a live attendant would carry out from an SLT.
For the VPS and the PBX to communicate, proper signaling is important. Like an attendant,
the VPS places calls by going off-hook and dialing numbers. It starts call transfers with a
hookswitch flash to put callers on hold and then dials the extension number. By recognizing
call progress tones from the PBX, the VPS decides how calls should be handled. Inband
Integration allows the PBX to send certain digits (touchtone) to the VPS, allowing it to
recognize the status of the extension and take the appropriate action.
44
Installation Manual
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
Table 3-1 VPS/PBX COMMUNICATION
PBX to VPS
VPS to PBX
Call Progress Tones
• ringback
• busy
• reorder
Touchtones
SLT Signals
• on/off hook
• hookswitch flash
• touchtones
The VPS must also have access to certain PBX features. For example, if the VPS takes a
message, one way it can notify the mailbox owner is by dialing the PBX’s Message-WaitingLamp-On code. Once new messages are retrieved, the VPS dials the Message-WaitingLamp-Off code for that same mailbox owner.
3.1.4
PBX Requirements for Integration
The PBX must have certain capabilities and features to work with the VPS. (Although this
section includes tests to help you evaluate the PBX, it may be necessary to refer to the PBX’s
documentation for detailed capability and feature descriptions.)
Single Line (Tip/Ring) Port Circuits
The VPS can only be connected to a PBX that supports SLT sets. Some PBXs need an OPX
card to provide this connection. However, some OPX cards do not provide all the
capabilities listed in this section.
Following are the minimum current and voltages that the PBX must supply:
Table 3-2
Minimum Loop Current
20 mA
Minimum Line Voltage
7 V DC
Minimum Ringing Voltage
40 V AC
Station to Station Touchtone Signaling
For system users to access VPS services and features, they must be able to send touchtones
from their telephones to the VPS port. As a general rule, SLT sets can perform station-tostation touchtone signaling; however, many proprietary telephones cannot. Some PBXs need
to be programmed to make proprietary sets use touchtone signaling.
If the PBX does not provide station-to-station touchtone signaling, VPS services and
features will be limited.
TEST: Call an SLT extension from the telephone in question. When the call
is answered, see if the person receiving the call hears touchtones when
numbers are dialed.
Installation Manual
45
3.1 GUIDELINES FOR INTEGRATION
Message Waiting Notification from an SLT
The PBX extensions should light a lamp or receive stutter dial tone when the MessageWaiting-Lamp-On code is dialed by the VPS. The VPS functions best when the extension
number of the voice mailbox owner follows the Light-On or Light-Off code. On some PBXs,
however, the extension number is dialed first, followed by a hookswitch flash and then the On
code. This presents a problem if the extension is answered before the VPS sends the hookswitch flash.
If the PBX does not provide message waiting notification from an SLT, the VPS can only
notify mailbox owners by dialing a beeper number or user-assigned extension.
This process slows down VPS performance as it dials the beeper or extension number and
waits to confirm notification. The beeper or user-assigned extension notification is meant to
be used for necessity, usually for mailbox owners who are often out of the office (e.g., sales
people or field representatives). The only other option, without message waiting notification,
is for mailbox owners to periodically call the VPS to check for messages.
TEST: See if dialing the On code from an SLT can turn on an extension’s
message waiting indicator.
Screened Transfer from an SLT
The PBX must provide a screened transfer from an SLT for the VPS to function properly.
A screened transfer:
1. Puts the caller on hold, usually with a hookswitch flash.
2. Dials the extension.
3. Checks to see if the called subscriber is in, out, or on another line, and whether or not that
subscriber accepts the transfer.
4. Completes the transfer (by going on-hook) or returns to the caller to say that the party is
busy or not available. It then gives the caller an opportunity to leave a message.
If the PBX does not provide screened transfer from an SLT, the VPS cannot give callers the
option to leave a message in a subscriber’s mailbox.
TEST: Place an outside call from an SLT. See if you can set up a screened
transfer to another extension. Next, try the same test with an internal call.
(The VPS may have to transfer both types of calls.)
Follow-on ID or Called Party ID
When forwarding or transferring a call to the VPS, a PBX with Follow-on ID sends the mailbox
number of the called subscriber to the VPS before connecting the caller. The VPS responds
by playing that subscriber’s personal greeting. This operation is sometimes called Call
Forward to Mailbox. Without this feature, the VPS cannot immediately play the greeting when
the line is busy or there is no answer and allow the caller to leave a message.
46
Installation Manual
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2
PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2.1
General Guidelines and Definitions
Optimal performance of the VPS/PBX system relies on proper VPS programming. There are
3 categories of hardware settings: RS-232C, Port Settings, and PBX Interface Parameters.
Entering a number sets some of the parameters, while others use sequence codes.
3.2.2
RS-232C Settings
•
•
•
•
•
3.2.3
Baud Rate (300-38400): Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in bits-persecond.
Word Bit Length (7-8): Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Parity (N, O, E): Specifies the parity used for error detection.
Stop Bit Length (1-2): Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of the byte.
Default: 9600, 8, N, 1
Port Settings
There is no need to change these in a typical installation. Only change these parameters
when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Each port on the VPS
should match the type of signaling the PBX expects. If you need to change these settings, refer
to the PBX manual or customer support office to get the correct values for these settings.
•
Flash Time—100 ms, 300 ms, 600 ms, 900 ms:
The minimum length of time that the PBX requires to recognize a hookswitch flash.
Choose the amount that is equal to or greater than the PBX’s setting.
•
CPC Signal (Calling Party Control Signal)—NONE, 6.5 ms, 150 ms, 300 ms, 450
ms, 600 ms:
The length of time allowed for the short break in loop current that is used to indicate
that the caller has hung up; usually set to NONE, since most PBXs do not provide
this signal to single line ports. If choosing a setting other than NONE, use an amount
equal to or less than the PBX or telephone company provided CPC signal.
•
Disconnect Time—1 s-8 s:
The length of time that the line is temporarily unavailable after a call has ended.
•
Dial Mode—Touchtone, Pulse 10 pps, Pulse 20 pps:
The type of signaling the PBX single line port expects to receive (pps = pulses per
second).
Installation Manual
47
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
3.2.4
PBX Interface Parameters
Dialing Parameters
•
•
PBX Type:
Specifies the type of PBX which is connected to the VPS.
Integration Mode:
Specifies the method of integration to be used between the VPS and PBX. If PBX type is
set to the Panasonic KX-T series, the Inband Signaling parameters are set automatically
and should not be altered. APT Integration is only available when a KX-TA624 PBX is
connected and the software is upgraded. DPT Integration is only available when a KX-TD/
KX-TDA/KX-TAW series or KX-TA1232 PBX is connected and the software is upgraded.
Table 3-3 SEQUENCE CODES
D
Disconnect
F
Hookswitch Flash
R
Ring Detection
S
Silence Detection
T
Dial Tone Detection
W
Wait for 1 Second
X
Dial Extension
A
Answer
0-9,
•
•
•
•
•
•
48
,#
Touchtone Digits
Operator Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to the operator.
Example: FTX [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial (operator) extn.]
Extension Transfer Sequence:
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension.
Example: FTX [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial extn.]
Alternate Extension (Transfer Sequence):
Tells the VPS how to transfer a call to an extension that belongs to the "Alternate
Extension Group". This is useful for extensions that need a special transfer procedure
(i.e., blind transfer) such as modem extensions.
Example: FTXD [hookswitch flash—dial tone—dial extn.—hang up]
Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension is busy. PBXs differ in how
they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension does not answer. PBXs
differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Reconnect Sequence on Refused Call:
Tells the VPS how to return to the caller if the called extension’s owner has enabled Call
Screening to not take the call. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an
SLT to determine the sequence.
Installation Manual
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
•
•
•
•
Light On Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn on a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Light Off Sequence for Message Waiting Lamp:
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must use to turn off a message waiting lamp at
an extension.
Call Waiting Sequence:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to perform call waiting when the called extension
is busy. PBXs differ in how they handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the
sequence.
Release Sequence for Call Waiting:
This sequence is carried out by the VPS to release call waiting. PBXs differ in how they
handle this function. Test from an SLT to determine the sequence.
Inband Signaling
These parameters are used when the Integration Mode is set to Inband. If the PBX type is set
to a KX-T series system, these parameters will be automatically set. If another type PBX is
used, check that system’s installation manual for settings.
Table 3-4
Code
(default)
Call State
Sent to the Voice Mail Port When...
1
Ringback Tone
The extension dialed is ringing.
2
Busy Tone
The extension dialed is busy.
Reorder Tone
An invalid extension number is dialed or the call is
inadvertently connected to another Voice Mail port (also
heard when no touchtone receiver is available to the Voice
Mail extension).
4
DND
The extension dialed has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).
5
Answer
The extension dialed is answered.
6
Forwarded to Voice The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and another
Mail (Ringing)
Voice Mail port is able to answer. (This lets the first Voice
Mail port, usually an Auto Attendant, send the call to the
other Voice Mail port.)
7
Forwarded to Voice The extension dialed is forwarded to Voice Mail and no other
Mail (Busy)
Voice Mail ports are available to accept the call. (This
signals the Voice Mail port [usually Auto-Attendant] to let the
caller to leave a message.)
8
Forwarded to Extn. The extension dialed is forwarded to another non-Voice Mail
extension.
9
Confirmation Tone The Message Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp
Off code is dialed successfully.
3
#9
Disconnect
The caller disconnects. The central office must set a CPC
signal to the PBX line for this signal to work for outside calls.
Installation Manual
49
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
Digit Translation Table Parameters
These parameters allow PBXs that have a fixed Follow-on ID sequence to be used with the
VPS. For example, a Follow-on ID sequence of [
1001] can be changed to [#61001] by
using these parameters.
•
Inter-Digit Time-Out:
This parameter defines the interval of incoming signals (Follow-on ID) from the PBX
to the VPS. The Digit Translation Table applies the digits received within this time to
translation.
•
Input-Output (up to 8 alphanumeric characters):
When the system receives digits within the inter-digit time, it checks them against the
input table. If they are found, the system utilizes the output digits in their place.
Transfer to Outside Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will transfer calls to outside lines from the following
services: Custom Service, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID
Callback.
[Outside Transfer Sequence]
•
Call Transfer to Outside Sequence:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to transfer calls to outside lines.
•
Call Transfer to Outside Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect the line when the
transferred party is busy.
•
Call Transfer to Outside Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect the line when the
transferred party does not answer.
•
EFA Transfer Sequence:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to transfer calls to outside lines
using EFA (External Feature Access).
•
EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on Busy:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect the line when the
party transferred with EFA (External Feature Access) is busy.
•
EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on No Answer:
This parameter specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect the line when the
party transferred with EFA (External Feature Access) does not answer.
•
Outside Transfer Answer Mode:
This parameter specifies the answering method the VPS uses to recognize whether
the destination party has answered the transferred outside call.
[Trunk Group]
•
EFA Transfer:
This parameter specifies whether or not the VPS uses EFA (External Feature
Access) when transferring an incoming outside call to an outside line.
•
Caller ID Callback:
This parameter specifies whether or not the VPS allows a subscriber to call back the
party who left a message in his mailbox with the Caller ID number sent from the PBX.
•
Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback:
This parameter specifies the sequence of outside line access codes for Caller ID
Callback.
This parameter is available when the VPS executes Caller ID Callback without using
EFA.
50
Installation Manual
3.2 PBX PARAMETERS AND PORT SETTINGS
•
Caller ID Modify Table (1-4):
This parameter specifies the number of the Caller ID Modify Table that is used when
the VPS converts the Caller ID Number sent from the PBX to the VPS.
[Caller ID Modify Table]
•
Local Area Code/International Code:
This parameter specifies the local area/international codes that are used when the
VPS converts the Caller ID Number sent from the PBX to the VPS.
•
Remove Digits (0-9):
This parameter specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the telephone
number (sent from the PBX) to make up a telephone number for a local area/
international/long distance call. Digits are removed from the beginning of the
received digits.
•
Additional Dial:
This parameter specifies the number to be added to the telephone number (sent from
the PBX) to make up a telephone number for a local area/international/long distance
call. The number is added to the beginning of the received digits.
VPS Port Parameters
These parameters specify the extension numbers of VPS ports.
•
Extension Number of VPS Port 1-2:
This parameter specifies the extension number of each VPS port. The maximum
number of ports depends on the VPS model.
Note
Extension numbers of the VPS ports will automatically be assigned when: (1) Auto
Configuration is executed, or (2) PBX type has been changed.
The remainder of this section consists of step-by-step guides for software
verification and programming of the recommended Panasonic PBX systems.
If you (the dealer) have any problem as you go through this section,
please call 1-800-211-PANA(7262).
Installation Manual
51
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.1
VPS Programming for Inband Integration
Set parameters from the System Administration Terminal. The table below lists recommended
parameters for Panasonic KX-T series PBXs.
Table 3-5
PBX Type
Other
T308/
Manufacturers T616
Integration Mode
None
None
Inband
T1232/
TA624
T96
None
None
Inband
T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308
TD500
TDA/
TAW
series
None
None
None
None
Inband
Inband
Inband
Inband Inband
Operator Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX
(A)
FTX
(A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
FTX (A)
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on No
Answer
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
Light-On
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
*
N/A
T701X#
T#91X T 9X
T701X
T701X
T 701X
Light-Off
Sequence for
Message Waiting
Lamp
*
N/A
T702X#
T#90X
T#9X
T700X
T700X
T 700X
Call Waiting
Sequence
*
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
1
1
1
52
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Table 3-5
Other
T308/
Manufacturers T616
PBX Type
Release
Sequence for Call
Waiting
*
N/A
(A)
3.3.2
*
N/A
T1232/
TA624
T96
F
N/A
T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308
TD500
TDA/
TAW
series
N/A
F
F
F
Check with manufacturer.
Not Available
Adding "A" for "answer" to the operator and extension transfer eliminates the message:
"You have a call" when the AA transfers a call. The VPS disconnects after line is answered.
Adding "D" for "disconnect" creates a blind transfer.
KX-T123211D Software Verification and Programming
for Inband Integration
1. Check the software version of the KX-T123211D by using System Program [98], which
shows the software version number:Y201Z940430(TM3)
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (format YYMMDD). In
this example, the date code is April 30, 1994 (year, month, day). For this software version,
the software production date of the PBX must be April 30, 1994, or later.
If the software production date of the PBX is earlier than 4/30/94, call National Parts
Center (1-800-833-9626) to order a software upgrade.
2. Enable System Program [80] for each extension connected to the VPS.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-T123211D which extensions are connected to the
VPS. Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow-on ID and DTMF call status
signaling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the Voice Mail integration and DTMF
integration features are also enabled.
3. Enable System Program [81] to turn on DTMF Integration. On extensions with the Voice
Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-T123211D can send codes (touchtones) to indicate
call states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls; outside calls
only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-T123211D is programmed for CPC detection
and the Central Office sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 3-3 SEQUENCE
CODES in the Section 3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters.
4. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program
[60].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions
into this group.
5. Enable hunting for the VPS extension group using System Program [08].
Installation Manual
53
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
6. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension group to circular using System Program [09].
7. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial
7301# to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-T123211D from sending
Executive Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all
Voice Mail port extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
8. At every user’s extension, go off-hook and dial 7192#. This sets the proper Follow-on ID
sequences so that forwarded calls go directly to the extension’s mailbox. The KXT123211D automatically sends the extension’s digits to the Voice Mail port before
connecting the caller.
For Follow-on ID to work:
•
Ports connected to the VPS must be assigned as Voice Mail ports.
•
Extensions must be forwarded to the first port of the Voice Mail (using the Busy/
No Answer mode or the All Calls mode).
•
The mailbox number should be the same as the extension number.
Interaction with other features:
•
Call Forwarding—If the extension is forwarded to an extension that is also
forwarded, the forwarding will not work.
•
Call Hunting—Hunting does not interfere with Follow-on ID.
•
Call Transfer—Calls transferred to an extension with Follow-on ID and call
forwarding enabled will be forwarded directly to the mailbox.
•
Data Line Security—We recommend that all Voice Mail port extensions have
this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording by Executive Override tone
or Call Waiting tone.
9. Select the appropriate outside (CO) Line feature settings depending on how your
customer plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup,
or C) to only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended outside (CO) line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [51] and [52] to set this
parameter. Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt
group. The KX-T123211D will allow incoming CO calls to hunt only if the outside
(CO) lines are DIL to the first port of the hunt group. Lines programmed as
"Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [47] (Day Mode) and [48] (Night Mode) to enable ringing at the
operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call
before the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each
extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [49] (Day Mode) and
[50] (Night Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to
"Normal". Use System Programs [51] and [52] to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
54
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [47] (Day Mode) and [48] (Night Mode) to enable ringing on every
extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [49] (Day Mode) and [50] (Night
Mode).
CO Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to "Normal". Use System
Programs [51] and [52] to set this parameter.
3.3.3
KX-TA624 Programming for Inband Integration via the
Manager’s Extension
Note
If your PBX is the KX-TA1232, please refer to the procedure described in 3.3.5 KXTD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via
the Manager’s Extension or 3.3.6 KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming
for Inband Integration via the Operating and Maintenance Tool for programming.
1. Enable System Program [102] for each extension connected to the VPS. Jack 07, or jacks
07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS as the Voice Mail port. Jack 15, or jacks 15 and
16 can be assigned for the VPS2.
This parameter is used to tell the KX-TA624 which extensions are connected to the VPS.
Ports with this parameter enabled can receive Follow-on ID and touchtone call status
Signaling (busy, answered, disconnect, etc.) if the DTMF Integration features are also
enabled in System Program [103].
2. Enable System Program [103] to turn on DTMF Integration. On extensions with the Voice
Mail port parameter enabled, the KX-TA624 can send codes (touchtones) to indicate call
states; this increases VPS efficiency. Codes apply to all transferred calls; outside calls
only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-TA624 is programmed for CPC Detection, and
the Central Office sends the CPC signal). Refer to the Table 3-3 SEQUENCE CODES in
Section 3.2.4 PBX Interface Parameters.
3. Put all extensions connected to the VPS into 1 extension group using System Program
[600].
Reserve this extension group for these extensions! Do not mix other extensions
into this group.
Note
Up to two VPS units can be connected to the KX-TA624. When two VPS units are
connected to the KX-TA624, 2 different extension groups should be assigned for each
VPS in System Program [600]. One extension group is for jack 07, or jacks 07 and 08 of
the KX-TA624. The other extension group is for jack 15, or jacks 15 and 16.
4. Enable hunting for the VPS extension groups using System Program [100].
Installation Manual
55
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
5. Set the hunting type for the VPS extension groups to circular using System Program
[101].
6. At every VPS extension, temporarily connect an SLT or butt set, go off-hook and dial
7301# to turn on Data Line Security. This prevents the KX-TA624 from sending Executive
Override or Call Waiting tones to these extensions. We recommend that all Voice Mail port
extensions have this feature enabled to avoid interruption of recording.
7. Select the appropriate outside (CO) line feature settings depending on how your
customer plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup,
or C) to only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Recommended outside (CO) line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415]
(Night Mode), [416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to
the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA624 will allow
incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside (CO) lines are DIL to the first
port of the hunt group. Lines programmed as "Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing at the operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call
before the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for
each extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode),
[412] (Night Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to
"Normal". Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and
[416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter.
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to a few seconds for each
extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode),
[412] (Night Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to
"Normal". Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and
[416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter.
56
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
CAUTION
DO NOT create a mailbox in both VPS for the same extension. Each extension can
have a maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS. The extension should assign a Voice
Mail extension from the VPS which contains its mailbox as the destination for Call
Forwarding and Voice Mail Transfer. DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the
other VPS. For example, if jack 06 (extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1,
assign extension 107 or 108 as the destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see the
following diagram).
Extension 106
6
VPS1
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
7
KX-TA624
8
Group A
Mailbox for Extension 106
VPS2
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
Group B
Installation Manual
57
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.4
KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration
Whenever possible, we recommend that you use DPT Integration. However, in some cases,
this is not possible. In the following situations, you need to use Inband Integration:
•
Your PBX is a third-party telephone system.
•
You have a KX-TD500, but all the extension cards are analog types.
•
You have a KX-TD500, but the DHLC/DLC cards are ancient versions (therefore,
cannot support DPT Integration).
1. Assignment of the extension card to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
b) Assign the slot card type to be installed to "DHLC", "HLC", "SLC", "ESLC", or
"SLC-M" SLT interface supports.
c) Click "Apply" to save the slot card type assignment.
d) Set "Card Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
58
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
2. Assignment of the extension ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Assign "Attribute" of the port to be connected to "TEL" (default).
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory
numbers).
Note
This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port. To
reach the Voice Mail system, users dial these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA
extension groups have been assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the
VPS through additional programming.
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Port Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
Installation Manual
59
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3. Assignment of the extension line to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "4-2 Extension Line" screen.
b) Set "Data Line Mode" to "Yes".
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
This program prevents the VM port from being interrupted by "Call Waiting", "Hold
Recall", and "Executive Busy Override" features during a call.
Screen output:
60
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
4. Settings for the trunk (CO line) features
Select the appropriate trunk (CO line) feature settings depending on how your
customer plans to use the VPS.
•
The VPS answers all incoming outside calls promptly.
Go to [Recommended Settings (1)].
•
The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified
number of rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (2)].
•
The VPS answers when an extension user does not take the call after a specified
number of rings.
Go to [Recommended Settings (3)].
[Recommended Settings (1)]
If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a specific
extension number (VPS port).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
In order to utilize the Caller ID features, you must Set "Caller ID" to "Enable".
Screen output:
Installation Manual
61
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (2)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by the Operator (Operator
backup):
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a specific
extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which Operator has been assigned.
Screen output:
62
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (CO line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Screen output:
Installation Manual
63
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension before
forwarding (redirecting).
Screen output:
64
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (3)]
If the VPS is only answering incoming outside calls not answered by user extensions:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "4-1 Trunk Line" screen.
2) Assign "Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (CO line) to a specific
extension number.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Installation Manual
65
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "3-1 Trunk Group" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night" for the trunk (CO line) group.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
Specify the FDN for the extension group to which VM or AA has been assigned.
Screen output:
66
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2-4 System Timer 1/2" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Time" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
This parameter tells the KX-TD500 how long to let a call ring at an extension before
forwarding (redirecting).
Screen output:
3.3.5
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 and KX-TD308
Programming for Inband Integration via the Manager’s
Extension
Select a maximum of 2 station ports to be connected to the VPS. Plug each station into a Voice
Mail port.
Go into System Program [602] and assign the Voice Mail stations to a different extension
group. By default, all stations are in Extension Group 1.
Go into System Program [106] and assign the new Extension Group to Auto Attendant (AA).
Installation Manual
67
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.6
KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, and KX-TA1232 Programming
for Inband Integration via the Operating and
Maintenance Tool
1. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming".
(BATCH [1] or INTERACTIVE [2]).
•
Before choosing Batch Programming, you must open a file in the Disk File
Management Menu (Item 3).
•
Before choosing Interactive Programming, you must connect with the system in
the DSHS Connect/Disconnect menu.
Main Menu
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
2. Choose "Station" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. ARS
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. Caller ID
Select the number: [2]
3. Choose "Station Setting" from the Station Menu.
Station Menu
1. Station Setting
2. COS & Mailbox ID
3. CO line Outgoing
4. DIL 1:N
5. ISDN Extension Setting
6. SDN Extension CO outgoing
7. Flexible CO Keys
8. Flexible PF Keys
9. DSS
10. Lunch/Break Group
11. FWD/DND Setting
12. FWD/DND Setting (OPX)
Select the number: [1]
68
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
4. Enable XDP ports. Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group 8.
Station Setting
Jack EXT
01-1 [ 101 ] [
01-2 [ 201 ] [
02-1 [ 102 ] [
02-2 [ 202 ] [
03-1 [ 103 ] [
03-2 [ 203 ] [
04-1 [ 104 ] [
04-2 [ 204 ] [
05-1 [ 105 ] [
05-2 [ 205 ] [
06-1 [ 106 ] [
06-2 [ 206 ] [
07-1 [ 107 ] [
07-2 [ 207 ] [
08-1 [ 108 ] [
08-2 [ 208 ] [
Name
X
D
P
]N
] ]N
] ]N
] ]N
] ]Y
] ]Y
] ]N
] ]N
] -
E
X
G
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[8]
[1]
[8]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Doorphone
Day
Night
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
YYYY
YYYY
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
NNNN
LCS
Mode
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
Stop Rec
FWD Cordless
N/A
PITS
Time
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
N
[00]
–
[00]
5. Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "System".
6. Choose "Miscellaneous" from the System Menu.
System Menu
01. Day/Night
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Quick Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Special Carrier
09. Timer
10. Voice Mail
11. Voice Mail Integration
12. UCD
13. Phantom
14. Opera/Manager/EXT Group
15. Miscellaneous
16. Caller ID Modification
17. Switch Type
18. DID
19. Lunch/Break Time
20. System Time
21. Version
22. ISDN Card
23. T1 Card
24. T1 Minor Error
Select the number: [15]
Installation Manual
69
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
7. Choose the "Call Hunting" extension group. Set the last extension group to [A] for
Automated Attendant.
Miscellaneous
EXP1
Expansion Card Type (Master) => COT
(Slave ) => COT
EXP2
EXT1
EXT1
EXP3
EXT2
EXT2
Local Access => Priority = 1
TRG No. = [1]
2
[2]
3
[3]
4
[4]
5
[5]
6
[6]
7
[7]
8
[8]
Call Hunting => EXG No. = 1
D
2
D
3
D
4
D
5
D
6
D
7
D
8
A
SPD TRS Override
CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key
CO-Key
Adjust Time
=>
=>
=>
=>
PBX Code
=> [
Disable
Enable
Disable
[01:00] AM
HOTEL FEATURE
DID SELECT
Off-Hook Monitor
=> Off
=> EXT Number
=> Enable
Caller ID Extension
EXP 1 Not Stored
EXP 2 Not Stored
EXP 3 Not Stored
EXP 4 Not Stored
]
8. Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select
"CO Line Setting 1". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt
group.
CO Line Setting
70
CO
C
T
D
D
P
C
CPC
DIL 1:1
R
No
O
R
I
T
P
I
Detection
EXT No
E
N
G
A
M
S
D
Mode
L
F
Out
Day
Night
V
DIL 1:1
Lunch Break
Group Grroup
01
Y
[1]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
02
Y
[2]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
03
Y
[3]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
04
Y
[4]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
05
Y
[5]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
06
Y
[6]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
07
Y
[7]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
08
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
09
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
10
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
11
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
12
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[205]
EXT[205] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.7
KX-TD308 Programming for Inband Integration via the
Operating and Maintenance Tool
1. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming".
(BATCH [1] or INTERACTIVE [2])
•
•
Before choosing Batch Programming, you must open a file in the Disk File
Management Menu (Item 3).
Before choosing Interactive Programming, you must connect with the system in
the DSHS Connect/Disconnect menu.
Main Menu
1. System Date Programming (BATCH)
2. System Date Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select menu Number:[ ]
2. Choose "Station (ALT-S)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
AuxPorts (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS (ALT-T)
ARS (ALT-A)
3. Choose "Settings (1)" in the Sub Menu.
Sub Menu
Settings (1)
Settings (2)
CO Line (O)utgoing
(D)il Line 1:N
Flex (C)o Keys :1-24
Flex (P) F Buttons :1-12
1
2
O
D
C
P
4. Choose which single line extensions will be attached to Voice Mail.
If using XDP ports, enable "XDP" for the connect jacks.
Place Voice Mail extensions in Extension Group "8".
Installation Manual
71
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
Station Setting 1
Jack
1-1
1-2
2-1
2-2
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
5-1
5-2
6-1
6-2
7-1
7-2
8-1
8-2
Ext.
[11
[21
[12
[22
[13
[23
[14
[24
[15
[25
[16
[26
[17
[27
[18
[28
Name
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
XDP
EXG
DoorPhone
Day Night
LCS Mode
[N]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[8]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Y]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[Y]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[Y]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[N]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
[STOP REC]
5. Select "SAVE(F7)". Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select
"System".
6. Choose "System (ALT-Y)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
Auxports (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS (ALT-T)
ARS (ALT-A)
72
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
7. Choose "Miscellaneous" from the System Menu.
System Menu
(A)ccount Codes
Caller (I)D
Class of Se(R)vice
(D)ay/Night
(E)mergency/Quick Dial
(F)loating Extensions
Fle(X)ible Numbers
(M)iscellaneous
P(H)antom Extensions
Seria(L) Interface
S(P)ecial Carrier
(T)imers
Add. F(U)nctions - SYSTEM
Add. Functions - (C)OS
(V)M Status/Command DTMF Set
Voice Mail Inte(G)ration
A
I
R
D
E
F
X
M
H
L
P
T
U
C
V
G
8. Choose the "Call Hunting" extension group. Set the last extension group to "[AA]" for
Automated Attendant.
Miscellaneous
Automatic Access => Priority
CO No.
=> 1
=> [1]
2
[2]
Call Hunting => EXG No.
=>
2
[DIS]
Automatic Hold By CO Button
=> [Disable]
Automatic Hold By DSS Button
=> [Enable]
SPD TRS Override
=> [Disable]
FAX Transfer Extension
=> [
]
Caller ID Extension
=> [
]
Caller ID Modification
Area Code
Local Call Del,Add
Long Distance Call Del,Add
=> [
]
=> [3 ] [
=> [0 ] [1
1
[DIS]
3
[3]
3
[DIS]
4
[DIS]
5
[DIS]
6
[DIS]
7
[DIS]
8
[AA]
]
]
9. Select "SAVE(F7)". Return to the System Data Programming Menu.
Installation Manual
73
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
10. Choose "CO-Line (ALT-L)" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
AuxPorts (ALT-U)
Manager (ALT-M)
System (ALT-Y)
CO-Line (ALT-L)
Station (ALT-S)
TRS(ALT-T)
ARS(ALT-A)
11. Choose "Settings (2)" in the Sub Menu, and program all lines DIL to the first extension
of the Voice Mail hunt group.
Sub Menu
Settings (1)
1
Settings (2)
2
(I)ntercept/Timers/PBX Access Code I
CO Line Setting
CO
1
2
3
74
Installation Manual
CPC
Signal
Detection
Incoming
CPC
Signal
Detection
Outgoing
[400 ms]
[400 ms]
[400 ms]
[Disable]
[Disable]
[Disable]
DIL 1:1
EXT NO.
DAY
NIGHT
[25
[25
[25
]
]
]
[25
[25
[25
]
]
]
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3.3.8
KX-TDA/KX-TAW series Programming for Inband
Integration
Whenever possible, we recommend that you use DPT Integration. However, in some cases,
this is not possible. In the following situations, you need to use Inband Integration:
•
Your PBX is a third-party telephone system.
•
You have a KX-TDA/KX-TAW series PBX, but all the extension cards are analogue
types.
1. Assignment of VM (DTMF) Group
a) Go to the "3.Groups-8.VM(DTMF) Group-2.Group Setting" screen.
b) Assign a floating extension number to the desired VM (DTMF) group.
c) Assign extension numbers to "Extension Number of the SLT Port connected to
VM". Incoming calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM Port number.
d) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
Installation Manual
75
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
2. Settings for the trunk (outside line) features
Select the appropriate trunk (outside line) feature settings depending on how
your customer plans to use the VPS.
•
The VPS answers all incoming outside calls promptly.
Go to [Recommended Settings (1)].
•
The VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified time.
Go to [Recommended Settings (2)].
•
The VPS answers when an Incoming Call Distribution Group does not take the
call after a specified time.
Go to [Recommended Settings (3)].
[Recommended Settings (1)]
If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "10.CO & Incoming Call-2.DIL Table & Port Setting" screen.
2) Assign "DIL Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to
a floating extension number (VPS Port).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Notes
•
•
76
Installation Manual
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
The above screen output appears only when all the trunk cards mounted on your
PBX are LCOT8 cards.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (2)]
If the VPS answers when the operator does not take the call after a specified time:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
If the VPS is answering all incoming outside calls:
1) Go to the "10.CO & Incoming Call-2.DIL Table & Port Setting" screen.
2) Assign "DIL Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to
a specific extension number (operator extension).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
Installation Manual
77
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
b) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) destination:
1) Go to the "4.Extension-1.Wired Extension-1.Extension Settings" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for the operator’s
extension to a floating extension number (VPS Port).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
78
Installation Manual
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
c) Assignment of IRNA (Intercept Routing No Answer) timer:
1) Go to the "2.System-4.Timers & Counters-1.CO / Extension" screen.
2) Assign "Intercept Timer" parameter.
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
This parameter tells the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series how long to let a call ring at an
extension before forwarding (redirecting).
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
Installation Manual
79
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
[Recommended Settings (3)]
If the VPS answers when an Incoming Call Distribution Group does not take the call after a
specified time:
a) Assignment of DIL 1:1 line
1) Go to the "10.CO & Incoming Call-2.DIL Table & Port Setting" screen.
2) Assign "DIL Destination Day/Night/Lunch/Break" for each trunk (outside line) to
a specific extension number (floating extension number of the Incoming Call
Distribution Group).
3) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Notes
•
•
80
Installation Manual
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
For more information on programming the Incoming Call Distribution Group
(e.g., VM Group Assignment, Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
Assignment), refer to the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series manuals.
For example, if the "DIL Destination" for the Incoming Call Distribution Group is
assigned to floating extension number 290, the above screen will be displayed.
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
b) Assignment of overflow destination:
1) Go to the "3.Group-5.Incoming Call Distribution Group-1.Group Setting"
screen.
2) Assign "Time out & Manual Queue Redirection-Destination" for the Incoming
Call Distribution Group to a floating extension number (VPS Port).
3) Assign "Overflow Time" parameter.
4) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
Installation Manual
81
3.3 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs
3. Setting for Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS.
Callers’ messages can be recorded as soon as calls (intercom calls and incoming
calls for an Incoming Call Distribution Group) are intercepted by the VPS, by
following the steps below:
a) Go to the "3.Groups-8.VM(DTMF) Group-1.System Setting" screen.
b) Assign "Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence" to "Answer by Mailbox".
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
82
Installation Manual
Section
4
INTEGRATING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL PBX
Installation Manual
83
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.1
GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.1.1
Why Digital Integration is Important
The VPS works well with most PBXs because its connections are made through a standard
single line (tip/ring) telephone interface. However, the communication between the PBX and
VPS is best when Digital Integration is used; the VPS is already set up to communicate
through Digital Integration.
Once Digital Integration is established, the PBX sends information to the VPS through the data
link. This information enables the VPS to identify the extension that is calling, know where from
and why a call is forwarded, and recognize what the caller wants to do. This communication
allows features that are only available with Digital Integration—several of which are described
below:
Table 4-1 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration only)
The subscribers and the Message Manager can
program their extensions from a remote location to
forward various types of calls to a desired extension or
an outside telephone.
Auto Configuration
The VPS knows what extension names/numbers exist
on the PBX and creates mailboxes for each extension
automatically. Also sets the VPS clock with data from
the PBX clock.
Live Call Screening
Extension users can monitor messages as they are
being left in the mailbox or intercept if required.
Two-Way Recording
Extension users can record conversations into their
own mailboxes by pressing one button.
Two-Way Transfer
Extension users can record conversations into
another person’s mailbox by pressing a button and
dialing an extension number.
One-Touch Two-Way Transfer An extension user can record his conversation in
(DPT Integration only)
another person’s mailbox by just pressing one button.
Available only with KX-TDA/KX-TAW series.
84
Direct Mailbox Access
The subscriber can directly enter his mailbox when he
calls the VPS. He does not have to dial his mailbox
number.
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
Each PBX trunk (CO line) group can be assigned one
of 4 incoming call services: Voice Mail Service,
Automated Attendant Service, Interview Service and
Custom Service.
Intercom Paging*1
Callers can page subscribers through built-in
speakers and external paging equipment. For a Caller
ID Caller, if his name has been recorded for the Caller
Name Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page.
Installation Manual
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Table 4-1 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES
Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal)*1
The VPS announces the prerecorded Caller ID
callers’ names when: (1) extension users listen to
messages from assigned numbers left in their
mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from assigned
numbers to the users, and (3) the VPS pages the
users by intercom.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both
system and personal caller name announcements,
the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Caller ID Call Routing*1
The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-assigned
Caller ID numbers to the specified extension, mailbox
or Custom Service.
DID Call Routing*2
(DPT Integration only)
The VPS automatically sends calls from pre-assigned
DID numbers to the specified extension, mailbox or
Custom Service.
Personal Greeting for Caller
ID*1
Each subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting
messages for special callers.
Time Synchronization (DPT
Integration only)
Whenever the PBX sets a new date and time or when
DPT Integration is established, the data is
automatically registered in the VPS.
Toll Saver*2
Subscribers can check their mailboxes from preassigned Caller ID numbers or by dialing a preassigned DID number without incurring telephone
charges.
*1
*2
When an incoming outside call reaches the VPS via the PBX, the VPS will
wait about 2 rings before answering the call to receive the Caller ID
information properly from the PBX.
This waiting time can be changed by using the WCID command (see 7.2.20
Wait for Caller ID (WCID) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS).
DID Call Routing and Toll Saver using DID numbers are only available when
the VPS is connected to the following PBXs with DPT Integration.
•
KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
•
KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
•
KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX (see 3.1.1
APT/DPT or Inband Signaling?), you may not be able to utilize some of the features listed
above. For more information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
Installation Manual
85
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
4.2
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TA624
4.2.1
KX-TA624 Software Verification and Programming for
Digital Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TA624 has the proper software level to allow Digital Integration with
the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TA624 Installation Manual for instructions on how to enter the system
programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Check the software version of the KX-TA624 using System Program [998].
Example: Y581AYYMMDD(M)
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
Digital Integration, the software version of the PBX must be Y581A or higher.
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, call National Parts Center (1800-833-9626) to order a software upgrade.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [998].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE). The system displays the ROM version and the
date it was created.
This version must be Y581A or higher for Digital Integration to be utilized.
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
Date and time are automatically synchronized between the VPS and the Panasonic KXTA624 during Auto Configuration or Quick Setup.
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [009].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jacks will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper Digital Integration information to those
ports. Jack 07, or jacks 07 and 08 can be assigned for the VPS1 as the Voice Mail Port.
Jack 15, or jacks 15 and 16 can be assigned for the VPS2.
•
KX-TVS95 (2 ports): assign max. 2 jacks
86
Installation Manual
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
Extension
group 7
VPS1
7
Port 1
8
Port 2
KX-TA624
VPS2
15
Port 1
16
Port 2
Extension
group 8
From the SYS-PGM NO ?screen:
a) Enter [130] (for VPS1) or [131] (for VPS2).
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Disable
c) Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER).
Screen output: Port 7 or Port 15
d) To assign 2 jacks, Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) again.
Screen output: Port 7& 8 or Port 15&16
To assign 1 jack, skip this step.
e) Press STORE.
f) Press END (HOLD).
Conditions:
The lowest jack (jack 07 or jack 15) entered here must
be connected to the Port 1 of the VPS.
To change the current assignment from "Port 7" to
"Port 7 & 8", you must first change it to "Disable".
Likewise, if you want to change it from "Port 7 & 8" to
"Port 7", you must first change it to "Disable". If the
current assignment is already "Disable" , you can
make a change in 1 step. This condition also applies
to System Program [131].
When "Port 7 & 8" is selected in program [130],
extension jack numbers 07 and 08 will be in
extension group 7 automatically. Likewise, when
"Port 15& 16" is selected in program [131], extension
jack numbers 15 and 16 will be in extension group 8
automatically. Also the Station Hunting type is set as
"Circular" automatically in each of these 2 extension
groups.
5. Select the appropriate outside (CO) Line feature settings depending on how your
customer plans to use the VPS: A) to answer all incoming calls, B) as an operator backup,
or C) to only answer calls not answered by user extensions.
Installation Manual
87
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
Recommended Outside (CO) Line feature settings:
a) If the VPS is answering all incoming calls:
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415]
(Night Mode), [416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter. Program all lines DIL to
the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt group. The KX-TA624 will allow
incoming outside calls to hunt only if the outside (CO) lines are DIL to the first
port of the hunt group. Lines programmed as "Normal" do not hunt.
b) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by the operator (Operator Backup):
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [408] (Day mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing at the operator’s extension (jack).
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give the operator time to answer the call
before the VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each
extension connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode),
[412] (Night Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to
"Normal" . Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and
[416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter.
Table 4-2 2 CO (Outside) Lines, 2 Ports
CO Lines
Ports
1
1, 2
2
1, 2
c) If the VPS is only answering calls not answered by user extensions:
Flexible Ringing Assignment—For each outside (CO) line, use System
Programs [408] (Day Mode), [409] (Night Mode) and [410] (Lunch Mode) to
enable ringing on every extension (jack) that you want to have ring.
Delayed Ringing Assignment—To give users time to answer the call before the
VPS picks up, we recommend setting the delay to 3 or 4 rings for each extension
connected to the VPS. Use System Programs [411] (Day Mode), [412] (Night
Mode) and [413] (Lunch Mode).
Outside (CO) Line Mode—Set the mode for each outside (CO) line to
"Normal". Use System Programs [414] (Day Mode), [415] (Night Mode) and
[416] (Lunch Mode) to set this parameter.
6. Connect the jack(s) assigned in Step 3 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming, and voice messages (except User1 and
User2 prompts).
88
Installation Manual
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system
initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
•
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•
"Checking Flash Memory Cards." is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
•
The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports
until "1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
APT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
APT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message is shown when the digital (APT) connection between the VPS and
telephone system cannot be established.
Installation Manual
89
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
Possible causes of the message: "APT Interface Connection is not
Established"
Table 4-3
Cause
Action
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default PBX
type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232 under
DPT Integration), this message will always
appear when connecting to another type of
PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the Contact National Parts Center
proper software level to support APT/DPT
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
Integration.
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
APT/DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
CAUTION
When 2 VPSs are connected to the KX-TA624, the following 2 procedures should
be done to make the VPSs work correctly.
1. Delete a mailbox in either VPS so that each extension has only ONE
MAILBOX. After Auto Configuration has been executed, an extension has
a mailbox in both VPS1 and VPS2. However each extension can have a
maximum of 1 mailbox in either VPS. To delete a mailbox, Type [D] (Delete)
in the "Make (Make/Delete)" field (see "Step 4 Creating Mailboxes" in 5.1.3
Starting the Quick Setup).
The extension should assign a Voice Mail extension from the VPS which
contains its mailbox as the destination for Call Forwarding and Voice Mail
Transfer. DO NOT assign a Voice Mail extension from the other VPS. For
example, if jack 06 (extension 106) has its mailbox in the VPS1, assign
extension 107 or 108 as the destination, not extension 115 or 116 (see
diagram below).
90
Installation Manual
4.2 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TA624
2. Change the extension numbers of both VPS port 1 and 2 for VPS2 from 107
and 108 to 115 and 116 (see "Extension No. of the VPS port 1-2" in Table
B-52 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
Extension 106
6
VPS1
Port 1
Extension 107
Port 2
Extension 108
7
KX-TA624
8
Mailbox for Extension 106
VPS2
15
16
Port 1
Extension 115
Port 2
Extension 116
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [107]. If the VPS
answers, you have an APT connection.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TA624 should be able to communicate
through Digital Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from the VPS,
the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when programming the
VPS.
Installation Manual
91
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.3
KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL
INTEGRATION
Follow the procedure below to program the VPS card for DPT Integration.
1. Assignment of the VPS card to be connected to the VPS
Note
If the VPS card to which the VPS will be assigned is already installed in the KX-TD500,
skip the steps a through d. If a new VPS card is installed in the KX-TD500, follow the steps
below.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Go to the "1-1 Slot Assignment" screen.
Assign the slot "Card Type" to be installed to "DLC" or "DHLC" card.
Click "Apply" to save the card type assignment.
Set "Status" to "INS".
Screen output:
92
Installation Manual
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
e) Check the information of "Card Properties" and confirm the LPR version of the
card.
Note
The LPR Version must be "2" or higher for the VPS card (101: DLC/DHLC) to which
the control channel will be assigned.
Screen output:
f)
Check the information of "CPU Card Information" and confirm the Software
Version of the KX-TD500. The software version must be Q171A or higher for DPT
Integration to be utilized.
Notes
•
•
If the software version of the KX-TD500 is lower than this, you may not be able
to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
In the example below, Q171AB represents the software version and 010427A
represents the software production date code (year, month, day).
Screen output:
Installation Manual
93
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
2. Assignment of the ports to be connected to the VPS
a) Go to the "1-3 Extension Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the appropriate VPS card (101: DLC/DHLC) in the "Card No." menu.
c) Set the attribute of the valid ports to be connected to the VPS to "VPS (DPT)" .
d) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
The parameters except for "Attribute" will disappear and the DN (Directory Number)
will be cleared.
Screen output:
94
Installation Manual
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
3. Assignment of VPS card and its model
a) Go to the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the corresponding equipment number in the "TVS No." menu.
c) Select "TVS80/110/200-1/200-2" in the "Type" menu.
Note
Depending on the version of the KX-TD500, the selection might be "TVS200-1". In
this case, select "TVS200-1" to connect the KX-TVS95.
d) Select the card (101: DLC/DHLC for jacks 1-8; 201: DLC/DHLC for jacks 9-12) which
connects with the VPS in the "VPS Card" menu.
Screen output:
Installation Manual
95
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4. Assignment of the extension ports connected to the VPS
a) Continue the programming in the "1-4 VPS (DPT) Port Assignment" screen.
b) Select the extension port number of the card (DLC/DHLC) to which the VPS (DPT)
jack is to be connected in the "Port No." menu.
Note
This menu is displayed only when the attribute of the ports is assigned to "VPS
(DPT)" in step 2.
This program tells the KX-TD500 which extension ports are connected to the VPS.
This allows the KX-TD500 to send the proper Digital Integration information to these
ports.
Jack No.1 must be assigned, because its port is used as the channel to control the
VPS.
c) Assign "DN" for the port (click "DN Refer" to check the available directory
numbers).
Note
This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since each port connected to the VPS provides two extensions, this enables you to
assign extension numbers to each port. To reach the Voice Mail system, users dial
these extension numbers.
d) Assign "Extension Group No." for the port.
Note
Specify the extension group number (126 or 127 by default) to which VM or AA is
assigned. Group numbers 1 to 128 are available to the VPS through additional
programming.
(Selecting VM has the same effect as selecting AA, regardless of how the VPS is
programmed.)
e) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
f) Set "Status" to "INS".
96
Installation Manual
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
5. To set the trunk (CO line) features, follow the instructions in "Settings for the trunk (CO
line) features" (3.3.4 KX-TD500 Programming for Inband Integration in 3.3
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH PANASONIC KX-T SERIES PBXs).
6. Set the PBX to send DID numbers to the VPS.
a) Go to the "2-7 System Option 6" screen.
b) Enable "67.Sending DID Number to VPS".
Note
This setting enables the PBX to send DID numbers to the VPS. If you want to use the
features which utilize DID numbers (e.g., Toll Saver, DID Call Routing), you must
enable this setting.
Installation Manual
97
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
7. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
8. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
9. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
10. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system
initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
•
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•
"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
98
Installation Manual
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
•
The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and
the ports until "1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not
Established"
Table 4-4
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default PBX
type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232 under
DPT Integration), this message will always
appear when connecting to another type of
PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the Contact National Parts Center
proper software level to support APT/DPT
at 1-800-833-9626
Integration.
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
APT/DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
Installation Manual
99
4.3 KX-TD500 PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
11. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
12. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [1065]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD500 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
We recommend that the KX-TD500 system has any optional extension cards installed and
telephones connected before starting the VPS.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
100
Installation Manual
4.4 KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
4.4
KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING
FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
A group of DPT ports connected to a VPS with DPT Integration is called "VM (DPT) Group"
for the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series. Each VM (DPT) Group consists of a maximum of 12 ports (24
channels) of the VPS.
Only one VM (DPT) Group can be assigned for the KX-TDA50 and KX-TAW. On the other
hand, up to two VM (DPT) Groups can be assigned for the KX-TDA100/TDA200; that is, two
VPSs can be connected to one PBX.
It is necessary to assign the VM (DPT) Group and VM (DPT) extension ports to use DPT
Integration.
1. Assignment of VM (DPT) Group
a) Go to the "3.Groups-7.VM(DPT) Group-2.Unit Setting" screen.
b) Assign a floating Extension Number for VM Unit number.
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Note
You can use a maximum two VM (DPT) groups (Unit No.1 and Unit No.2).
All extension ports for one VM (DPT) group should be connected to only one DHLC
card or only one DLC card.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
Installation Manual
101
4.4 KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
2. Assignment of VM (DPT) extension ports
a) Go to the "1.Configuration-8.Extension Port" screen. Follow the procedure below
for the extension port which you want to assign as a VM port.
b) Select the attribute of "DPT Property-Type" to "VM (DPT)".
c) Assign "DPT Property-VM Unit No." and "DPT Property-VM Port No.". Incoming
calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM Port number.
d) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Screen output:
Notes
•
•
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
With DPT Integration, Port 1 of the KX-TVS95 is to be connected to the PBX,
allowing for a maximum of 2 Voice Mail extensions. Therefore, there is no benefit
to assigning more than one VM (DPT) extension port per KX-TVS95.
3. To set for the trunk features, follow the instructions in "Step 2 Settings for the trunk
(outside line) features" in 3.3.8 KX-TDA/KX-TAW series Programming for Inband
Integration.
4. Setting for Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS.
Callers’ messages can be recorded as soon as calls (intercom calls and
incoming calls for an Incoming Call Distribution Group) are intercepted by the
VPS, by following the steps below:
a) Go to the "3.Groups-7.VM(DPT) Group-1.System Setting" screen.
b) Assign "Intercept to VM Sequence" to "Answer by Mailbox".
c) Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
102
Installation Manual
4.4 KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
5. Connect the jack assigned in Step 3 to the VPS.
6. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software (i.e.,
HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
7. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP switch on the VPS to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming, and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
8. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 3.5 min while the system initializes.
"System Administration" Start-Up Sequence
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have
been done as described in Section 2.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
Installation Manual
103
4.4 KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
•
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•
"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
•
The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the
ports until "1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not
Established"
Table 4-5
Cause
Action
Confirm the cabling is
The cabling between the PBX
extension ports and the VPS is not 4- connected as described in
wire or is improperly connected.
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is not programmed properly Do required integration
to support DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
9. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system's condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
10. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then
QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration Instructions.
104
Installation Manual
4.4 KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PROGRAMMING FOR DIGITAL INTEGRATION
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then VM(DPT) floating group
number which you assign in "1. Assignment of VM(DPT) Group".
If the VPS answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the DIP switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TDA/KX-TAW should be able
to communicate through Digital Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
Installation Manual
105
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
4.5
CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KXTA1232 AND KX-TD308
Notes
•
•
•
4.5.1
Do not use system programs [106] or [602] for DPT Integration.
The next 2 sections (4.5.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension and 4.5.2 KX-TD1232 Software
Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and
Maintenance Tool) are for the KX-TD1232 as examples. Please refer to them for the
KX-TD816 or KX-TA1232.
And the following Section (4.5.3 KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming
for DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension) is for the KX-TD308.
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TD1232 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with
the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
Note
Two methods of programming are available on the KX-TD1232. The instructions below
show how to program without the operating and maintenance tool. For instructions on
programming with the operating and maintenance tool, please see 4.5.2 KX-TD1232
Software Verification and Programming for DPT Integration via the Operating and
Maintenance Tool.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD1232 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to
enter the system programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software—If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, remember to check both
cabinets. The software must be the same in each. Check the software version of the KXTD1232 using System Program [116].
Example: P231UYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
DPT Integration, the software version of the PBX must be P231U or higher.
(For KX-TD816, the version must be P301O or higher; for KX-TA1232, the version must
be P831AA or higher.)
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to utilize
some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, call
National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
106
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
c) Enter the system number ([0] or [1], master/slave). The system displays the ROM
version and the date it was created.
This version must be P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized (both
systems if system connection is used).
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [003].
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those
ports.
•
KX-TVS95 (2 ports): assign 1 jack
Note
If you are configuring a 2-cabinet system, all Voice Mail Ports should be assigned to either
the Master or Slave System.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: #
# #
#
c) Enter the jack numbers (02-64) of the ports you will use for Voice Mail.
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
Conditions:
Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System
Program [006]) cannot be used in this program.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Program [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is automatically
set. This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables you to assign
extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number that is not
already assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these extension
numbers. It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions
165 and 166.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [118].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
Installation Manual
107
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-01:#_ _ -1: 165
( _ _ = the port number you entered in program 117)
d) Enter the Extension Number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 165; port 2: 166)
e) Press STORE.
f) Repeat steps c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
Conditions:
No 2 jacks on the system can have the same
extension number. If you try to enter a number that is
already assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each
digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail
ports and must have 2 different extension numbers
assigned.
6. Assign Bit 9 of COS 6 using System Program [991]. This program tells the PBX whether
or not to send DID Information to the VPS.
a) Enter [991].
Screen output: COS Add Inf.
b) Press NEXT.
Screen output: COS NO?
c) Enter COS No. [6].
Screen output: 1111111111110000
d) Move the cursor to Bit 9 (the 9th bit from the right), and change [1] (default) to [0].
Screen output: 1111111011110000
Note
If Bit 9 is assigned to [1] (default), the PBX does not send DID information to VPS. If
it is assigned to [0], the PBX sends DID information to VPS.
7. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
8. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
9. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
10. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system
initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
108
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
•
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•
"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
•
The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the
ports until "1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not
Established"
Table 4-6
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default PBX
type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232 under
DPT Integration), this message will always
appear when connecting to another type of
PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
Installation Manual
109
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
Table 4-6
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the Contact National Parts Center
at 1-800-833-9626
proper software level to support APT/DPT
Integration.
or use Inband Integration under
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
APT/DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
11. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
12. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [165]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
Before starting up the VPS, please be sure to install the required extension cards and
telephones to the KX-TD1232.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
110
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
4.5.2
KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Operating and Maintenance
Tool
Follow these steps after communication between the KX-TD1232 and the programming
software has been established. Refer to the Operating and Maintenance manual for
connection information.
1. Check the software version.
a) Go to the Main Menu. Press the ALT key and the letter [V] at the same time.
b) Verify the Operating and Maintenance version being used.
Sample display:
Connect DSHS: KX-TD1232
ROM Version: [---P231UxxxxxB] CAN
DB data (PC): Empty
Version: 4.03A5 [0008301332] MUK
This version must be 4.0xA5 or higher to program the KX-TD1232 for DPT
Integration.
Note
If you have an older version of the maintenance tool but have the correct ROM
version in the system, you may still program the KX-TD1232 but you must program
using the Manager’s Extension.
c) Verify the ROM version of the KX-TD1232.
Example: P231UYMMDDB
This version must be at least version P231U or higher for DPT Integration to be
utilized (both systems if system connection is being used).
(For KX-TD816, the version must be P301O or higher; for KX-TA1232, the version
must be P831AA or higher.)
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to
utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
In the example above, the underlined digits represent the software production date
code (year, month, day).
Installation Manual
111
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
2. Go to the Main Menu. Choose "System Data Programming" (BATCH [1] or
INTERACTIVE [2]).
Main Menu
1. System Data Programming (BATCH)
2. System Data Programming (INTERACTIVE)
3. Disk File Management
4. DSHS Management
5. DSHS Connect/Disconnect
6. Quit
Select the number : [ ]
3. Choose "System" from the System Data Programming Main Menu.
System Data Programming Main Menu
1. Line
2. Station
3. System
4. Toll Restriction
5. ARS
6. Aux. Ports
7. Additional Function
8. Caller ID
Select the number : [ 3 ]
4. Choose "Voice Mail Integration" from the System Menu.
System Menu
01. Day/Night
02. Class of Service
03. Emergency/Quick Dial
04. Speed Dial
05. Absent Message
06. Flexible Numbering
07. Account Code
08. Special Carrier
09. Timer
10. Voice Mail
11. Voice Mail Integration
12. UCD
13. Phantom
14. Opera/Manager/EXT Group
15. Miscellaneous
16. Caller ID Modification
17. Switch Type
18. DID
19. Lunch/Break Time
20. System Time
21. Version
22. ISDN Card
23. T1 Card
24. T1 Minor Error
Select the number: [11]
112
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
5. First, enter the port numbers that will be connected to the VPS. If desired, change the
default extension numbers of the Voice Mail ports.
Voice Mail Integration
VM Port No.
VM
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Jack
30-1
30-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
Master [30] [ ] [
Slave [ ] [ ] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
] [
]
]
EXT
Name
EXG
VM
Jack
EXT
Name
EXG
[165]
[166]
[167]
[168]
[169]
[170]
[177]
[178]
[181]
[182]
[183]
[184]
[V.MAIL01]
[V.MAIL02]
[V.MAIL03]
[V.MAIL04]
[V.MAIL05]
[V.MAIL06]
[V.MAIL07]
[V.MAIL08]
[V.MAIL09]
[V.MAIL10]
[V.MAIL11]
[V.MAIL12]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
-1
-2
[171]
[172]
[173]
[174]
[175]
[176]
[179]
[180]
[185]
[186]
[187]
[188]
[V.MAIL13]
[V.MAIL14]
[V.MAIL15]
[V.MAIL16]
[V.MAIL17]
[V.MAIL18]
[V.MAIL19]
[V.MAIL20]
[V.MAIL21]
[V.MAIL22]
[V.MAIL23]
[V.MAIL24]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
6. Step 6 should only be done if the VPS is going to answer all incoming Central Office
lines directly.
Return to the System Data Programming Main Menu. Select "Line" and then select
"CO Line Setting 1". Program all lines DIL to the first extension of the Voice Mail hunt
group.
CO Line Setting
CO
C
T
D
D
P
C
CPC
DIL 1:1
R
No
O
R
I
T
P
I
Detection
EXT No
E
N
G
A
M
S
D
Mode
L
F
Out
Day
Night
V
DIL 1:1
Lunch Break
Group Grroup
01
Y
[1]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
02
Y
[2]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
03
Y
[3]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
04
Y
[4]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
05
Y
[5]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
06
Y
[6]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
07
Y
[7]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
08
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
09
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
10
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
11
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
12
Y
[8]
D
80
10
N
Disable
Disable
EXT[165]
EXT[165] Reg.
[ ]
[ ]
Installation Manual
113
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
7. Follow steps 5-12 in 4.5.1 KX-TD1232 Software Verification and Programming for DPT
Integration via the Manager’s Extension.
The required programming is now complete and the VPS and KX-TD1232 should be able
to communicate through DPT Integration.
Before starting up the VPS, please be sure to install the required extension cards and
telephones to the KX-TD1232.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
4.5.3
KX-TD308 Software Verification and Programming for
DPT Integration via the Manager’s Extension
It is important that the KX-TD308 has the proper software level to allow DPT Integration with
the VPS. Follow the procedures below to confirm the software level, then complete the
required programming before starting up the VPS.
All of the following procedures must be done after entering system programming. Refer
to the KX-TD308 Programming Guide or Installation Manual for instructions on how to
enter the system programming mode.
Software Verification
1. Verify Software—check the software version of the KX-TD308 using System Program
[116].
Example: P871FYMMDDA
The underlined digits represent the software production date code (year, month, day). For
DPT Integration, the software version of the PBX must be P871F or higher.
If the software version of the PBX is lower than this, you may not be able to utilize
some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information, call
National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [116].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
c) The system displays the ROM version and the date it was created.
This version must be P871F or higher for DPT Integration to be utilized.
2. Set the date and time using System Program [000].
3. Set PBX extension numbering using System Program [003].
114
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
4. Assign the Voice Mail Port. This program tells the PBX which jack will be connected to
the VPS. This allows the PBX to send the proper DPT Integration information to those
ports.
•
KX-TVS95 (2 ports): assign 1 jack
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [117].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: M: # #
c) Enter the jack number (2-8) of the port you will use for the Voice Mail.
d) Press STORE.
e) Press END (HOLD) when finished.
Conditions:
Jack 01 cannot be used as a Voice Mail port. A jack
programmed as a Manager Extension (System
Program [006]) cannot be used in this program.
5. Skip this step unless setting flexible numbering.
System Program [118] (Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) is automatically
set. This program allows you to assign an extension number to each Voice Mail port.
Since a jack connected to the VPS provides 2 extensions, this enables you to assign
extension numbers to each port. You can assign any extension number that is not
already assigned to another port. To reach the VPS, users dial these extension
numbers. It is not necessary to change the default programming for the extensions
295 and 296.
From the SYS-PGM NO ? screen:
a) Enter [118].
b) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM NO?
c) Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: VM-1: #_ _ -1: 295
( _ _ = the port number you entered in program 117)
d) Enter the extension number that you want this port to have.
(The default extension number for port 1: 295; port 2: 296)
e) Press STORE.
f) Repeat steps c, d, and e until all extension numbers are entered.
Conditions:
No 2 jacks on the system can have the same
extension number. If you try to enter a number that is
already assigned, you will hear an error tone. Each
digital extension connected provides 2 Voice Mail
ports and must have 2 different extension numbers
assigned.
6. Connect the jack assigned in Step 4 to the VPS.
7. Connect your personal computer to the VPS and start your communication software
(i.e., HyperTerminal, Procomm Plus, Smartcom...).
Communication Parameters: 9600, 8 Bit, None, 1
Installation Manual
115
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
8. Disconnect the power from the VPS and set the DIP Switch to position 5.
Only perform this step when initially setting up the system.
CAUTION
Setting the DIP Switch to position 5 will default the Voice Processing System,
resulting in a loss of all user programming and voice messages (except User 1 and
User 2 prompts).
9. Plug in and power up the VPS and wait approximately 2.5 min while the system
initializes.
Before starting the VPS, make sure all installation and line connections have been
done as described in Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The calls to the VPS can be processed after the Power Indicator stops flashing.
After turning the power on, the system starts up in the following sequence:
•
The Power Indicator light goes on.
•
The Power Indicator light begins to flash.
•
"Checking Flash Memory Cards" is displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Checking Flash Memory Cards.
Please wait...
PORT TEST...
SYSTEM SETUP
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
•
The VPS tests the CPU card, the flash memory, and the ports until
"1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..." is displayed.
•
Active ports are displayed on the screen.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is Established
** ON LINE MODE **
The display will alert you if System Setup is not completed successfully.
Screen output:
Active COs: 1 2
DPT Interface Connection is not Established
** OFF LINE MODE **
This message will appear when the DPT connection between the VPS and telephone
system cannot be established.
Possible causes of the message: "DPT Interface Connection is not
Established"
116
Installation Manual
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
Table 4-7
Cause
Remedy
The PBX is not a correct type. Since the VPS is
configured to communicate with the default PBX
type (the KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232 under
DPT Integration), this message will always
appear when connecting to another type of
PBX.
Connect a correct PBX and set
the PBX type by using Quick
Setup (see Section 5
CUSTOMIZING THE
SYSTEM).
The cabling between the PBX extension ports
and the VPS is not 4-wire or is improperly
connected.
Confirm the cabling is
connected as described in
Section 2 INSTALLATION.
The PBX is a correct type but does not have the Contact National Parts Center
proper software level to support APT/DPT
at 1-800-833-9626
or use Inband Integration under
Integration.
hardware settings.
The PBX is not programmed properly to support Do required integration
APT/DPT Integration.
programming as described in
this chapter.
10. Start up completed.
a) The Power Indicator light stops blinking when the start-up has been successful. (The
delay varies according to the system’s condition.)
b) "**ON LINE MODE**" is displayed.
c) System prompt [>] is displayed on the screen. To enter system administration, Press
ENTER. All parameters can be set through the menu-driven program.
Installation Manual
117
4.5 CONNECTING THE VPS WITH THE PANASONIC KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TA1232 AND KX-TD308
11. Go to the System Administration Top Menu. Select [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3]
then QSET and Press ENTER for Quick Setup and follow the Auto Configuration
Instructions.
TEST: Press the INTERCOM button and then [295]. If the VPS
answers, you have a DPT connection.
Set the DIP Switch to position 0 after initialization is complete.
The required programming is complete and the VPS and KX-TD308 should be able to
communicate through DPT Integration.
When running the Quick Setup command (Section 5 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM) from
the VPS, the PBX transmits the station information automatically. This saves time when
programming the VPS.
118
Installation Manual
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND
SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE
PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-TA1232 AND
KX-TD SERIES
The following VPS features are functional on any KX-T7xxx proprietary telephone that works
when connected to your PBX.
4.6.1
Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming
LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes. The notification method is
programmable for hands-free or private. Hands-free allows the user to monitor a recording
through the speakerphone and, if desired, intercept the call by lifting the handset. The private
mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded. By pressing the
LCS button, the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off-hook.
System Programming or PC Programming (only available for KX-TD500 users) also
determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user intercepts the call.
4.6.2
Live Call Screening Password Assignment
To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the
LCS button lit. To light this button on the telephone, press the LCS button, then enter the
password. This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the
messages as they are being left. (It is not necessary to enter PITS Programming to activate
this feature.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA624) or [799] (for KX-T series PBX that uses
DPT Integration) from system program.
3. For KX-TA624
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) twice and #.
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) twice.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: The 3-digit password you entered is displayed.
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Installation Manual
119
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.3
Live Call Screening Password Canceling
To cancel the password, follow the procedure below. (It is not necessary to enter PITS
Programming to activate this feature).
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Dial the feature number [77 ] (for KX-TA624) or [799] (for KX-T series PBX that uses
DPT Integration) from system program.
3. For KX-TA624
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) once and #.
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press a 3-digit password ([000]-[999]) once.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: Password Cancel
4. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.6.4
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment via
System Programming
This program allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the
extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter [620] (for KX-TA624) or [610] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration) from
system program.
2. Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Screen output: Jack No.?
3. Enter the jack number.
Screen output: # _ _ :Stop Rec
(_ _ = the jack number you entered)
4.
5.
6.
7.
120
Press the SELECT button (AUTO-ANSWER) until the desired selection is displayed.
Press STORE.
Press the NEXT button (SP-PHONE).
Repeat the steps 4 to 6 until all jacks are programmed.
Installation Manual
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.5
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment via Station Programming
This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox. It
determines whether an alert tone is sent or whether the recorded message is played through
the built-in speaker of the extension. The default mode is hands-free. (This is a station level
program and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial the code for the mode you want this telephone to have.
Hands-Free = Press #11 (for KX-TA624) or [71] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT
Integration).
Private = Press #12 (for KX-TA624) or [72] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT
Integration).
Screen output: Hands-Free or Private
3. Press STORE.
4. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
5. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
None
For the KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration:
A single-line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone
can also be used to monitor an incoming message. Be sure that Live Call Screening on the
connected proprietary telephone has been activated. This feature is useful when you are using
a cordless telephone. The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is
being recorded. To intercept the call, flash the hook.
Installation Manual
121
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.6
Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can program Live Call Screening features via PC programming. Follow
the procedure below to assign each feature.
1. Go to "4-2 Extension Line" screen.
Screen output:
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
3. In "LCS Settings":
a) To set LCS Password, Enter a 3-digit number (using "0-9") in "LCS Password".
Note
To cancel the password, erase the 3-digit number
b) To assign LCS Recording Mode, Set "Recording Mode" to "Keep Rec" or "Stop
Rec".
c) To assign LCS Private/Hands-free Mode, Set "Operation Mode" to "Private" or
"Hands-free".
d) To activate the LCS status, Set "Status" to "Active".
Note
To utilize the Live Call Screening features, it is necessary to first assign the LCS
Password and LCS Button (see 4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming),
and then activate the LCS status.
4. Click "Apply".
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each extension.
122
Installation Manual
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.7
Live Call Screening Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have an LCS
button lit at the time of the message reception. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key
with a lamp. Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS button on an extension. (This is a
station level program and should be done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC
Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM" .
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) button you want to assign as the LCS
button.
3. Dial [92].
Screen output: LCS
4. Press STORE.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.6.8
Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment via
Station Programming
This button assignment allows you to assign a Flexible (CO, DSS) button as a Live Call
Screening Cancel button.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC
Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM" .
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible (CO, DSS) button that you wish to assign as a Live Call Screening
Cancel button.
3. Dial [93].
Screen output: LCS Cancel
Installation Manual
123
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4. Press STORE. The STORE indicator light turns on.
The display shows the initial programming mode.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
The Live Call Screening Cancel Button Assignment is optional; Live Call Screening can also
be canceled by Pressing the FLASH button.
4.6.9
Two-Way Recording Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Two-Way Recording feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWR
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWR button on an extension. (This is a station level program and should be
done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC
Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the Flexible button (CO or DSS/BLF) that you want to assign as the TWR button.
3. Dial [90].
Screen output: 2Way-Rec:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Rec: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press Store.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
124
Installation Manual
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWR button. If this key is pressed
when all Voice Mail ports are busy, the user will hear
a reorder tone.
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.10 Two-Way Transfer Button Assignment via Station
Programming
For the Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWT
button on it. This key must either be a DSS/BLF or CO key with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a TWT button on an extension. (This is a station level program and should be
done at each individual telephone.)
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC
Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired FLEXIBLE (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the
TWT button.
3. Dial [91].
Screen output: 2Way-Trans:
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: 2Way-Trans: _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET".
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a TWT button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will
hear reorder tone.
Installation Manual
125
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.11 Voice Mail Transfer Button Assignment via Station
Programming
This feature allows an extension user to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox. This is
available with both Digital and Inband Integrations.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC
Programming).
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the VTR
button.
3. Dial [94] (for KX-TA624) or [8] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration).
Screen output: VTR
4. Dial the Voice Mail extension number.
Screen output: VTR-_ _ _
(_ _ _ = The extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET" .
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a CO or DSS/BLF key to be
programmed as a VTR button. When all Voice Mail
ports are busy and this key is pressed, the user will
hear reorder tone.
4.6.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TD500 users can assign buttons via PC programming. Follow the procedure below to
assign each button.
1. Go to "4-2 Extension Line" screen (refer to the screen image in 4.6.6 Live Call
Screening Assignment via PC Programming).
2. Select the "Card No." and "Port No." which you are going to program.
126
Installation Manual
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
3. Click "CO Key" in the upper right corner. "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys)
displays.
Screen output:
4. Click the Key Number to which a button will be assigned.
"Flexible CO Key" screen displays.
Screen output:
Installation Manual
127
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
5. Select the desired Key Type. When 2WAY-REC, 2WAY-TRN, or VTR is selected, enter
the extension number in "DN".
Example screen output:
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click "OK". "Flexible CO Key" screen (for all CO Keys) displays again.
Click "OK". "4-2 Extension Line" screen displays again.
Click "OK" or "Apply".
Repeat these steps for each extension.
4.6.13 Live Call Screening Activation
To activate the Live Call Screening status, follow the steps below.
PC programming is also available for KX-TD500 users (see 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the assigned LCS Button.
Press the assigned LCS Password.
Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red-on.
Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
128
Installation Manual
To activate the Live Call Screening features, it is
necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the
LCS password and LCS button.
4.6 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TA624, KX-
4.6.14 Live Call Screening Password Control
This feature allows Operator(s) and the Manager of the PBX to cancel the password for LCS
at any extension. If a user forgets the preprogrammed password, Operator(s) and the
Manager of the PBX can cancel the LCS password.
1. Enter PITS Programming:
For KX-TA624
With the phone on-hook, Set the MEMORY switch to "PROGRAM".
(Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
a. With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
b. Dial [99]. (Display changes to PITS-PGM Mode.)
2. Dial [#2] (for KX-TA624) or [03] (for KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration).
Screen output: Ext NO?
3. Dial the desired Extension Number, or Press [ ] to remove all passwords (for KX-T
series PBX that uses DPT Integration only).
4. Press STORE.
5. For KX-TA624
Set the MEMORY switch to "SET" .
For KX-T series PBX that uses DPT Integration
Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
4.6.15 Two-Way Recording into Mailbox
This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their mailboxes by pressing
the Two-Way Recording (TWR) button.
4.6.16 Two-Way Transfer into Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person’s mailbox
by pressing the Two-Way Transfer (TWT) button and dialing the mailbox number. This is
commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants
the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.6.17 A Restriction on TWR/TWT Activation
If your PBX is a basic KX-TD500, you can have only 8 simultaneous activations of Two-Way
Recording and Two-Way Transfer, because the basic KX-TD500 supports only 8 three-way
conferences. However, if you add the KX-TD50104 TSW-CONF (TSW Conference Expansion)
Card to your PBX, then the PBX supports an additional 64 three-way conferences. In this case,
the PBX will not limit the VPS on Two-Way conversation recordings.
Installation Manual
129
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7
DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND
SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE
PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW SERIES PBX
The following VPS features are functional on any KX-T7xxx proprietary telephone that works
when connected to your PBX.
4.7.1
Live Call Screening (LCS) Programming
LCS notifies subscribers of incoming messages to their mailboxes. The notification method is
programmable for hands-free or private. Hands-free allows the user to monitor a recording
through the speakerphone and, if desired, intercept the call by lifting the handset. The private
mode notifies the user with an alert tone when a message is being recorded. By pressing the
LCS button, the user can monitor the message and intercept the call by going off-hook.
System Programming also determines whether the mailbox continues to record after the user
intercepts the call.
4.7.2
Live Call Screening Password Assignment
To allow the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the
LCS button lit. To light this button on the phone, press the LCS button, then enter the
password. This password prevents others from activating the LCS feature and listening to the
messages as they are being left. (It is not necessary to enter Station Programming to activate
this feature.) PC programming is also available (see 4.7.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via
PC Programming).
Note
The term "Live Call Screening Password", used in KX-TA/KX-TD series PBXs, has the
same meaning as "Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)" used in KX-TDA/KXTAW series PBXs. For more information, refer to the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series manuals.
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the feature number [ 799].
3. Press [1].
Screen output: Enter PIN
4. Enter any password of maximum 10 digits and [#].
Screen output: Enter PIN Again
5. Enter same password of maximum 10 digits and [#].
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: PIN set
6. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
130
Installation Manual
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.3
Live Call Screening Password Canceling
To cancel the password, follow the procedure below. (It is not necessary to enter Station
Programming to activate this feature). PC programming is also available (see 4.7.6 Live Call
Screening Assignment via PC Programming).
Note
The term "Live Call Screening Password", used in KX-TA/KX-TD series PBXs, has the
same meaning as "Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)" used in KX-TDA/KXTAW series PBXs. For more information, refer to the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series manuals.
1. Lift the handset or Press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the feature number [ 799].
3. Press [0].
Screen output: Enter PIN
4. Enter the stored password of maximum 10 digits.
You will hear a confirmation tone, then a dial tone.
Screen output: PIN cleared
5. Hang up or Press the SP-PHONE button.
4.7.4
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
This program allows the VPS to continue recording the conversation in the mailbox after the
extension intercepts the call during the Live Call Screening. (This is station level programming
and should be done at each individual phone.)
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Enter [26].
Screen output: Rec. after LCS
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Press the SELECT button (AUTO ANSWER) until the desired selection is displayed.
Screen output: Stop Record/Keep Record
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Installation Manual
131
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.5
Live Call Screening Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment
This program assigns a VPS response for when a message is being left in a mailbox. It
determines whether an alert tone is sent and whether the recorded message is played through
the built-in speaker of the extension. The default mode is hands-free. (This is station level
programming and should be done at each individual phone.) PC programming is also available
(see 4.7.6 Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Enter [25].
Screen output: LCS Private
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Press the SELECT button until the desired selection is displayed.
Screen output: Hands-Free/Private
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
A single-line telephone that is connected to the same extension as a proprietary telephone
can also be used to monitor an incoming message. Be sure that Live Call Screening on the
connected proprietary telephone has been activated. This feature is useful when you are using
a cordless telephone. The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is
being recorded. To intercept the call, hang up and go off-hook.
132
Installation Manual
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.6
Live Call Screening Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TDA/KX-TAW series users can program Live Call Screening features via PC
programming. Follow the procedure below to assign each feature.
1. Go to "4.Extension-1.Wired Extension-1.Extension Settings" screen.
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select "Option 4" window of the extension for which you want to program.
Assign LCS Recording Mode to "Keep Record" or "Stop Record".
Assign LCS Answer Mode to "Hands free" or "Private".
Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
Installation Manual
133
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.7
Live Call Screening Button Assignment
For the Live Call Screening feature to work at an extension, the extension must have an LCS
button on it and the button must be lit at the time of the message reception. This button must
either be a DSS/BLF or CO button with a lamp. Follow the procedure below to assign an LCS
button on an extension. (This is station level programming and should be done at each
individual phone.) PC programming is also available (see 4.7.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button you want to assign as the LCS
button.
3. Press [92].
Screen output: LCS
4. Press STORE.
5. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
6. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
134
Installation Manual
This button must be assigned and lit for LCS to
operate. To light this, press the button and enter the
LCS password (see 4.7.2 Live Call Screening
Password Assignment).
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.8
Two-Way Recording (TWR) Button Assignment
For the Two-Way Recording feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWR
button on it. This button must either be a DSS/BLF or CO button with a lamp. Follow the
procedure below to assign a TWR button on an extension. (This is station level programming
and should be done at each individual phone.) PC programming is also available (see 4.7.12
Button Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the TWR
button.
3. Press [90].
Screen output: 2WAY-REC-
4. Enter a Voice Mail floating extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-REC- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The Voice Mail floating extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
4.7.9
This button must be a flexible (CO or DSS/BLF)
button to be programmed as a TWR button. When all
Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed, the
user will hear reorder tone.
Two-Way Transfer (TWT) Button Assignment
For the Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have a TWT
button on it. This button must either be a DSS/BLF or CO button with a lamp. Follow the
procedure below to assign a TWT button on an extension. (This is station level programming
and should be done at each individual phone.) PC programming is also available (see 4.7.12
Button Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the TWT
button.
3. Press [91].
Screen output: 2WAY-Xfr-
4. Enter a Voice Mail floating extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-Xfr- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The Voice Mail floating extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
Installation Manual
135
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
136
Installation Manual
This button must be a flexible (CO or DSS/BLF)
button to be programmed as a TWT button. When all
Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed, the
user will hear reorder tone.
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.10 One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT) Button
Assignment
For the One-Touch Two-Way Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have
a One-Touch TWT button on it. This button must either be a DSS/BLF or CO button with a
lamp. Follow the procedure below to assign a One-Touch TWT button on an extension. (This
is station level programming and should be done at each individual phone.) PC programming
is also available (see 4.7.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button you want to assign as the One-Touch
TWT button.
3. Press [91].
Screen output: 2WAY-Xfr-
4. Enter a Voice Mail floating extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-Xfr- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The Voice Mail floating extension number you entered).
5. Press [#].
6. Enter a Transferred extension number.
Screen output: 2WAY-Xfr-_ _ _#_ _ _
(#_ _ _ = The Transferred extension number you entered).
7. Press STORE.
8. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
9. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a flexible (CO or DSS/BLF)
button to be programmed as a One-Touch TWT
button. When all Voice Mail ports are busy and this
key is pressed, the user will hear reorder tone.
Installation Manual
137
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.11 Voice Mail Transfer (VTR) Button Assignment
For the Voice Mail Transfer feature to work at an extension, the extension must have the VTR
button. This button must either be a DSS/BLF or CO button with a lamp. Follow the procedure
below to assign a VTR button on an extension. (This is station level programming and should
be done at each individual phone.) PC programming is also available (see 4.7.12 Button
Assignment via PC Programming).
1. Enter Station (Personal) Programming:
With the phone on-hook, Press the PROGRAM button.
(Display changes to PT-PGM Mode.)
2. Press the desired Flexible (CO or DSS/BLF) button that you want to assign as the VTR
button.
3. Press [94].
Screen output: VTR-
4. Enter a Voice Mail floating extension number.
Screen output: VTR- _ _ _
(_ _ _ = The Voice Mail floating extension number you entered).
5. Press STORE.
6. Press the PROGRAM button or lift the handset to exit the Station (Personal)
Programming mode.
7. Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
This button must be a flexible (CO or DSS/BLF)
button to be programmed as a VTR button. When all
Voice Mail ports are busy and this key is pressed, the
user will hear reorder tone.
4.7.12 Button Assignment via PC Programming
The KX-TDA/KX-TAW series users can assign buttons for Two-Way Recording (TWR), TwoWay Transfer (TWT), and Voice Mail Transfer (VTR) via PC Programming. Follow the
procedure below to assign each button.
1. Go to "4.Extension-1.Wired Extension-4.Flexible Key" screen.
138
Installation Manual
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
Screen output:
Note
The above screen output is an example of the KX-TDA200.
2. Select "Extension Number / Name" for which you want to program.
3. Select the desired Key Type for any key which you want to program. When "Two-Way
Record", "Two-Way Transfer" or "Voice Mail Transfer" is selected, enter the VM Port
floating extension number in "Ext No. or Floating Ext No.". When "Two-Way Transfer" is
selected, you can enter the mailbox number of a desired destination under "Extension
Number of Mailbox". If no mailbox number is assigned, you will have to enter a mailbox
number each time you use the Two-Way Transfer feature.
4. Repeat these steps for each extension.
5. Click "Apply" to save the changed data.
4.7.13 Live Call Screening Activation
To activate the Live Call Screening status, follow the steps below. PC programming is also
available (see 4.7.7 Live Call Screening Button Assignment and 4.7.12 Button Assignment via
PC Programming).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the assigned LCS Button.
Enter the assigned LCS Password.
Confirm the assigned LCS Button is red-on.
Repeat these steps for each telephone.
Conditions:
To activate the Live Call Screening features, it is
necessary to light the LCS button after assigning the
LCS password and LCS button.
Installation Manual
139
4.7 DIGITAL INTEGRATION FEATURES AND SETUP PROCEDURES FOR THE PANASONIC KX-TDA/KX-TAW
4.7.14 Two-Way Recording (TWR) into Mailbox
This feature allows extension users to record conversations into their own mailboxes by
pressing the Two-Way Recording (TWR) button.
4.7.15 Two-Way Transfer (TWT) into Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person's mailbox
by pressing the Two-Way Transfer (TWT) button and dialing the mailbox number. This is
commonly used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants
the message recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.7.16 One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT) into
Mailbox
This feature allows an extension user to record a conversation into another person's mailbox
by pressing the One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT) button. This is commonly
used by a person who is taking a detailed message for someone else and wants the message
recorded in the mailbox at the same time.
4.7.17 Voice Mail Transfer (VTR) Programming
This feature allows extension users to transfer calls directly to a Voice Mailbox.
This is available with APT/DPT and Inband Integrations.
140
Installation Manual
Section
5
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM
Installation Manual
141
5.1 STARTING UP
5.1
STARTING UP
5.1.1
Before Programming
1. Determine the customer’s needs.
•
•
•
Work with the owner, manager, and receptionist to build the Custom Service
Greetings and Holiday Greetings.
Figure out which ports are to be answered by which greetings.
Check the software level of the PBX.
2. Use "System Administration" and your personal computer for the startup sequence.
3. After the system becomes "on line", disconnect the CO lines going into the system until
the greetings have been completed.
4. Work with the receptionist to record the system greetings. These are listed in Appendix
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES.
•
It is important to spend time training the receptionist. Making sure that the
receptionist understands the system and is capable of answering basic
questions will save you time in the end.
•
Show the receptionist how to transfer "General Delivery Mailbox" messages.
See Appendix D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX.
5.1.2
Quick Setup
Quick Setup provides a quick way to set the following programming items. Each of these must
be initially set to start the VPS operation.
Notes
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
142
Quick Setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Quick Setup cannot be performed in ASCII mode.
PBX type
Extension numbers of VPS ports
Extension names and numbers for mailboxes
Creating mailboxes
Port service setting
Password setting
Date and time setting
Activating the Quick Setup
Installation Manual
5.1 STARTING UP
Depending on your PBX type, some steps will be skipped as shown below.
Table 5-1
PBX Type
Required Procedures
KX-T308/T616
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
KX-T123211D/T336/T96*
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Non-Panasonic System
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
KX-TD816/TD1232/TA1232/TD308/TA624/
TD500/TDA series/TAW series
1
4
5
6
8
8
* Not available in the United States.
5.1.3
Starting the Quick Setup
The sequence must be followed through to the end to take effect. If you press "\", you will have
to start over. Quick setup may be performed again without erasing prior data.
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit long.
At the System Administration Top Menu, Type [5] and Press ENTER, or Type [3] then QSET
and Press ENTER. See 7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET) for more information.
Screen output:
System Administration Top Menu
or
System Administration Top Menu
5
3
QSET
Quick Setup Utility for connection to Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems
This utility provides a quick way of programming the Voice Processing System to operate
in a standard automated attendant or voice mail configuration when connected to a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system. The system will prompt you to enter, modify or
confirm settings based upon which PBX type you select.
By entering the appropriate information in the following screens, the system sets PBX
integration parameters, identifies the extension numbers connected to it, creates default
mailboxes, sets its ports to handle callers with automated attendant or voice mail service,
sets system passwords and sets the time and date. Finally, it confirms if you want to
activate the system based on the information you entered, modified or confirmed.
To proceed, press Enter. To exit and cancel Quick Setup now, press \.
Installation Manual
143
5.1 STARTING UP
1. PBX Type
a) Press ENTER.
Screen output:
Quick Setup - PBX type
Please select your PBX type.
1. KX-T308/KX-T616
2. KX-T1232
3. KX-T96
4. KX-T336
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232
6. KX-TD308
7. KX-TA624
8. KX-TD500
9. KX-TDA/TAW series
0. OTHERS
b) Select your PBX type. The required steps are different for some models. Go to the
step indicated below for that type.
Table 5-2
1. KX-T308/616
Go to Step 2.
2. KX-T123211D, 3. KX-T96,
4. KX-T336, 0. Others
Go to Step 3.
5. KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232,
6. KX-TD308, 7. KX-TA624, 8. KX-TD500
9. KX-TDA/TAW series
Go to Step 4.
Notes
•
•
•
APT Integration with the KX-TA624 will be activated automatically by selecting "7.
KX-TA624".
DPT Integration with the KX-TD816/KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232, KX-TD308, KX-TD500,
or KX-TDA/KX-TAW series will be activated automatically by selecting "5. KX-TD816/
KX-TD1232/KX-TA1232", "6. KX-TD308", "8. KX-TD500", or "9. KX-TDA/TAW
series".
APT/DPT Integration provides a quicker way to create mailboxes and set the time
and date by transferring extension names/numbers and time information from the
PBX automatically.
2. Extension Numbers of VPS Ports
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Assigned extension No. of VPS Port
Please enter extension number of VPS.
1:
2:
Please enter extension numbers.
(2 digits) : =
S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of VPS ports with 2-digit numbers. This improves the VPS
integration with the KX-T308 or KX-T616 by allowing the VPS to discriminate
between VPS extensions and non-VPS extensions.
144
Installation Manual
5.1 STARTING UP
Type [S] to go to the next screen.
3. Extension Numbers for Mailboxes
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Enter Extensions for Mailboxes
What extensions need a mailbox on this system?
1:
6:
11:
16:
21:
26:
31:
36:
41:
46:
51:
56:
61:
2:
7:
12:
17:
22:
27:
32:
37:
42:
47:
52:
57:
62:
3:
8:
13:
18:
23:
28:
33:
38:
43:
48:
53:
58:
4:
9:
14:
19:
24:
29:
34:
39:
44:
49:
54:
59:
5:
10:
15:
20:
25:
30:
35:
40:
45:
50:
55:
60:
Please enter extension numbers.
:=
P: Previous menu, N: Next menu, S: Next Screen
Enter extension numbers of subscribers who need personal mailboxes (the VPS
accepts any extension numbers within a 2- to 5-digit range). For example, to enter
the extension number 101, Press [101] and Press ENTER. You can also enter
multiple extensions. Enter the extensions from No.101 to No.110 by Pressing [101110] and Pressing ENTER.
The VPS will create mailboxes with the extension numbers entered. (See Step 4.)
Installation Manual
145
5.1 STARTING UP
4. Creating Mailboxes
To go to the next screen (S) or to change the menu (P or N), the cursor must be in
the MBX column.
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Mailbox Editing
Extension and mailbox list Assigned 62
Ext
MBX Owner (Last Name)
•••
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
101
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
•
•
Smith • • • • • • • • • • •
Jones • • • • • • • • • • •
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
••••••••••••••••
•
•
P: Previous menu,
Vacant 0
MAKE (Make/Delete)
Page 1/4
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
Make
N: Next menu,
•
•
S: Next Screen
a) To create or discard mailboxes
In the "MAKE (Make/Delete)" field: Type [M] (Make) to create the mailbox; Type [D]
(Delete) to discard the mailbox. If there are more than 62 mailboxes, the first 62 of
them are displayed with "Make" and the rest are displayed with "Delete" (screen
output: [Assigned 62, Vacant 0]).
To change the status of a mailbox from "Delete" to "Make", first change the status of
a mailbox from "Make" to "Delete" (screen output: [Assigned 61, Vacant 1]). Then
change the status from "Delete" to "Make".
b) Owner’s last name
Up to 16 alphabetic characters can be assigned as an Owner’s Last Name.
Notes
•
•
146
Installation Manual
Mailbox numbers displayed on this screen
Panasonic KX-TD/KX-TDA/KX-TAW Series or KX-TA1232 System
The same numbers as the extensions of the PBX that were automatically
transmitted to the VPS—Auto Configuration.
Other System
The same numbers as those of the extensions entered in step 3.
Mailbox Owner’s Last Name
Panasonic KX-TDA/KX-TAW Series (Version 1.0 or higher) or KX-TD500 (V4M
or higher) only
The same names as the extensions of the PBX that were automatically
transmitted to the VPS—Auto Configuration. When you create mailboxes, you
can use the transmitted names as Owner’s Last Names, or edit them (Max. 16
characters).
5.1 STARTING UP
•
The length of mailbox numbers
The Message Manager mailbox (General Delivery Mailbox) might be 2- to 5-digit
long (98, 998, 9998, or 99998).
The System Manager mailbox might be 2- to 5-digit long (99, 999, 9999, or
99999).
If both 3 and 4-digit extension numbers exist at the same time, the VPS will unify
all mailbox numbers to 4-digit length by entering [0] at the end of all 3-digit
numbers.
Example:
Extension
Numbers
Mailbox
Numbers
201
202
203
2000
2001
2002
201(0) *
202(0) *
203(0)*
2000
2001
2002
*The VPS puts [0] at the end of 3-digit numbers.
Note
After creating mailboxes for subscribers by Quick Setup, the COS parameter
"Authorization for Message Notification" (see Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS) for
COS number 1 will be set to "Yes". It will stay "No" for COS number 2 through number
62.
To program mailbox parameters other than the extension numbers and Owner’s Last
Name (or First Name), see 5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES. The caller can use "Dial by
Name" feature using the Owner’s Last Name when in Automated Attendant Service
or Voice Mail Service.
Installation Manual
147
5.1 STARTING UP
5. Port Service Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup- Port Service Setting
All ports are currently set up to handle callers with standard automated attendant operation, day and night mode, using the Custom Service feature (Custom
1). You can change the operation to standard Voice Mail (Custom 2) or leave it
as automated attendant. If necessary, Custom 1 and Custom 2 can be modified
under the menu 'Program -> Service Setting -> Custom Service.'
PORT 1
PORT 2
Day Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
Night Mode
Auto. Attend.
Auto. Attend.
A: Auto. Attend., V: Voice Mail, S: Next Screen
Auto. Attend. (using Custom 1), Voice Mail (using Custom 2)
Incoming Call Services for all ports (Day/Night) can be defined by this setting. Default
values for all ports (Day/Night) are "Automated Attendant Service (Custom 1)". To
select other incoming call services, go to "Setting Ports".
6. Password Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Password Setting
System Administrator Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
System Reset/Clear Password
(Maximum 10 characters)
NEW PASSWORD : =
VERIFICATION : =
You can assign the System Administrator Password and System Reset/Clear
Password in this screen, if necessary.
IMPORTANT
•
•
•
We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for
maximum protection against hackers.
Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
Please change the password periodically (for instructions, see 7.2.3 Set
Password (PASS) in 7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS.)
To go to the next screen without assigning the password, Press ENTER.
148
Installation Manual
5.1 STARTING UP
7. Date and Time Setting
Screen output:
Quick Setup-Time Setting
Current time is 3:04, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
Current date is MON JAN-1-2001
Enter new date (MM-DD-YY) : =
Enter the time (hour, minute in 2 digits, comma and A or P) and date (month, day and
year in 2 digits).
To go to the next screen, Press ENTER.
8. Activating the Quick Setup
Screen output:
Quick Setup - Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select 'Yes.'
To cancel and exit, select 'No.'
1: Yes
2: No
To activate the Quick Setup, Press [1] and Press ENTER.
Note
To cancel the Quick Setup, Press [2] and Press ENTER. This cancels all changes made
up to this point.
The VPS begins to change system programming data.
Screen output:
Quick-Setup
To set up the mailbox and restart, select "Yes."
To cancel and exit, select "No."
1: Yes
2: No
Setup 101
Then "PORT TEST..." "SYSTEM SETUP..." and "1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8...9..."
appear on the screen one by one.
Screen output:
PORT TEST ...
SYSTEM SETUP ...
1... 2... 3... 4... 5... 6... 7... 8... 9...
Screen output when Quick Setup is finished:
**ON LINE MODE**
>
Installation Manual
149
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2
PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Design each system according to the needs of your customer. You should be familiar with all
options for port assignment so that customers get exactly what they need and expect. Each
port can be assigned as Voice Mail, Interview Service, Automated Attendant, or Custom
Service. Custom Service is the most flexible of all the services because it allows access to the
other services by pressing one key. We recommend programming all ports as Custom
Service for caller convenience.
5.2.1
Custom Service Setting Example
Custom Service incorporates all features of the Automated Attendant and Voice Mail. Custom
Service offers callers a menu of single digits that they may use to reach the desired location
quickly and easily.
Sample Company Greeting 1
"Thank you for calling ABC company". (Company greeting should be short!)
Sample Custom Service Message
"If you know the extension number of the person you are calling, you can dial it at any time.
For a list of extensions, Press [1]; to reach the sales section, Press [2]; to reach the service
section, Press [3]; if you would like to place an order, Press [4]; all other callers, please wait
and an operator will be right with you".
Sample Custom Service Tree
Create a tree to design a route that leads callers to the desired extension, mailbox, or next
menu. This tree should include all available caller options and cannot be deeper than 8 layers.
Moreover, callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times. Discuss
available options with the customer before programming the system.
Company Greeting
Custom Service
100
Main Greeting
all ports day
Custom 2
Extension List
Custom 3
Extension List
New Cars
Transfer
to Service
Transfer
to Orders
Used Cars
The top of the tree should include what callers will hear when they are first connected to the
VPS. Then create a branch for each option until each caller option has been documented.
Next, fill in each box with the action that it represents so you can easily remember what action
corresponds to each keystroke.
150
Installation Manual
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Remember that it is possible and often necessary to have 1 custom service lead to another
custom service. For example, if someone presses [1] for sales, you might want another menu
to say "for new car sales, press [1]; for used car sales, press [2]". This way, callers are routed
directly to the person best suited to handle them.
Sample Custom Service for Foreign Languages
If you are an airline or travel agency, your callers might not be fluent in English. You can easily
accommodate several languages with Custom Service. For example, each key on the keypad
(there are 12 keys) could be assigned to a language. Record Custom Service Menu 100 so
that the caller can select a language with one-touch dialing. For example, the top menu could
be: "For English, press 1. For French, press 2. For Spanish, press 3. For German, press 4. For
Japanese, press 5. For Chinese, press 6... etc." (of course, selections should be recorded in
their respective languages).
At the next level, create menus in each language for Day Mode. For example, Custom Service
Menu 2 (the one for English callers) might be: "For departure information, press 1. For arrival
information, press 2. For reservations, press 3. To leave a message, press 4. To send a fax,
press 5". Thus at this level (or at an even lower level) a caller can be guided in his native tongue
to the right person (extension), the right message-taker (mailbox), or the right device (fax
machine).
In parallel, create menus in each language for Night, Lunch, and Break Modes. For example,
Custom Service Menu 16 for Night Mode might be: "Sorry, we are closed for the day. Our
regular business hours are from 9 am to 5 pm, Monday through Friday. If you would like to
leave a message, press 1 now. If you would like to send a fax, press 2 now". Record a similar
message for the other languages in each mode.
5.2.2
Custom Service Features
Time Service (1-5-2-2)
Set each day of the week for the correct Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode.
Intercom Paging (1-5-8-7)
This feature is only available with Digital Integration.
When needed, change the paging code for each of the paging groups.
Example for KX-TD1232: All sales telephones have been placed in extension group 3 in
system program [602]. No hunting type assigned in system program [106]. Assign each
salesperson’s mailbox to a different COS in the VPS and assign the paging group to that
COS. (This tells the VPS which paging group to dial). In the Intercom paging section,
assign the number "333" to the paging group assigned to the sales dept.
Fax Management (1-5-8-8)
Assigns up to 2 fax machines that can be extensions from the PBX. If the CNG tone is heard,
the VPS will automatically forward the call to the first fax machine. If the first fax machine is
busy or does not answer (is out of paper), the VPS forwards the call to the second fax machine.
This also allows to assign an extension as the fax manager to be notified on incoming faxes.
Installation Manual
151
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Disconnect Parameter (1-5-8-9)
Determines how many seconds of silence the VPS allows during a caller’s message before
disconnecting the call.
RS-232C Settings (1-6-1)
Allows the System Administrator to change the baud rate, parity bit, etc.
Port Setting (1-6-2)
Only to be used when connecting the VPS to a PBX other than a KX-T series PBX. Use the
CPC control of the PBX for normal disconnect problems.
Dialing Parameters (1-6-3-1)
These parameters are set automatically when Quick Setup is conducted.
Most of the settings will be left unchanged. The only setting that will be changed quite often is
the Transfer Sequence for the operator or the extension. By default, it is set at FXA on APT/
DPT Integration and FTXA for Inband Integration. In other words, the voice processor dials the
flash, waits for intercom tone and dials the extension number. By default, the VPS will stay on
the line to monitor the status of the call. If the extension user answers, the voice processor will
announce "you have a call" prior to releasing the call. This can be alleviated by adding the
letter "A" or "D" to the sequence. "A" stands for answer; the call will be transferred without the
announcement "you have a call". For a blind or unscreened transfer, add the letter "D" for
disconnect.
152
Installation Manual
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2.3
Custom Service Programming
After you have finished constructing the tree, enter the System Programming Custom Service
Settings Menu.
Access the Custom Service Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 2 (Custom Service)
The system then asks what Custom Service number you want to edit. Enter the desired
number (1-100).
The Custom Service screen is displayed:
Program - Service Setting - Custom Service Setting - Custom 1 (Not recorded)
1. Description [ ]
:=
2. Prompt Mode [ System ]
1:System 2:User1 3:User2 :=
3. Menu Repeat Cycle [ 3 ] (1-3 times) :=
4. Call Transfer Anytime [ Extn. ] (Extn./Mbx/No) :=
5. Wait for Second Digit [ 1 ] (1-5 s) :=
6. No DTMF Input Operation [ c ] (a - f, o)
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension
c. Operator
d. Exit
e. Previous Menu
f. Custom Service
o. Transfer to Outside
Select Operation :=
7. Keypad Assignment
Keypad 0 [ c ]
f. Custom Service
a. Transfer to Mailbox
b. Transfer to Extension g. Voice Mail Service
h. Call Transfer Service
c. Operator
i. Subscriber Service
d. Exit
j. Department Dialing
e. Previous Menu
Select Assignment :=
k. Dial by Name
l. Repeat Menu
m. Main Menu
n. Fax Transfer
o. Transfer to Outside
Installation Manual
153
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Enter data into the Custom Service menu; use the table below as a guide.
Table 5-3
Description
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 32
characters
(None)
The information typed in this field is for reference only.
Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Prompt
Mode
Menu
Repeat
Cycle
Call
Transfer
Any Time
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies the language that the caller will hear when
calling this Custom Service.
1-3 Times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the Custom Service
menu will be repeated before the No DTMF Input entry
is used.
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when dialing
an extension or mailbox number during the menu. If this
entry is set to "Extn.", the caller will be transferred to the
corresponding extension. If it is set to "Mbx", the caller
will be sent directly to the corresponding mailbox. If it is
set to "No", extension transfer and mailbox transfer are
disabled; only 1-digit entries work (following the
Custom Service menu).
Note
This parameter should be set to "No" when
Subscriber Service is specified as a Custom
Service option and it is desired that digits can be
entered very quickly to specify a mailbox.
Therefore, in most cases, "No" is the best setting
for this parameter. This is especially true if you do
not want to explain "Call Transfer Any Time" in your
Custom Service menu recording.
Wait for
Second
Digit
1-5 s
(1)
Used when the first digit of an extension is also a menu
choice within the Custom Service. If a second digit is
not dialed within the specified time, the menu choice is
used.
No DTMF
Input
Operation
a-f, o
(c)
Used when a caller does not dial anything when
hearing the menu (usually rotary callers).
Keypad
Assignment
154
Installation Manual
a-o
( =d, 0=c,
others=None)
Specifies the action to be performed when a keypad
digit is dialed. Callers can access specific services by
pressing the appropriate keys on their telephones.
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
Keypad Assignment Options
Table 5-4
Entry
Function
a. Transfer to Mailbox
Allows the caller to leave messages in a specific
mailbox.
b. Transfer to Extension
Transfers the caller to a specific extension.
c. Operator
Transfers the caller to the operator.
d. Exit
Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller.
e. Previous Menu
Returns the caller to the previous menu.
f. Custom Service
Transfers the caller to another Custom Service and
plays the menu.
g. Voice Mail Service
Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service.
h. Call Transfer Service
Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant
Service.
i. Subscriber Service
Allows the caller to access Subscriber Service. Digits
received after entering this code are assumed to be
the subscriber’s mailbox number. If this option is
enabled, it is strongly recommended that each
subscriber establish a password; this will prevent
unauthorized callers from accidentally or intentionally
accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
j. Department Dialing
Transfer the caller to the Department Dialing menu.
k. Dial by Name
Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 letters of a
last name of the person they wish to reach, then
transfers him to the corresponding extension.
l. Repeat Menu
Repeats the Custom Service menu prompts.
m. Main Menu
Returns the caller to the Custom Service top menu.
n. Fax Transfer
Allows the caller to send fax messages to the
extension specified as the fax extension.
o. Transfer to Outside
Transfers the caller to a specific outside line.
Installation Manual
155
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2.4
Recording Menus
After you have finished entering the parameters in each menu, record the menu messages.
Menu messages inform the caller of available options and their corresponding keys. For this
reason, the prompts must match the programming that has been input.
Note
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
1. Dial an Extension Number that is connected to the VPS to access the Message
Manager’s mailbox (998).
2.
3.
4.
5.
When the VPS answers, Press [#6 998] to enter the Message Manager’s mailbox.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
You will hear:
Enter the Custom Service prompt number [1] through [100].
To record Custom Service Exit prompt, press [0].
6. Enter Custom Service Number you want to record.
7. You will hear:
Custom Service number (entered number).
Record menu at the tone...
Follow the instructions until all Custom Service prompts have been recorded, using the tree
that you created as a guide.
5.2.5
Checking Operation
After you have entered and recorded all menus, it is important to try the program yourself to
see that all functions perform properly. Dial into the system and try all the choices to see if you
are routed correctly. Verify that each menu choice works as it should.
5.2.6
Voice Mail
Voice Mail service is a message-taking service that allows non-subscribers to leave messages
to subscribers. This service is often assigned when incoming calls are answered by a live
person. This person can then send the caller to the Voice Mail service if desired.
Callers can access Voice Mail service by:
•
Voice Mail Port—This service can be programmed independently of any or all ports
of the VPS. Callers reaching these ports immediately access Voice Mail service.
•
Voice Mail Trunk—This service can be programmed on a per trunk (CO line) basis.
Callers reaching these trunks (CO lines) immediately access Voice Mail service.
•
Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Voice Mail service by dialing [#6]
during a call.
•
Via Custom Service—This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Voice Mail service.
156
Installation Manual
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2.7
Mailbox Groups
This program allows a message to be delivered to several mailboxes at once. The message
activates the message waiting lamps on all of the proprietary telephones. These mailboxes
may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The Message Manager
can record a voice label for each System Group Distribution List (see D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES). There are 20 group lists available, and each group list can have up to 20
entries.
To establish a mailbox group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-1-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group-Enter).
2. Assign a List Number to the Mailbox Group. This number can be from 2-5 digits (same
as mailbox numbers). This number must be an unused number. In other words, the
number assigned to this group cannot be the same as another System Group Distribution
List number or mailbox number. For example, we will use the number 250.
There are 2 ways to use a System Group Distribution List:
Option A:
For inside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed
so that any subscriber can press [2] and then enter the list number (which is [250] in
this example) to deliver a message. The message will be delivered to all specified
mailboxes.
Option B:
For outside messages: The System Group Distribution List number can be designed
as a custom greeting for incoming callers. For instance, the greeting might be: "To
leave a message for the parts section, press 3". The digit "3" would be assigned to
System Group Distribution List number 250 in Custom Service Setting.
Each message waiting lamp will remain on until the message is cleared from the
individual station.
5.2.8
Extension Groups
An extension group places several extensions into the same mailbox. These extensions may
be assembled into a list called a Extension Group List. The extensions in the group list cannot
have a personal mailbox! When a message is left in this mailbox, it lights all of the message
waiting lamps of the phones that are in this group list. There are 20 group lists available, and
each group list can have up to 20 entries.
When a message is left for the extension group, it will light the message waiting lamps on each
phone. The first person that retrieves the call cancels the message waiting lamp on the other
phones. Extension groups work well in areas where the call would not be intended for a
specific person (e.g., a Parts Center, Technical Support Group, etc.).
To establish an extension group:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-5-1-2-1]
(Program-System Parameter-System Group Assignment-Extension Group-Enter).
Installation Manual
157
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
2. Enter an Extension Group List Number that has not been assigned to another mailbox
or Extension Group List (this must be a vacant number). Enter the Extensions that are
to be assigned to this group list.
3. Enter the Extension Numbers that are to be assigned to the Extension Group List.
4. Return to the Main Program Menu.
5. Type [1-1-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit).
Assign the Extension Group List Number to a mailbox. If you used the number "700"
for an Extension Group List number, assign the number "700" as a new mailbox. You must
also enter 700 as an extension.
Messages can be delivered to the new number through normal operation.
5.2.9
Interview Service
The subscriber can leave a series of prerecorded questions (up to 10) for the caller in an
Interview Mailbox. As the caller answers questions, answers are recorded in the mailbox. After
a caller records the answers, the interview mailbox lights a message waiting lamp. When
retrieving the messages, the subscriber only hears the answers to the questions.
There are 2 ways to access an interview mailbox:
•
Assign an interview mailbox to an existing mailbox
•
Assign a port as an interview mailbox
To structure an interview mailbox:
1. From the System Administration Top Menu, Type [1-1-1 Mailbox Number-1]
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit-Mailbox Number-Mailbox Setting).
2. Enter the Mailbox Number that is to be assigned to the interview mailbox.
This should be an existing mailbox number for the person who responds to the questions.
3. At "Interview Mailbox Number" parameter, Enter a Nonexistent Mailbox Number. This
will be the interview mailbox for this subscriber—please make a written note of it for future
reference. It will not show up in Mailbox Listing. If, at a later time, you want to delete the
interview mailbox, press backspace at "Interview Mailbox Number".
4. Exit System Administration Programming.
5. Enter the subscriber’s mailbox and Record the Questions. Call the VPS and Press
[#6 ] then Dial the Mailbox Number assigned to the interview mailbox. From the Main
Menu Press [6-1].
6. Confirm that your questions have been recorded. Call the VPS and Press [#6] and the
Interview Mailbox Number. All your questions should be played.
Note
When using the Custom Service setting, 1 digit can be assigned to go to the mailbox of
the Interview Service. The mailbox owner’s message waiting lamp will go on for normal
Voice Mail messages and for message left in the separate interview mailbox.
158
Installation Manual
5.2 PORT SETTING OPTIONS
5.2.10 Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant service answers incoming calls and waits for the caller to input an
extension number. It transfers the caller to the appropriate extension.
Callers can access Automated Attendant Service by:
•
Automated Attendant Port—This service can be programmed independently of any
or all ports of the VPS. Callers reaching these ports access Automated Attendant
service.
•
Service Access Command—A caller can switch to Automated Attendant service by
dialing [#8] during a call.
•
Via Custom Service—The call transfer service can be assigned to a keypad digit
within a Custom Service. After pressing this key, the caller enters Automated
Attendant Service.
Note
When the VPS calls an extension, the VPS waits for a reply. This waiting time is
established by "Call Transfer No Answer Time" in Table B-31 (B6.8 Other Parameters).
5.2.11 Department Dialing Service
Callers can access extensions by pressing a key 1 through 9 (one-touch dialing). As a guide
for the caller, the Message Manager should record the Department Dialing Menu—for
example, "Thank you for calling. For overseas travel, press 1. For domestic travel, press 2. For
group travel, press 3".
This service can be assigned to a keypad digit within Custom Service; after pressing this key,
the caller will hear the Department Dialing Menu.
5.2.12 Operator Service
This service (when enabled) can be accessed via:
•
Voice Mail—Rotary Telephone Service allows rotary callers to reach the General
Delivery Mailbox, or the operator, or a specified extension, or a specified mailbox.
•
Automated Attendant—Dial 0 and your call will go to Operator Service.
•
Custom Service—The Operator Service can be assigned to a keypad digit within a
Custom Service; after pressing this key, the caller enters Operator Service. Operator
Service can also be the destination of "no-DTMF-input".
Operator Service offers callers many chances to reach a human operator. Operator Service
can be structured as a cascade so that if Operator 1 cannot take the call, it goes to Operator
2. If that fails, the call goes to Operator 3. If that fails, the caller can record a message. At each
stage, there are other options for busy cases and no-answer cases. Operator Service can be
programmed differently for Day, Night, Lunch, or Break Mode. Each operator can be assigned
a mailbox for message-taking.
Installation Manual
159
5.3 SETTING PORTS
5.3
SETTING PORTS
5.3.1
Port Service Menu
Access the Port Service Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 3 (Port/Trunk Service)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Port Service)
Screen output:
Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service
Enter the Port Number (1-2) :=
Program - Port/Trunk Service - Port Service Menu:
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
Enter the data using the table below as a guide.
Table 5-5
Description
Company
Greeting No.
Incoming Call
Service
Value Range
(Default)
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(None)
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Description/Function
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the
port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Notes
•
•
•
160
Installation Manual
When you specify the Interview Service, one
of Subscriber’s Interview mailbox numbers
should also be specified.
When you specify the Custom Service, one
of 100 (1-100) Custom Service numbers
should also be specified.
The System Manager can change the
"Incoming Call Service" remotely by simply
calling the VPS (see C6 CHANGING THE
COMPANY GREETING AND INCOMING
CALL SERVICE SETTING).
5.3 SETTING PORTS
Table 5-5
Description
Incoming Call
Service
Prompt
Value Range
(Default)
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
Description/Function
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played
on this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can
select the language of his choice, provided the
Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual
Selection Menu and the System Administrator has
specified Prompt Selection Number in "System
Prompt Selection Number", "User 1 Prompt Selection
Number", and "User 2 Prompt Selection Number" in
Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt
for Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary
Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a
rotary caller or an External Delivery Message receiver
hears when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt
Selection Number) after the Multilingual Selection
Menu has been played.
Note
"Prompt for Rotary Callers" can be assigned only
when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to
"Selective".
Delayed
Answer Time
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or
in delay (1-60 s).
Installation Manual
161
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
5.4
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Automated Attendant parameters include: Department Dialing, Operator Parameters, and
Alternate Extension.
If the VPS needs a special transfer procedure for an extension (such as modem extension),
alternate extension should be assigned (see "Alternate Extension Assignment" in B5.1
Automated Attendant Parameters).
5.4.1
Automated Attendant Menu
Access the Automated Attendant Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 4 (Service Setting)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Automated Attendant)
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting Menu
1. Department Dialing
2. Operator's Parameters
3. Alternate Extension
5.4.2
Department Dialing
Department Dialing numbers (1-9) represent department extensions; the VPS will provide
these numbers to the caller in the initial list of prompts.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Department Dialing Menu
1. Department Dialing No.1 [ ] := 102
2. Department Dialing No.2 [ ] := 104
3. Department Dialing No.3 [ ] := 115
4. Department Dialing No.4 [ ] := 136
5. Department Dialing No.5 [ ] := 107
6. Department Dialing No.6 [ ] := 108
7. Department Dialing No.7 [ ] := 109
8. Department Dialing No.8 [ ] := 110
9. Department Dialing No.9 [ ] := 111
162
Installation Manual
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
5.4.3
Operator’s Parameters
If you enable operator service, you must set the following parameters: Operator’s Extension
and Mailbox Number, Coverage Modes, and Message Repeat Cycle.
Operator 1:
The default is set at "0" which coincides with the operator of the PBX. When a caller
tries to leave a message to the Operator 1, the message will automatically go to the
General Delivery Mailbox (GDM) by default.
Operators 2 and 3:
For KX-TDA/TAW series, KX-TD816, KX-TD1232, KX-TD500 and KX-TA1232,
Operators 2 and 3 can be assigned to a floating number that is assigned to a ring
group.
Return to Program-Service Setting-Auto. Attn. Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting - Operator's Parameters Menu
1. Day Mode
2. Night Mode
3. Lunch Mode
4. Break Mode
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
1. Operator 1
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
SELECT ITEM AND PRESS KEY
Enter the data using the table below as a guide. The table below is for Operator 1 as an
example. Please refer to it for Operators 2 and 3.
Table 5-6
Description
Operator
Service
Value Range
(Default)
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
Description/Function
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
Note
All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the
General Delivery Mailbox when the Operator
Service is disabled.
Installation Manual
163
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Table 5-6
Description
Operator’s
Extension
Value Range
(Default)
1-5 Digits
(0)
Description/Function
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
Notes
•
•
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 Digits
(998)
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a
message in this mailbox depending upon how the
Busy Coverage or No Answer Coverage modes
are set.
Operator No
Answer
Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered
within the time set, the VPS will offer other options
as defined by the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
Notes
•
•
Busy
Coverage
Mode
164
The default setting (0) cannot be used
with the Message Waiting Notification—
Lamp feature and the Remote Call
Forwarding Set feature. When using
these features, you must assign the
extension number that is included in the
Extension Numbering Plan.
The extension number must not be
assigned anywhere else (in particular, the
extension must not have a mailbox).
Otherwise, you will get an error message.
Installation Manual
This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the
"Operator No Answer Time" to 15 s.
1. Hold
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
2. No Answer Coverage extension is busy.
3. Call Waiting
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold
4. Disconnect Message
and the Operator 1 extension is called again.
(Hold)
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option
specified by the No Answer Coverage Mode to
the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when
another call is waiting using the Call Waiting
feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
5.4 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT PARAMETERS
Table 5-6
Description
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Message
Repeat
Cycle
*
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the
"Operator No Answer Time" mode.
1-3 Times
(3)
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a
message or call another extension.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller
after playing "Thank you for calling."
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to
Operator 2.
Specifies the number of times that the VPS will
play the Automated Attendant top menu.
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s
mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
•
No input to Automated Attendant.
•
No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to
"C. Operator" in Table B-15 in B5.2 Custom Service.
•
No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage (Day/
Night/Lunch/Break)" is set to "Operator Extension" in Table B-35 in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Installation Manual
165
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5
SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.1
Mailbox Setting Menu
Access the Mailbox Setting Menu through the following sequence:
System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number: = 1 (Program)
Enter The Number: = 1 (Mailbox Setting)
Program - Mailbox Setting Menu
1. Enter/Edit
2. Delete
3. Password Reset
4. Mailbox Listing
5.5.2
Entering a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 5-7
Description
Value Range
(Default)
The
Extension of
the Owner
2-5 Digits
(None)
Sets the extension to be used in conjunction with the
mailbox. Any valid number can be assigned.
The Dial by Name feature uses the last name. Both will
be printed on mailbox report.
Owner Last
Name
Up to 16
alphabetic
characters
(None)
Class of
Service No.
COS No.1-62
(1)
Defines a set of services available to each subscriber.
The Class of Services 63 and 64 are fixed to the Message
and System Managers. Most subscribers can be placed
in the same COS. Anyone who needs unclaimed
messages forwarded to a cell phone, beeper or another
mailbox would need to be in a separate COS.
Owner First
Name
166
Description/Function
Installation Manual
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-7
Description
Covering
Extension
Interview
Mailbox
Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 Digits
(None)
Specifies where a caller will be transferred when
Covering Extension is dialed or set under Incomplete Call
Handling.
2-5 Digits
(None)
Used to permit mailbox owner to have an interview
mailbox. Must be an unused mailbox.
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to Yes, calls coming to the extension through
Automated Attendant go directly to the mailbox without
ringing the extension. (Message Waiting Lamp will not be
turned on.)
Caller ID
Number 1
for Toll
Saver
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0,
(None)
Specifies up to two Caller ID numbers or a DID number
for Toll Saver. The subscriber can check whether there
are new messages in his mailbox with these phone
numbers without incurring telephone charges. Note that
when these phone numbers are specified by the
subscriber, the phone numbers are unavailable to other
subscribers in the system. (The phone numbers must be
unique.)
Caller ID
Number 2
for Toll
Saver
DID Number
for Toll
Saver
Notes
•
•
If Toll Saver is set to "Caller ID" in your Class of
Service, a DID number for Toll Saver cannot be
assigned. If Toll Saver is set to "DID number" in
your Class of Service, Caller ID Number 1/2 for
Toll Saver cannot be assigned. If Toll Saver is
set to "No" in your Class of Service, neither
Caller ID Numbers nor a DID number can be
assigned.
DID number setting for this feature is only
available when the VPS is connected to the
following PBXs with DPT Integration.
• KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
• KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
• KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
Installation Manual
167
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-7
Description
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
Value Range
(Default)
Up to 12 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #, Y, D, F, R,
T, S, W, X, A
(Y:System)
Description/Function
Specifies how the VPS transfers a call to an extension for
each mailbox (Personal Transfer Sequence).
1-9, 0, , #: DIAL CODE
Y: System
D: Disconnect
F: Flash
R: Ring
T: Tone
S: Silence
W: Transf.Wait
X: Extn
A: Answer
Notes
•
•
•
Call
Transfer No
Answer
Time
10-60s,
S: System
(System)
When "System" is selected, the VPS follows the
"Extension Transfer Sequence" pre-assigned for
the system in the "Program - Hardware - PBX
Interface - Dialing Parameters Menu".
"System" cannot be used with other sequence
codes.
This sequence has higher priority than
"Alternate Transfer Sequence".
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait before
retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at
the destination extension. This can be set for each
mailbox.
Note
When "System" is selected, the VPS follows the "Call
Transfer No Answer Time" pre-assigned for the
system in the "Program - System Parameter - Others
- Dialing Parameters Menu".
168
Installation Manual
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Notification Setting
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
3. 3rd Device
Enter The Number : =
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 5-8
Parameter
Dial Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 32 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1, 2,
or 3. The subscriber can also specify the dial number
from his telephone.
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note
The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS
and "Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper
number of "Pauses" must be inserted before the
callback entry code.
Notice
When the VPS calls to a CO line via a PRI (ISDN
Primary Rate Access Interface) card of a
Panasonic PBX, please be sure to add "#" after the
telephone number (1112223333 in the example
here):
Example: 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX#
Please contact your System Administrator for more
explanation.
Type of
Device
1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the
Dial Number (above). The subscriber can also specify
the type of device from his telephone.
Installation Manual
169
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Table 5-8
Parameter
Use Mode
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Not Use
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
2. Continuously
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
3. Scheduled
telephone.
(Continuously)
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
No. of Retries
0-9 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
Busy Delay
Time
0-120 min
(3)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
No Answer
Delay Time
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after
a no-answer condition is received before making
another notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Time Frame
1, 2
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
a.m./p.m.
Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting
Notification service for 1 week for this device.
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
SAT:
SUN:
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Note
These parameters are active only when "Use
Mode" is set to "Scheduled".
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 1
Enter the Mailbox number: =
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit Menu
1. Mailbox Setting
2. Notification Setting
3. Remote Call FWD to CO
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Enter/Edit - Remote Call FWD to CO
1. Telephone No.1 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.1 : =
2. Telephone No.2 [ ] (0-9, )
Enter the telephone No.2 : =
170
Installation Manual
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
Enter the data using the following table as a guide.
Table 5-9
Parameter
Telephone
Number 1, 2
5.5.3
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 digits
(With the KXTD816/TD1232/
TA1232)
or
Up to 24 digits
(With the KXTD500)
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO
line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
Note
This feature is available with DPT Integration only.
Deleting a Mailbox
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 2
Program - Mailbox Setting - Delete
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Are you sure? (Y/ N) : =
5.5.4
Password Reset
To reset a subscriber’s password, go to the Password Reset Menu. "Enter the Mailbox
Number" appears on the screen. Enter the mailbox number you wish to reset. "Enter the
Mailbox Number" appears again. Enter a new number, if you wish to reset more than one
password.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Program - Mailbox Setting - Password Reset
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Enter the Mailbox Number : =
Installation Manual
171
5.5 SETTING MAILBOXES
5.5.5
Mailbox Listing
This listing is a report of mailbox number assignments.
From Mailbox Setting Menu:
Enter The Number : = 4
Program - Mailbox Setting - Mailbox Listing
1: 101
6: ---11: ---16: ---21: ---26: ---31: ---36: ---41: ---46: ---51: ---56: ---61: ----
2: 103
7: ---12: ---17: ---22: ---27: ---32: ---37: ---42: ---47: ---52: ---57: ---62: ----
3: ---8: ---13: ---18: ---23: ---28: ---33: ---38: ---43: ---48: ---53: ---58: ----
4: ---9: ---14: ---19: ---24: ---29: ---34: ---39: ---44: ---49: ---54: ---59: ----
5: ---10: ---15: ---20: ---25: ---30: ---35: ---40: ---45: ---50: ---55: ---60: ----
System Manager’s Mailbox No. :999
Message Manager’s Mailbox No. :998
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit
long.
172
Installation Manual
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
5.6
TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
The System Administrator should explain the basic functions of the VPS to all the subscribers.
He should explain which service (Voice Mail service, Automated Attendant service, Interview
Service, or a Custom service) will play during the day, and what services will play during night,
lunch, and breaks. He should explain that outside callers are called "non-subscribers"
because they do not have mailboxes. VPS guidance prompts will assist non-subscribers in
reaching the extension or mailbox they need. He should explain the responsibilities of the
System Administrator, the Message Manager, and the System Manager—and how each can
be contacted (phone number and/or mailbox number).
The System Administrator should also explain the special privileges of VPS subscribers.
Subscribers can call from any touchtone telephone in the world and get their messages. To
check messages (or change mailbox parameters) from an outside telephone, do the following:
As soon as the VPS plays a guidance message, Press code [# 6 ] and then the
mailbox number. For example, a subscriber who has extension 115 and mailbox 115
would press code [# 6 115]. If the subscriber has a password enabled, the password
must be entered.
With Toll Saver enabled, the subscriber can call the VPS from anywhere in the world and find
out if there are any new messages in his mailbox without incurring telephone charges.
If the subscriber forgets his password, he should contact either the System Administrator or
the System Manager. Either one can clear the password so that the subscriber can establish
a new password.
Explain the purpose of the General Delivery Mailbox. The Message Manager will periodically
check it, and forward the contents to the appropriate subscriber.
Explain the purpose of the System Group Distribution Lists. They can be created by the
System Administrator to facilitate the distribution of messages to several subscribers. In
particular, senior staff members ought to know how to take advantage of System Group
Distribution Lists. Twenty lists can be created, with 20 mailboxes in each list.
Finally, if Custom Service menus are used, subscribers should be encouraged to listen to
these menus often and make suggestions for improvement. Custom service is a very powerful
feature of the Panasonic VPS. Make the most out of this feature.
Installation Manual
173
5.6 TRAINING THE SUBSCRIBER
174
Installation Manual
Section
6
FINAL SETUP
Installation Manual
175
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
6.1
MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox
998)
The Message Manager is responsible for recording and updating a wide variety of system
messages. Please refer to D6 RECORDING MESSAGES to see the full array of recording
tasks. Follow the instructions below to record Custom Service prompts and user prompts.
Note
The Message Manager’s mailbox might be 98, 998, 9998, or 99998.
6.1.1
Accessing the Message Manager’s Mailbox
1. Enter an Extension Number that is connected to Voice Mail.
You will hear the initial prompt:
Good morning/Good afternoon/Good evening.
Welcome to the Voice Processing System...
2.
Press [# 6 9 9 8] to access the Message Manager’s mailbox.
You will hear the following prompt if mailbox 998 has a password set:
Enter your password, followed by a pound sign.
3. Enter the Message Manager’s Password (if programmed). Otherwise, you will hear the
Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
6.1.2
Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
176
Installation Manual
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
6.1.3
Company Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Message Manager’s Main Command Menu.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [1] to change the Company Greeting.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
After you record the company greeting, it may be necessary to enter programming
through the terminal and set the company greeting assignment under the Port Settings
Menu, Trunk Service Menu and Holiday Service Menu. This tells the system what
company greeting to play on each port and trunk (CO line) group. A company greeting
should be very short.
Example: "Thank you for calling ABC Company". It is not necessary to give any other
instruction within the company greeting because instructions will follow the company
greeting automatically. If Interview Service follows, explanations should be included in the
first question (work for the subscriber who maintains the Interview Service mailbox). If
Custom Service follows, explanations should be included in the first menu (work for the
Message Manager).
6.1.4
Recording the Company Name (Enter #6 998,5,2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Message Manager’s Main Command Menu.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [2] to record the Company Name.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Note
The company name is only played when the External Message Delivery feature is used.
6.1.5
Custom Service Greetings (Enter #6 998,5,4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [4] to change the Custom Service Menu.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus. Prompts lead you through
the choices and recording process.
Example: Custom Service Greeting: "Thank you for calling ABC Company. If you know
your party’s extension, you may dial it at any time during this message".
Note
This prompt should match the prompt that is selected for each port. The recording will be
played directly after the call is received.
Installation Manual
177
6.1 MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX (Mailbox 998)
6.1.6
Customizing User Prompts (Enter #6 998,5,6)
The customer may want to enter user prompts in place of the factory-provided system
prompts. To change the user prompts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Access the Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service.
Press [5] to modify messages.
Press [6] to modify the User Prompts.
Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or Press [2] to change User Prompt 2.
Press [1] to change specified prompts, or Press [2] to change all prompts.
Enter the Prompt Number you want to change.
Continue following voice prompts through appropriate menus.
Prompts lead you through the choices and recording process.
Note
Prompt 585: The system prompt is "This is the General Delivery Mailbox". You can record
User Prompt 1 or User Prompt 2 as, "Thank you for calling ABC company. We are
currently closed, however, if you leave your name and phone number, we will return your
call as quickly as possible".
178
Installation Manual
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
6.2
SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The following steps complete the basic installation of the VPS.
When you access Subscriber Service for the first time, see 6.2.1 Subscriber Tutorial.
If you want to change the current settings of mailboxes, see 6.2.2 Changing Password,
Owner’s Name, and Personal Greetings.
6.2.1
Subscriber Tutorial
When you access Subscriber Service for the first time, the VPS guides you to set up the
mailbox with some Help messages. Simply by following the messages, you can set up these
items:
•
Password
•
Owner’s Name
•
Personal Greetings (No Answer Greeting/Busy Greeting/After Hours Greeting)
This tutorial is especially helpful for subscribers to set up their mailboxes on their own.
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox which you
want to personalize.
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
Note
A default password may be set automatically when the mailbox is created. Ask your
System Administrator.
4. Tutorial Top Menu
The following guidance plays to explain the outline of the Subscriber Tutorial service.
To listen to this guidance from the beginning, Press [0].
Welcome to the Panasonic Voice Mail System.
This is the Subscriber Tutorial service. In this service, you can set your
password, record your name and record your personal greetings before
you use this system. You can hear a Help message before each setup.
5. Setting Password
a) A Help message plays. To listen to the message from the beginning, Press [0].
b) The current setting plays. If you entered a password in Step 3, go to Step 5d below.
c) Enter your Password (up to 10 digits), then Press [#]. To skip setting the password,
Press [#].
d) Press [1] to change the setting—Return to Step 5c, or Press [2] to accept it.
Note
We recommend you change your password frequently for good security.
Installation Manual
179
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
6. Recording Owner’s Name
a) A Help message plays. To listen to the message from the beginning, Press [0].
b) The current setting plays.
c) Record the Owner’s Name at the tone.
d) Press [1] to change the setting—Return to Step 6c, or Press [2] to accept it.
7. Recording Personal Greetings
a) A Help message plays. To listen to the message from the beginning, Press [0].
Note
This Help message plays only when you access the No Answer Greeting setting for
the first time.
This does not play in the Busy Greeting or After Hours Greeting setting.
b) The current setting plays.
c) Record No Answer (Busy/After hours) Greeting at the tone.
Example: "Hi this is Tom. I am away from my desk right now but please leave a
message at the tone and I will return your call as soon as possible".
Note
The VPS will guide you to record No Answer Greeting, Busy Greeting and After
Hours Greeting in this order.
d) Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired entry.
•
•
•
•
•
[1] To review
[2] To accept
[3] To erase and try again
[4] To add
[5] To erase and exit
8. Tutorial Confirmation Menu
a) Press [1], [2], or [ ] to choose the desired entry.
•
•
[1] To confirm your settings
[2] To enter Subscriber Service
•
[ ] To end the call
Note
To end the call while in Steps 4-8, press [ ].
180
Installation Manual
6.2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
6.2.2
Changing Password, Owner’s Name, and Personal
Greetings
1. Dial the Extension Number of the VPS.
2. When the VPS answers, Press [#6 ] and Dial the Number of the mailbox whose
Password/Owner’s Name/Personal Greetings you want to change.
3. Enter your Password (if programmed), then Press [#].
You are now inside the mailbox.
4. Press [5] for Mailbox Management.
5. Press [1], [2], or [3] to choose the desired entry, and change the setting according to the
guidance you hear.
•
[1] To change the Personal Greetings
•
[2] To change the Password
•
[3] To change the Owner’s Name
TEST THE SYSTEM
Before backing up the system, call each extension to see that each port functions
as it should. Check for proper greetings and call transfers.
Installation Manual
181
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
6.3
BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
1. Choose the Utility Command. Type [SAVE], then Press ENTER. See screen output
below.
From System Administration Top Menu:
Enter The Number : = 3
Utility Command
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save ( VPS -> PC : Xmodem )
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4: User Prompts-1
5: User Prompts-2
6: Custom Service Menus
7: Personal Greetings
8: Company Greetings
Select No. : = 2
2. To start, Press [2] and then ENTER.
3. Press RETURN or ENTER.
Following steps are for HyperTerminal as an example.
4. Select Receive File from the Transfer Menu.
5. Specify a folder where data is to be saved (if necessary, use "Browse").
6. Select Xmodem as the protocol to save data.
7. Click "Receive".
8. Enter desired filename and click "OK".
The file transfer screen appears and shows download progress. Download time will
vary depending on the communication speed and file sizes.
"SAVE Completed" will appear on the screen when the file has been saved. Continue
saving the other items as needed. It is not necessary to save the "Program" because
it is resident on the flash memory (Master) and cannot be altered. We do recommend
all other data be saved including User Prompt 1 and User Prompt 2 (if they have been
recorded).
Notes
Recorded caller names for the Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal) cannot be
saved by the above procedure, only Caller ID numbers can be saved. When the saved
182
Installation Manual
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
Caller ID numbers are loaded using LOAD command, the following things should be
done:
•
For System Caller Name Announcement, the Message Manager rerecords
caller names (see "Recording System Caller Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES).
•
For Personal Caller Name Announcement, subscribers rerecord caller names
(see 4.12 Personal Caller Name Announcement in the Subscriber’s Guide).
User Prompt files are very large and can take 1 hour to save. Store saved files in a safe
area.
Installation Manual
183
6.3 BACKING UP THE SYSTEM
184
Installation Manual
Section
7
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Installation Manual
185
7.1 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
7.1
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
Initializing the system clears all voice data except user prompts and returns all system
parameters to their default settings. Throughout this section, menu selections are indicated as
"System Administration Top Menu-(Selection Number)". This means that the System
Administration Top Menu must first be accessed. On the first menu displayed, make the menu
selection corresponding to the first menu displayed. Repeat this process for each subsequent
menu when additional selection numbers are listed.
To initialize the system, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-4
1. Go to the System Administration Top Menu
1 : Program
2 : System Reports
3 : Utility Command
4 : System Reset/Clear
5 :Quick Setup (VT100 Mode Only)
Enter the number: =
2. Type [4] for System Initialization.
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3]
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999]
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998]
Will you change the settings ? (Y/N): =
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the "Mailbox No. Length" might be 2 to 5.
3. Type [Y] (this places the VPS in the off-line mode).
System Reset/Clear Menu
1. Mailbox No. Length [3] (2 - 5) : =
2. System Manager's Mailbox No. [999] : =
3. Message Manager's Mailbox No. [998] : =
Are these parameters acceptable ? (Y/N) : =
186
Installation Manual
7.1 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
4. Type [Y] to start the system resetting.
System Initializing
•
•
•
5. When system initializing is complete, the following display will appear:
** ON LINE MODE **
>
Note
The execution time for System Reset/Clear may differ each time it is performed because
of system capacity and system programs.
Generally, initialization will take about 2 min to accomplish.
Installation Manual
187
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2
UTILITY COMMANDS
In the Utility Command Mode, the System Administrator can access the functions described
below by entering the appropriate command at the "$" prompt, and Pressing RETURN.
To select the Utility Commands Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-3
Utility Command (Type 'HELP' for command list.)
$
Table 7-1
188
OFLN:
Sets the system to off-line mode
ONLN:
Sets the system to on-line mode
PASS:
Sets the System Administrator’s password
TIME:
Sets the system clock, date, and time
PSET:
Specifies the reports printing time
ELOG:
Displays device error log
SAVE:
Stores a backup of the program or data in the flash memory
LOAD:
Restores a backup of the program or data to the VPS
GPRN:
Displays all of the VPS parameters
VERS:
Displays the version of the program
CREP:
Displays the keypad assignments, message recording status and the
tree-structure of a Custom service
CCLR:
Clears a Custom service menu access count
MWL:
Specifies the number of times the VPS attempts to turn on the
message waiting lamp on the extensions
MRL:
Sets the minimum recording length of a message
MPLT:
Displays the user prompt recording status
HELP:
Displays brief instructions and a list of Utility Commands
QSET:
Set up your VPS roughly so that you can use it quickly
LMON:
Line Monitor
PUTD:
Displays Touchtone Information
WCID:
Wait for Caller ID
TURN:
Turn off System/User Prompt
PREP:
Personal Custom Service Assignment
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.1
Off-line Set (OFLN)
Use the OFLN command to turn off the VPS Call Progression Mode. Set the VPS to Off-Line
Mode before deleting a mailbox, since this operation involves the updating of a large number
of related parameters.
Type OFLN, then Press RETURN. If no VPS ports are in use, the VPS will immediately
suspend the Call Progression Mode.
$ OFLN
** OFF LINE MODE **
If any VPS port is in use, the VPS will display the following warning:
*** Now line is used!! *** <WAIT>
The following message indicates that the VPS is in the Off-Line Mode.
** OFF LINE MODE **
7.2.2
On-line Set (ONLN)
Use the ONLN command to place the VPS in the Call Progression Mode.
Type ONLN, then Press RETURN.
$ ONLN
** ON LINE MODE **
7.2.3
Set Password (PASS)
Use the PASS command to create, change and clear system passwords. Valid passwords are
created using up to 10 characters; any alphanumeric character, [(space)], [.] and [_] can be
used.
IMPORTANT
•
•
•
We strongly recommend that you set the password to 10 characters for
maximum protection against hackers.
Do not carelessly reveal the password to other persons.
Please change the password periodically.
1. Type PASS, then Press RETURN.
$ PASS
1: Administrator Password 2: System Reset/Clear Password :=
2. To create a password or change an existing password, Go to Step 3.
To clear a password, Go to Step 4.
Installation Manual
189
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
3. To create a password or change an existing password:
a) Type [1] or [2]
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
Note
When you press [2] to change the System Reset/Clear password, you should type
the current (OLD) password before entering a new one.
b) Type the password.
VERIFICATION: =
c) Type the password again for verification.
4. To clear a password:
a) Type [1] or [2].
Maximum 10 characters
NEW PASSWORD : =
b) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
VERIFICATION : =
c) Press ENTER. Do not type a password on this screen.
Note
The password entered on the screen will not appear. The VPS does not distinguish
the capital letter from the small letter.
7.2.4
Set Time (TIME)
Use the TIME command to set the system date and time. A number of system functions
require that the system time and date be set correctly. These functions include message
waiting notification, external message delivery, call-retries-after initial-failure-to-connect, and
automatic deletion of messages.
Time Synchronization: If you have DPT Integration between the VPS and your PBX (latest
software version), the date and time are automatically sent from the PBX to the VPS whenever
the PBX sets the date and time. Also, this transfer occurs whenever DPT Integration is
established.
1. Type TIME, then Press RETURN.
$ TIME
Current time is 12:34, PM
Enter new time (HH:MM, AM/PM) : =
2. Type the current time.
Current date is MON JAN-1-2001
Enter new date (MM-DD-YY) : =
190
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
3. Type the current date. For the year, type the last 2 digits.
Note
Enter the exact time and date. This command cannot be used when either the System or
the Message Manager is accessing the time setting feature.
7.2.5
Print Reports at Specified Time (PSET)
Use the PSET command to issue system usage reports (Flash Memory Usage Report, Port
Usage Report, Call Account Report) at a specified time each day. A printer or data terminal
must be connected to the VPS at the RS-232C port for the reports to be printed or displayed.
1. Type PSET, then Press RETURN.
$ PSET
Report Print Out Service [ Disable ]
1 : Enable 2: Disable :=
2. Type [1] to enable this function or Type [2] to disable it.
Enter The Print Out Time (HH:MM, AM/PM) :=
3. Type the time to print the reports.
Note
The reports will be displayed only if the system is in the mode where you see the following
prompt:
>
Installation Manual
191
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.6
Error Log Display (ELOG)
Use the ELOG command to diagnose VPS problems. Selection of this command will display
the error logs.
COM. Communication error between CPU and DSP
DATA Process error of voice data
MEM. Memory error
PRG. Program error in CPU card
R/W Read/Write error of Flash Memory
Type ELOG, then Press RETURN.
$ ELOG
DEVICE
1. CPU
2. CLOCK
3. FLASH
MEMORY
4. DSP*
5. DSP*
6. CPU
ERROR
TIME
MEM-GET
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
JUL-14 2:00 PM
JUL-14 2:00 PM
JUL-14 2:00 PM
SCAN
FIFO
APPLICATION (x)
JUL-14 2:00 PM
JUL-14 2:00 PM
JUL-14 2:00 PM
* = Port number (1-2)
Note
The following tables display and explain the errors that the system can identify.
Table 7-2 Device Error Log Indications
Indication
CPU
MEM-GET
CLOCK
Meaning
CPU card software memory acquisition error.
CPU card is short of memory temporarily because
of too much traffic.
Clock access error. Clock IC is out of order.
Check the hardware.
FLASH
MEMORY
DATA R/W (xx:yyyy)
Flash Memory access error. If there is a sector that
often causes errors, check the flash memory.
xx :
IDE error code
yyyy : read/write error sector number
DSP*
SCAN
DSP-SCAN error. DSP is out of order. Check the
hardware.
DSP*
FIFO
DSP/FIFO error. During the system is handling
calls, there is something wrong with DSP and FIFO
memory temporarily.
CPU
APPLICATION (x)
Application error. While the system is handling
calls, temporary application error occurs.
x: port number
* = Port number (1-2)
Examples of a terminal display when errors are generated:
192
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Table 7-3 Error Indications at System Startup
Indication
Meaning
ROM ERROR: Sum Error!!
ROM checksum error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Initialize
Error!!
Flash Memory initialization error.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: No System!! No system Flash Memory present.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Load Error!!
Program could not be loaded from system Flash
Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: Program
Sum Error!!
Checksum error in program loaded from system
Flash Memory.
FLASH MEMORY ERROR: System
Data Error!!
Error Loading of administrator data from system
Flash Memory.
SYSTEM ERROR: 1
Administrator data error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 2
Error loading of report data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 3
Clock error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 4
Mailbox data error.
SYSTEM ERROR: 5
Message data error (1).
SYSTEM ERROR: 6
Message data error (2).
SYSTEM ERROR: 7
Error loading of control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 8
Error loading of voice prompt data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 9
Error loading of MWL control data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 10
Error loading of flash memory identify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 11
Error writing of VBI chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 12
Error writing of BLK chain data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 13
Error loading of user prompt modify data.
SYSTEM ERROR: 14
Error loading of Class of Service data.
No CO lines are active!!
No Port cards present.
COs are all disabled!!
All Ports are malfunctioning.
APT(DPT) Interface Connection is not
Established.
Ports are malfunctioning for APT(DPT) Integration
because telephone lines are disconnected or
Integration with PBX is not set to APT(DPT)
integration mode.
Installation Manual
193
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Table 7-4 Error and Warning Indications During System Operation
Indication
Meaning
FLASH MEMORY STORAGE SPACE IS NOW 80 % or more of the Flash Memory voice
EXCEEDING
message save area is used.
80%...
ASCII TERMINAL program Load Error
7.2.7
Error loading of ASCII terminal control
program.
Saving the System Data to the Backup Device (SAVE)
All system programming data and voice prompts can be saved in separate data files. To save
this data, connect a data terminal to the RS-232C port of the VPS. Save the files individually.
Execute the SAVE command for each data file. It will require several minutes to execute this
command for all the data selected. When performing this operation, always wait until the
process completion indication appears.
WARNING
Never save (back-up) and upload the "Program" without Panasonic
Technical support.
The memory required to save each data component is indicated below.
1. Program—approximately 1 Mbytes (See Warning above)
2. Parameters—approximately 0.4 Mbyte (System Configuration)
3. System Prompts—approximately 5 Mbytes (Do not save—prompts are
saved as defaults in the flash memory)
Saving items 4-8 below will depend upon the length of the recorded messages.
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus (Custom service recordings)
7. Personal Greetings (Subscriber greetings)
8. Company Greetings
194
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
1. Type SAVE, then Press RETURN.
$ SAVE
VPS Flash Memory Data Save (VPS -> PC : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No. :=
2. Select item to be backed up, then Press RETURN. The size of the file will be displayed.
To start press 'RETURN'
3. Press RETURN.
- - - - - - SAVE Start!!
4. Perform a Standard File Transfer. Set the data terminal to the receiving (Answer) mode
(Xmodem) and specify the backup filename. The specified data will be transmitted to the
data terminal.
Notes
•
•
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be canceled by
Typing [\] before entering the receiving mode. Once the receiving mode has been
selected, use the cancel command of the communication software being used.
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you SAVE at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal
to the same speed.
Installation Manual
195
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.8
Loading New or Saved Data to the VPS (LOAD)
Use the LOAD command to install new data or to restore saved data to the VPS. Execute this
command for each data file.
When performing this operation, always wait until the process completion indication appears
before proceeding.
1. Type LOAD, then Press RETURN.
$ LOAD
VPS Flash Memory Data Load (PC -> VPS : Xmodem)
1: Program
2: Parameters
3: System Prompts
4. User Prompts-1
5. User Prompts-2
6. Custom Service Menus
7. Personal Greetings
8. Company Greetings
Select No.:=
2. Select the item to be restored to the flash memory, then Press RETURN.
To start press 'RETURN'
3. Press RETURN.
- - - - - - Load Start!!
When "CCC" appears, the VPS is ready for loading.
4. Set the data terminal to the sending (Call) mode (Xmodem). Then enter the backup
filename. Press ENTER. The backup data will be restored to the flash memory.
5. When the load to the VPS has been completed, power-off and restart the VPS.
Notes
•
•
196
Installation Manual
The data terminal that you use must be equipped with communications software that
supports the Xmodem file transfer protocol. The command can be canceled by
Typing [\] before entering the sending mode. Once the sending mode has been
selected, use the cancel command of the communication software being used.
If your data terminal supports a high speed, it is recommended that you LOAD at the
maximum speed of 38400 bps. First, change the RS-232C setting of the VPS (see
B7.1 RS-232C Parameters). Next, change the RS-232C setting of your data terminal
to the same speed.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.9
Print All of the VPS Parameters (GPRN)
Use the GPRN command to print all VPS parameter settings (output to screen). Use Ctrl-C at
any time to stop printing.
Type GPRN, then Press RETURN.
$ GPRN
0: All Parameters
1: Mailbox Setting
2: Class of Service Setting
3: Port/Trunk Service Setting
4: Service Setting - Auto. Attn. Setting
5: Service Setting - Custom Service Setting
6: Service Setting - Intelligent Call Handling
7: Service Setting - Toll Saver Setting
8: System Parameter Setting - System Group Assignment
9: System Parameter Setting - Time Service, Holiday, Daylight Saving Time
10: System Parameter Setting - Prompt Setting
11: System Parameter Setting - System Caller Name Announcement, System Security
12: System Parameter Setting - Others
13: Hardware Setting
14: System Reset Clear Parameter
Please select : =
Note
This command is only valid when in the ASCII TERMINAL mode.
7.2.10 Program Version Display (VERS)
Use the VERS command to display the version numbers of the flash memory and main ROM.
Type VERS, then Press RETURN.
$ VERS
V.P.S. PROGRAM VERSION
MAIN FLASH MEMORY : VQ21AA (5.00)
MAIN ROM :
VQ01AA (3.00)
Note
The numbers are examples only. Your system will show different numbers.
Installation Manual
197
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.11 Custom Service Report (CREP)
Use the CREP command to display the Custom Service menu access count, the keypad
assignments, message recording status and the tree-structure of the Custom Service.
Type CREP, Press Space, Enter the Custom Service number (1-100), and Press RETURN.
Custom [100] (System) (Access: 9 ) (Menu Msg. : None)
| < multilingual pick >
[N]- Xfer Mbx (998)
[0 ]- Operator
[1 ]- Custom [1] (System) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| <English service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Subscriber
[2 ]- Custom [2] (User -1) (Access: 2) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| <French service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Subscriber
[3 ]- Custom [3] (User -2) (Access: 3) (Menu Msg. : None)
|
| < Vietnamese service>
|
[N]- Operator
|
[0 ]- Operator
|
[1 ]- A.A. Service
|
[2 ]- V.M.Service
|
[3 ]- FAX Transfer
|
[ ]- Exit
[4 ]- Dept Dial
[5 ]- Repeat Menu
[ ]- Exit
[# ]- Main Menu
Custom [100]:
System:
Access: 9:
Menu Msg. :None:
[N]-Xfer Mbx (998):
[1]-Custom [1]:
[2]-Custom [2]:
[3]-Custom [3]:
[4]-Dept Dial:
198
Installation Manual
Indicates that Custom Service No. is "100".
Indicates that "System" prompts are active.
Indicates that the callers have accessed this Custom
Service 9 times. This counter can be cleared. See 7.2.12
Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR).
Indicates that the menu message for this Custom Service
is "None (not recorded)". If menu message is recorded,
"Rec" will appear.
Caller will be sent to General Delivery Mailbox (GDM) if
he dials nothing.
Custom Service 1 will play when the "1" key is pressed.
Custom Service 2 will play when the "2" key is pressed.
Custom Service 3 will play when the "3" key is pressed.
Department Dialing menu will play when the "4" is
pressed.
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.12 Custom Service Menu Access Count Clear (CCLR)
Each Custom Service has an access counter that counts the number of times the service has
been accessed. This command clears this counter.
Type CCLR, Press Space, and Enter Custom Service Menu (1-100), then Press RETURN.
$ CCLR 20
Custom Menu <20> Access Counter Cleared !!
Note
Type CCLR 0 to clear the access counters of all Custom Services.
7.2.13 Message Waiting Lamp Retry Times (MWL)
Use the MWL command to specify the number of times the VPS will attempt to turn on the
Message Waiting Lamp of the called extension. Apply this setting when a PBX other than the
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system is used.
$ MWL
Current Setting of M.W.L. Retry Count is 3
Enter M.W.L. Retry Count (1-3) =
Note
This setting is not valid if "Message Waiting Lamp for Every Message" is set to "Yes".
7.2.14 Setting Minimum Recording Length (MRL)
Use the MRL command to specify the minimum message recording length (0-3 s). Messages
shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox.
Note
The minimum recording length can only be set using this command.
1. Type MRL, then Press RETURN.
$ MRL
Current Setting of Minimum Recording Length is 2
Enter Minimum Recording Length (0-3) =
2. Type the message length.
Installation Manual
199
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.15 Modified Prompt List (MPLT)
Use the MPLT command to display the user prompt recording status: recorded, not recorded,
or turned off.
Type MPLT, then Press RETURN.
MPLT —> both prompts
MPLT 1 —> User 1 prompts
MPLT 2 —> User 2 prompts
$ MPLT 1
***List of Registered User Prompt 1 No. ([1], [2], . . ., [993])***
,
1,
,
, OFF,
,
5*,
6,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
*** Total number of Registered = 3 ***
*** Total number TURNED OFF = 2 ***
Blank:
Prompt No.:
Prompt No. with an*:
"OFF":
The prompt has not been recorded (but the default
[System Prompt] is active)—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded—WILL BE HEARD
The prompt has been recorded but is turned off—
WILL NOT BE HEARD
The prompt has never been recorded and the default
prompt has been turned off—WILL NOT BE HEARD
Note
The "Total Number of Registered" shown at the bottom of the screen does not include the
prompts that have been turned off.
200
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.16 Utility Command List (HELP)
Use the HELP command to display the list of all available utility commands.
Type HELP, then Press RETURN.
$ HELP
OFLN
ONLN
PASS
TIME
PSET
ELOG
SAVE
LOAD
GPRN
VERS
CREP [no.]
CCLR [no.]
MWL
MRL
MPLT [opt]
QSET
LMON
PUTD
WCID
TURN
PREP
$
: System Off-line
: System On-line
: Password setting
: Time & Date setting
: Report Print Out Time setting
: Device Error Log Listing
: VPS Program & Date Save (VPS —> PC : Xmodem)
: VPS Program & Date Load (VPS <— PC : Xmodem)
: Parameter Global Printing (only ‘ASCII Terminal’ mode)
: Program Version Check
: Custom Menu Information List
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100)
: Custom Menu Access Counter Clear
[no] : Custom Menu No. (1-100/0) (0: Clear All)
: MWL Retry count Set (1-3)
: Minimum Recording Length Set (0-3)
: Registered User Prompt No. List
[opt] : 1
—> User Prompt 1
2
—> User Prompt 2
None —> User Prompt 1&2
: Quick Setup
: Line Monitor
: DTMF Information Display (Don't leave enabled after
troubleshooting.)
: Wait Time for Caller ID
: Turn off System/User Prompt
: Personal Custom Service Assignment
7.2.17 Quick Setup (QSET)
Use the QSET command initially to setup the VPS very roughly when you use it for the first
time or after system initialization.
Note
Quick setup requires VT100 emulation software.
Type QSET, then Press RETURN.
Installation Manual
201
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.18 Circuit Condition Display (LMON)
Use the LMON command to display the circuit condition every 1.5 s. To turn off this command,
enter [\].
The following circuit conditions may be displayed.
"Ready"
"Incoming Call"
"Outgoing Call"
"DSP Reset"
"PT connect"
"Error"
$ LMON
No.:
1:
2:
: Possible to serve
: Processing arrival service
: Processing sending service
: Processing DSP reset disposition
: Processing PT connect disposition
: DSP Card is not loaded
Status
Ready
Ready
7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display (PUTD)
Use the PUTD command to display the touchtones the VPS receives and sends.
In addition to the touchtones, the following will be displayed—the Incoming Call Service (Voice
Mail, Automated Attendant, Custom, and Interview) entered by the caller and the time periods
that the ports are enabled.
Type PUTD. The VPS will remain in this mode until "PUTD" is entered again. The default
setting of this mode for all ports is "OFF".
$ PUTD
Target Port : **
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
To change the mode from "PUTD" to "OFF", Type PUTD again.
$ PUTD
Target Port : 00
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
Note
"*" means "enable" for the port. "0" means "disable" for the port.
To set the mode for only 1 port, Type PUTD and the port number.
$ PUTD 1
Target Port : 0*
Don't leave enabled after troubleshooting.
$
202
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
Sample display:
$ PUTD
Target Port for Debug : * *
$
[1] DTMF:3
[1] DTMF:8
[1] A.Attend
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:6
[1] Voice Mail
[1] DTMF:1
[1] DTMF:0
[1] DTMF:1
[1] NonSub Svc
[1] * * *
[1] DTMF:#
[1] DTMF:9
[1] Thank you
WARNING
"PUTD" is a command originally used when troubleshooting. Do not use
this command for any other purpose. Do not disconnect the RS-232C
connection while the "PUTD" command is enabled. This could cause data
overflow.
7.2.20 Wait for Caller ID (WCID)
Use the WCID command to specify the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must wait for the
Caller ID after the VPS has received the incoming call from the PBX.
If Caller ID is not needed at all, set the waiting time to "0" to accelerate the VPS response to
incoming calls.
Type WCID, then Press RETURN.
$ WCID
WAIT TIME FOR CALLER ID (5 sec) [0-60 sec] : = 0
$
7.2.21 Turn off System/User Prompt (TURN)
Use the TURN command to turn off specific System/User prompts, or to display the numbers
of the currently turned-off prompts.
Type TURN, Press Space, Enter the prompt type (0: System Prompts, 1: User 1 Prompts,
Installation Manual
203
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
2: User 2 Prompts), Type a comma, and Enter the prompt number you want to turn off. Then
Press RETURN.
Sample display:
$ TURN 0,100
System Prompt No.100 has been changed from 'Turn ON' to 'Turn OFF'
*****************************
* Turned off Prompt No. *
*****************************
System Prompt
100
User1 Prompt
None
User2 Prompt
None
$
Note
You can turn on the prompts which have been previously turned off using the procedure
above.
Type TURN, then Press RETURN. The numbers of the currently turned-off prompts will be
displayed.
Sample display:
$ TURN
*****************************
* Turned off Prompt No. *
*****************************
System Prompt
100
User1 Prompt
200, 300
User2 Prompt
123, 345, 700, 900
$
204
Installation Manual
7.2 UTILITY COMMANDS
7.2.22 Personal Custom Service Assignment (PREP)
Use the PREP command to display the Personal Custom Service Assignment.
Type PREP and the mailbox number, then Press RETURN.
$ PREP 101
** Personal Custom Service Assignment
JUL- 1-2003 7:24 PM **
MBOX: 101 [ ICHIRO SUZUKI ]
[3]-Xfer Mbx(998)
[4]-Xfer Extn.(106)
[5]-Xfer CO(2011234567)
[6]-Custom[ 56]
[7]-V.M. Service
[8]-A.A. Service
[N]-Message Recording
Note
" " can be used as a wild card within the mailbox number. The Personal Custom Service
Assignments of all matching mailboxes are displayed.
Installation Manual
205
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3
SYSTEM REPORTS
The System Administrator is able to generate 8 System Reports to monitor VPS operating
status. The reports can be displayed on a data terminal or printed. The terminal or printer must
be connected to the RS-232C port. (The System Manager is also able to output System
Reports.)
To select the System Reports Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1
System Reports System Report Menu
1. Mailbox Assignments
2. COS Assignments
3. System Service Report
4. Call Account Report
5. Port Usage Report
6. Flash Memory Usage Report
7. Mailbox Usage Report
8. Fax Call Report
Enter the Number : =
The following 5 reports can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the following 5 reports, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2
System Reports
System Clear Menu
1. Call Account Report Clear
2. Port Usage Statistics Clear
3. Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
4. Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
5. Fax Call Report Clear
Enter the Number : =
206
Installation Manual
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3.1
Mailbox Assignments
The Mailbox Assignments report provides information about the applied mailbox authorized
features and current parameter settings.
Note
Depending on the PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit
long.
To select the Mailbox Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-1
**Mailbox Assignments
NOV-2-2002 4:54 PM **
Extn. Name (Fir/Lst) COS CExtn IVMBOX AITrf NT TS NA MN1st MN2nd MN3rd RF PC
201 JONE / DELY
1
601
621
X
A
S
S
Tel
Bep
Tel
A A
202 CLUS / ALCC
1
602
611
U 60
------------998
-/ 63
------999*
-/ 64
-------
MBOX
510*
511
COS:
IVMBOX:
NT:
NA:
MN2nd:
RF:
X:
S:
Tel:
Class of Service
Interview Mailbox
Number for Toll Saver
Call Transfer No Answer Time
Message Notification Device 2
Remote Call Forward to CO
The feature marked with X is set to "YES".
System
Telephone
CExtn:
AlTrf:
TS:
MN1st:
MN3rd:
PC:
A:
Bep:
Covering Extension
All Call Transfer to Mailbox
Extension Transfer Sequence
Message Notification Device 1
Message Notification Device 3
Personal Custom Service
Something is assigned.
Beeper
Note
Mailboxes with a password set are indicated with a " " after the mailbox number.
7.3.2
COS (Class of Service) Assignments
The COS (Class of Service) Assignments report provides information concerning all Class of
Service numbers.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Table B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
To select the COS Assignments Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-2
Installation Manual
207
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
* * COS Assignments
COS
1
2
3
RtN
Un
Un
Un
RtS
Un
Un
Un
Ln CaN
5 100
3 100
3 100
CaT
100
100
100
SEP-20-2003
RO
L
L
L
SI
N
N
N
Pr DC
SY N
U1 N
U1 N
EV TD
B A
B A
B A
CC
N
N
N
DM RC
Y N
Y N
Y N
63 30 30 6 100 100 L N SY N B A N Y N
64 30 30 6 100 100 L N SY N B A N - -
SP CW
N N
N N
N N
-
-
COS:
Class of Service number
RtN:
RtS:
Saved Message Retention
Time (Un=Unlimited)
Maximum Message
Ln:
SI:
CC:
Message Retrieval Order
(L=LIFO, F=FIFO)
Prompt Mode (S=System
Prompts, U1=User 1 Prompts,
U2=User 2 Prompts)
Envelope Information Position
(B=before, A=after, N=none)
Caller ID Callback
RC:
Remote Call Forward to CO
SP:
CW:
Use Call Waiting on Busy
MC:
PG:
Intercom Paging Group
CN:
GC:
CS:
TO:
Play Personal Greeting for
Caller ID
Call Transfer to Outside
TS:
ST:
Subscriber Tutorial
MN:
ED (pr):
Authorization for External
Message Delivery (Prompt
Mode)
(SY=System, U1=User 1,
U2=User 2, SL=Selective)
AF:
CaN:
RO:
Pr:
EV:
CaT:
DC:
TD:
DM:
MC
Y
Y
Y
PG
1
1
1
CN
30
30
30
GC
Y
Y
Y
CS
Y
Y
Y
TO
Y
N
N
TS
N
N
N
ST
Y
Y
Y
MN
X
X
X
ED
-
(pr)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
5:39 PM * *
AF (mbox/ dl/ md)
-
-
-
-
New Message Retention
(Un=Unlimited)
Message Length Time
(Un=Unlimited)
Maximum Message Time
(Un=Unlimited)
Message Scanning with
Information
Delete Message Confirmation
Time and Date Stamp Position
(B=before, A=after, N=none)
Direct Mailbox Access
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting
Message Cancel for Live Call
Screening
Maximum number of names for
Personal Caller Name
Announcement
Caller ID Screening
Toll Saver
(D=DID, C=Caller ID, N=No)
Authorization for Message
Waiting Notification
Authorization for Auto
Forwarding
(mbox)=Mailbox No
(dl)=Delay Time
(md)=Forwarding Mode
(M=move, C=copy)
Note
An "X" displayed on the screen indicates that the feature marked with the X is set to "Yes".
208
Installation Manual
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3.3
System Service Report
The System Service Report provides information about the VPS’s usable ports, trunk (CO
line) groups and Holiday Services. It also indicates the services assigned to each VPS port
and each trunk (CO line) group (for Day, Night, Lunch and Break modes), each Holiday
Service, and all incoming and outgoing call services.
To select the System Service Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-3
** System Service Report
JAN-4-2001 4:37 PM **
Port [Day mode]
Grt Srv
1
1 V.M.
2
1 A.A.
[Night mode] [Lunch mode]
Grt Srv
Grt Srv
2 A.A.
3 V.M.
2 I.S.(700)
3 V.M.
Trunk [Day mode]
Grt Srv
1 SYS A.A.
2 SYS A.A.
[Night mode]
Grt Srv
SYS V.M.
SYS V.M.
[Holiday List]
Name of Holiday
NEW YEAR'S DAY
SPRING HOLIDAY
V.M.:
A.A.:
Grt:
[Lunch mode]
Grt Srv
SYS V.M.
SYS V.M.
[Break mode]
Grt Srv
4 A.A.
4 A.A.
[Break mode]
Grt Srv
SYS A.A.
SYS A.A.
Start
End
Grt Srv
Port
JAN-1
15 C.S.(100) 1-2
MAR-24 APR-5 16 C.S.(99) 1-2
Voice Mail Service
Automated Attendant
Service
Company Greeting
C.S.:
I.S.:
Trunk
1-48
1-48
Custom Service
Interview Service
Trunk data (Trunks 1 and 2 are shown above) is displayed only when at least one service mode
is something other than NONE (for example, A.A. or V.M.).
7.3.4
Call Account Report
The VPS can store information for up to 64 outgoing calling sequences (for accounting and
billing purposes). Outgoing calling information includes the mailbox numbers that executed
outgoing calls, the telephone numbers called, the call dates, and call duration times. When the
number of outgoing calling sequences reaches 64, the first 10 items are automatically sent to
the terminal. Any information sent to the terminal is automatically deleted from the system’s
memory.
To select the Call Account Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-4
Installation Manual
209
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
** Call Account
NOV-5-2001 11:07 AM**
MBOX:101 ED NOV-4 2:57 PM 00:00:42 DIAL:8301002
MBOX:106 MN NOV-4 2:57 PM 00:00:42 DIAL:8301002
MBOX:104 CC NOV-4 2:58 PM - : - : - DIAL:12345678901234567890123456789012
ED:
CC:
External Message Delivery
Caller ID Callback
MN:
Message Notification
Note
Depending on PBX extension numbering, the mailbox numbers might be 2- to 5-digit long.
7.3.5
Call Account Report Clear
The Call Account Report can be cleared for use again.
To clear the Call Account Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-1
System Reports - System Report Clear - Call Account Report Clear
May I clear call account report data? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Port
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.6
Port Usage Report
The Port Usage Report provides information about port usage and allows system and port
traffic to be measured. The report includes the accumulated duration times of incoming and
outgoing calling services and the total connect time for each port.
To select the Port Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-5
** Port Usage Report
JAN-4-2001 7:46 PM**
FROM : : JAN-3-1999 9:53 AM
Port
1
2
Total
ED
8
4
9
Full-line Time 00:10:15
210
Installation Manual
MN
0
0
0
Rcv
84
21
105
Connect Time
02:10:19
00:18:54
02:39:13
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
ED: External Delivery
MN: Message Notification
Rcv: Receive
Full-line Time: The total time that both ports were used simultaneously.
7.3.7
Port Usage Statistics Clear
Clears the Port Usage Report for use again.
To clear the Port Usage Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-2
System Reports - System Report Clear - Port Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear port usage report data? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Port
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.8
Flash Memory Usage Report
The Flash Memory Usage Report indicates the amount of flash memory storage used and the
flash memory availability in minutes. It also presents the following statistics:
•
The number of messages that were recorded by callers and were copied since the last
clearing of this report.
•
The number of messages that were copied since the last clearing of this report.
•
The number of messages that were deleted by subscribers, and expired and were
removed by the system since the last clearing of this report.
•
The number of messages that expired and were removed by the system since the last
clearing of this report.
To select the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-6
** Flash Memory Usage Report
Drive
1
2
FROM : :
MSGs
Avail
120 min
240 min
JAN-22-2001 8:30 PM **
Used
0min
0min
JAN-21-2001 10:20 PM
New
Cpy
0
0
(%)
(0)
(0)
Del
0
Exp
0
Installation Manual
211
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
Drive: Specifies the memory card. "1" is the MASTER memory card (factory provided). "2" is
the SLAVE memory card.
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
Cpy: Copy (Transfer)
Del: Deleted
Exp: Expired and Removed
7.3.9
Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
The Flash Memory Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Flash Memory Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-3
System Reports - System Report Clear - Flash Memory Usage Statistics Clear
May I clear Flash Memory usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Flash
Memory Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
7.3.10 Mailbox Usage Report
The Mailbox Usage Report provides information about the usage at specific mailbox. It
includes the number of recorded messages, the total amount of outgoing calling time, and
external message, message notification and group message delivery.
To select the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-7
Enter the Range : = 111
Note
Specify the range or the mailbox number. To obtain information on specific mailboxes from
No.200 to No.209, Type [20 ] and Press RETURN, or [200] [,] [209] and Press RETURN.
212
Installation Manual
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
** Mailbox Usage Report
MBOX:111 [JONE BLUE]
New
MSGs
4
MSGs
6
Received
MSGs
0
ED
FROM : :
SEP-30-2002 7:51 PM
Subscriber Access Information
Last Access
::NOV-28-2002 2:56 PM
Total Access Time
::00:00:35
Number of Password Entry Failure
::3
Feature Usage
Outcalling
(Time)
MSG Received
ED
11
MN
31
LD
6
00:05:10
Lcl
13
00:10:45
Rcv
42
Del
30
NOV-27-2002 4:47 PM**
IM
20
GM
14
Beep
0
00:00:00
AF
22
Extn.
28
00:31:21
Exp
11
FROM: The date and time of the last clearing of this report
MN: Message Notification
GM: Personal/System Group Distribution List
LD: Long distance call (8 digits or more)
Lcl: Local call (less than 8 digits)
Del: Deleted
ED: External Delivery
IM: Interview message
AF: Auto Forwarding
Rcv: Received
Exp: Expired
Note
New MSGs, Received MSGs, and ED MSGs are current status indications. All else are
accumulated indications since the last clearing of this report.
7.3.11 Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
The Mailbox Usage Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Mailbox Usage Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-4
System Reports - System Report Clear - Mailbox Usage Statistics Clear
Enter the Range : =
May I clear mailbox usage report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Mailbox
Usage Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
Installation Manual
213
7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS
7.3.12 Fax Call Report
The Fax Call Report provides information about fax transfer when the VPS receives a fax
signal. It includes the fax data receiving date, the port number used, and the fax transfer status
for up to 64 fax messages.
To select the Fax Call Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-1-8
** Fax Call Report
[DATE/TIME]
JAN-11
11:15 AM
MAR-01
07:58 PM
MAR-01
10:23 AM
NOV-14-2001 3:50 PM**
[PORT]
1
2
1
[FAX-1]
connect
(busy)
(busy)
[FAX-2]
(no-ans.)
connect
FAX-1: Main facsimile machine
FAX-2: Alternate facsimile machine
connect: Call was answered by the facsimile machine no-ans.: No Answer
7.3.13 Fax Call Statistics Clear
The Fax Call Report can be cleared of all values and prepared for use again.
To clear the Fax Call Statistics Report, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-2-2-5
System Reports - System Report Clear - Fax Call Report Clear
May I clear fax call report data ? (Y/N) : =
Type [Y] (yes) or [N] (no). If "Y" is entered, the system will clear the data. Wait until "Fax Call
Report Data Cleared!!" appears on the screen before proceeding.
214
Installation Manual
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
7.4
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
Nothing is heard from the
VPS when accessing the
VPS.
PROBABLE CAUSE
•
•
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Improper connection of jacks. •
Bad connection with PBX.
•
•
•
Confirm that you are using the
correct extension number for
the VPS. Ask your System
Administrator.
Check if the jacks of the VPS
are connected to the proper
jacks of the PBX (see 1.4
DIGITAL INTEGRATION).
Check the System Program
[130] of the KX-TA624 to see if
the programming agrees with
the actual connection.
Check the "1-4 VPS (DPT)
Port Assignment" screen of
the KX-TD500, or System
Program [117] of other KX-T
series telephone systems, or
the "3.Groups-7.VM(DPT)
Group-2.Unit Setting" and
"1.Configuration-8.Extension
Port" screens of KX-TDA/TAW
series telephone systems that
use DPT Integration to see if
the programming agrees with
the actual connection.
•
Unable to utilize some of
the DPT Integration
features, even though DPT •
Integration has been
established properly.
Your PBX cannot support the •
feature.
The software version of your
PBX is lower than required.
Call National Parts Center at
1-800-833-9626.
The VPS does not operate. •
•
•
Bad printed circuit board.
Bad connection with PBX.
Incomplete card insertion.
Change the printed circuit
board.
Check the connection
between the VPS and PBX.
Insert the card firmly into the
card slot.
•
•
•
Dialing is not registered.
•
•
A pulse phone is being used
by mistake.
Improper setting of
integration mode.
•
•
Change to a touch tone
phone.
Adjust the integration mode
properly between the VPS and
your PBX (see "Integration
Mode" in Table B-42 in B7.3
PBX Interface Parameters).
Installation Manual
215
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
Line disconnection occurs •
while transferring an
outside call.
•
Unable to transfer an
outside call.
•
•
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
•
Improper setting of the
sequence.
Improper setting of the
hooking time.
Improper setting of the CPC
signal.
"Transfer to CO" not enabled
on PBX.
•
•
Unable to call an outside
party.
•
Improper setting of the
outside call dial procedure.
•
•
•
Unable to call an extension. •
216
Installation Manual
Improper setting of extension •
numbering plan.
Adjust the transfer sequence
to that of the connected PBX
and reset (see "Operator
Transfer Sequence" and
"Extension Transfer
Sequence" in Table B-44 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Adjust the hooking time to that
of the connected PBX and
reset (see "Flash Time" in
Table B-40 in B7.2 Port
Setting).
Adjust the CPC signal to that
of the connected PBX and
reset (see "CPC Signal" in
Table B-40 in B7.2 Port
Setting).
Reset the CO line access
sequence of the connected
PBX (see "Dial Number" in
Table B-4 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES and "Number of
Digits to Access Outside Line"
in Table B-31 in B6.8 Other
Parameters).
Also check "Outgoing Call
Setup Sequence" in Table B31 in B6.8 Other Parameters.
When setting a Dial Number
for Device Notification or a
telephone number for External
Message Delivery, keep in
mind the "Notice" for "Dial
Number" in Table B-4 in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
Adjust the extension
numbering plan properly (see
"Numbering Plan 1-16" in
Table B-30 in B6.8 Other
Parameters).
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Table 7-5
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Unable to access the
mailbox.
•
Improper setting of the
mailbox number.
•
Readjust the number of digits
in the mailbox number (see
"Mailbox Number" in Table B2 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES).
Unable to access to
Operator 1
•
Improper setting of the
operator extension number.
•
Adjust the operator extension
number to that of the
connected PBX (see
"Operator’s Extension" in
Table B-11 in B5.1 Automated
Attendant Parameters).
Connected terminal (RS232C port) does not
operate.
•
•
Improper connection.
Improper setting of the
parameter.
•
Be sure you are using a null
modem cable (see 2.7
TERMINAL CONNECTION).
The terminal and VPS should
have the same parameter
settings for Baud Rate, Word
Bit Length, Parity and Stop Bit
Length (see B7.1 RS-232C
Parameters).
•
•
Unable to make
reconnection when the line
is busy.
Improper setting of the busy
signal reconnection
procedure.
•
Readjust the busy signal
reconnection procedure to
that of the connected PBX
(see "Reconnect Sequence on
Busy" in Table B-44 in B7.3
PBX Interface Parameters).
Unable to make a noresponse reconnection.
Improper setting of the noresponse reconnection
procedure.
•
Readjust the no-response
reconnection procedure to
that of the connected PBX
(see "Reconnect Sequence on
No Answer" in Table B-44 in
B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Unable to generate a call
•
waiting tone from the VPS.
Improper setting of sequence. •
Adjust the Call Waiting
sequence to that of the
connected PBX (see "Call
Waiting Sequence" in Table B44 in B7.3 PBX Interface
Parameters).
Unable to make an Intercom •
Paging for groups.
Improper setting of the
Intercom Paging access
code.
Adjust the Intercom Paging
access code to that of the
connected PBX (see "Paging
Code for Group 1-16" and
"Paging Code for All Groups"
in Table B-36 in B6.8 Other
Parameters).
•
•
Installation Manual
217
7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
7.5
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 7-6
Port:
2 Digital/Analog ports
Dialing Method:
Touchtone/Pulse (10/20 pps)
Flash Time:
100 ms/300 ms/600 ms/900 ms (programmable)
CPC Detection
None/6.5 ms/150 ms/300 ms/450 ms/600 ms (programmable)
Type of Line:
Loop start minimum Loop Current: 20 mA
minimum Line Voltage: 7 V DC
minimum Ringing Voltage: 40 V AC
Extension Numbering:
2 to 5 digits (programmable)
Pause Time:
1 s to 9 s (programmable)
Message Waiting Lamp:
Programmable Touchtone sequence
Main CPU:
16-bit microprocessor
Flash Memory Capacity:
Approximately 6 h (non-expandable)
Number of Mailboxes:
Maximum 64
(including System Manager and Message Manager mailboxes)
Number of Messages:
Maximum 100 per mailbox (programmable)
Personal Greeting Message
Length:
6 min
Message Retention Time:
1 to 30 days or unlimited (programmable)
Maximum Message Length:
1 min to 6 min, or unlimited length (programmable)
Reports:
Mailbox Assignment, COS (Class of Service) Assignment, System
Service Report, Call Account Report, Port Usage Report, Flash
Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, FAX Call Report
Connections Telephone Line:
Modular connectors
Data Port:
2
•
In case of Inband, 2-conducotor wire
2
•
In case of APT, 4-conducotor wire with APT Interface
2
•
In case of DPT, 4-conducotor wire with DPT Interface
1
RS-232C interface port
Environmental Requirements:
0 °C to 40 °C {32 °F to 104 °F}, 10 % to 90 % relative humidity
Power Source:
120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power Consumption:
Approximately 10 W
Dimensions (H
W
Mass (Weight):
218
Installation Manual
D):
173 mm
318 mm
65 mm {6-13/16"
Approximately 1.2 kg {2.7 lb.}
12-1/2"
2-9/16"}
Appendix
A
SYSTEM FEATURES
Installation Manual
219
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
A1
SYSTEM FEATURES
The Voice Processing System has many features that are available to the System
Administrator, the System Manager, and/or System Subscribers. The Table A-1 lists and
briefly describes each key VPS system feature. In addition, references to specific sections of
this manual and the Subscriber’s Guide are provided in the references column that pertains to
each feature listed. The specific procedure steps required to initiate, access, or utilize each
feature are detailed at these references.
Note
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not
be able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more
information, call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
a group of extensions, which require a
•
Alternate
Extension Group different call transfer sequence than normal,
placed into a separate group.
•
•
APT Integration
is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
sent to the VPS from the PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Auto Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing,
Caller Name Announcement (System/
Personal), Direct Mailbox Access, Intercom
paging, Live Call Screening, Personal
Greeting for Caller ID Two-Way Recording,
Two-Way Transfer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
220
Installation Manual
See "Dialing Parameters" in
3.2.4 PBX Interface
Parameters.
See "Alternate Extension
Assignment" in B5.1
Automated Attendant
Parameters.
See "Alternate Extension
Group" in the Glossary.
See "VOICE MAIL" in 1.3.3
Which Phone Systems are
Compatible?
See 1.4.1 General.
See 1.4.2 APT Integration.
See 1.4.3 Connection
Example—APT Integration.
See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?
See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL
PBX.
See "APT Integration" in the
Glossary.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Auto
Configuration
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
creates mailboxes by obtaining extension
•
numbers from the Panasonic KX-T series
telephone system that uses DPT Integration. •
Also sets the time and date automatically by
obtaining time information from the PBX.
•
•
•
Auto Forwarding moves or copies unretrieved messages from •
one mailbox to another, after a specified
period of time. This service is only available to •
subscribers (you cannot auto forward
messages to the System Group Distribution
Lists). Class of Service programming
determines the mailboxes that can use this
feature. Messages marked as "private"
cannot be forwarded. Also, a message is
•
never forwarded to the original sender of the
message.
•
Automated
Attendant
answers incoming calls and routes those calls •
to the desired extension. The service can be
assigned to all of Day, Night, Lunch, and
•
Break time periods. Available for both Port
and Trunk Services.
•
•
See "System Components" in
1.3.2 System Components.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Creating Mailboxes" in
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup.
See "The length of mailbox
numbers" in 5.1.3 Starting the
Quick Setup.
See "Auto Configuration" in the
Glossary.
See "Private Message" in this
Table.
See "Authorization for Auto
Forwarding" in Table B-6 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Auto Forwarding" in the
Glossary.
See 5.2.10 Automated
Attendant.
See 5.4 AUTOMATED
ATTENDANT PARAMETERS.
See B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
See "Automated Attendant" in
the Glossary.
Broadcasting
Messages
permits the System Manager to deliver the
•
same message to all VPS subscribers at the
same time.
This feature is only available to the System
Manager.
See "Delivering Messages to
All Mailboxes (Broadcasting
Messages)" in C8
DELIVERING MESSAGES.
Busy Coverage
Mode
specifies how the VPS will handle calls to the •
operator when the line is busy. The Busy
Coverage options that are available include:
Hold, No Answer Coverage, Call Waiting, and •
Disconnect Message.
See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
Table 5-6 in 5.4.3 Operator’s
Parameters.
See "Busy Coverage Mode" in
Table B-11, Table B-12 and
Table B-13 in B5 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SERVICE SETTINGS.
Installation Manual
221
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Call Services
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
include a series of both incoming and
outgoing call services.
Incoming Call Services: Automated
•
Attendant Service, Voice Mail Service,
Interview Service, Custom Service.
Outgoing Call Services: Message Waiting
•
Notification, and External Message Delivery.
•
Call Transfer
Status
permits subscribers to specify how the VPS •
will handle calls to their individual extensions.
Call Transfer Status options include: Call
Screening, Call Blocking, Intercom Paging, •
Calling a Beeper and Transfer to Mailbox.
See "Port Service Setting" in
5.1.3 Starting the Quick Setup.
See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table 5-5 in 5.3.1 Port Service
Menu.
See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table B-8 in B4.1 Port
Assignment.
See "Incoming Call Service" in
Table B-9 in B4.2 Trunk Group
Assignment.
See "Calling a Beeper" and
"Intercom Paging" in this
Table.
See "Call Transfer" in the
Glossary.
•
See 4.1 Call Transfer Status in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
Callback Number enables the caller to leave a callback number •
in several different ways depending upon
Entry
See "Notification Setting" in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Beeper Callback No.
Entry Mode" in Table B-6 and
Table B-7 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Other ParametersMessage Waiting Notification"
in B6.8 Other Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
which option is programmed into the VPS.
The VPS can forward the callback number to
a beeper.
•
•
•
222
Installation Manual
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Caller ID
Callback
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
enables a subscriber to call back a message •
sender with the Caller ID number attached to
the message.
•
•
•
•
•
Caller ID Call
Routing
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
Caller ID
Screening
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
See "Transfer to Outside
Parameters" in 3.2.4 PBX
Interface Parameters.
See "Call Transfer to Outside"
in this Table.
See "Caller ID Callback" in
Table B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Caller ID Callback" in
Table B-50 in B7 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
HARDWARE SETTINGS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Caller ID Callback" in the
Glossary.
allows the System Administrator to assign up •
to 200 Caller ID numbers and program the
route for the calls from these assigned
•
numbers to the desired extension, mailbox
(including System Group Distribution List) or
•
Custom Service.
The Company Greetings will not play when
calls are routed as programmed by this
feature.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Caller ID Call Routing" in
B5.3 Intelligent Call Handling.
See "Caller ID Call Routing" in
the Glossary.
allows extension users to hear prerecorded •
caller names when calls from assigned
numbers are transferred from the VPS to the
extension users.
See "Caller Name
Announcement—Personal"
and "Caller Name
Announcement—System" in
this Table.
Installation Manual
223
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Caller Name
Announcement
—Personal
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
allows subscribers to assign up to 30 Caller •
ID numbers and record a caller name for each
Caller ID number from their telephone. The •
caller name is announced when: (1)
subscribers listen to the messages from
assigned numbers left in their mailboxes, (2)
the VPS transfers calls from assigned
numbers to the subscribers (Caller ID
Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the
subscribers by intercom (Intercom Paging).
•
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal
caller name.
Caller Name
Announcement
—System
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
REFERENCES
allows the System Administrator to assign up
to 120 Caller ID numbers. Each Caller ID
number can have a caller name recorded by
the Message Manager. The caller name is
announced when: (1) extension users listen
to the messages from assigned numbers left
in their mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls
from assigned numbers to the subscribers
(Caller ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages
the subscribers by intercom (Intercom
Paging).
Caller ID Screening is enabled or disabled in
the COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
•
See 4.12 Personal Caller
Name Announcement in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
•
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Caller ID Screening" in
Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See B6.6 System Caller Name
Announcement.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Recording System Caller
Names" in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
Personal) " in the Glossary.
•
•
•
•
If the same Caller ID number is programmed
for both the system and personal caller name
announcement, the VPS will use the personal •
caller name.
224
Installation Manual
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Number of CIDs for Caller
Name Announcement" and
"Caller ID Screening" in Table
B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Caller Name
Announcement (System/
Personal) " in the Glossary.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Calling a Beeper allows a subscriber to be notified by a beeper •
when he has message(s). If the beeper has a
display, it is possible to send to it a callback
number. The callback number can be
recorded when a caller leaves a message. If
the caller does not leave a callback number, •
the System Callback No., or the caller’s
number if it is received through a telephone
company’s Caller ID service, will be sent
instead.
To utilize this feature, follow the procedure
below.
•
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
•
COS No.(1-63).
Select "Yes" in the Authorization for Message
Notification parameter. Make 1 selection from
the available options in the Beeper Callback
No. Entry Mode parameter.
REFERENCES
See "Dial Number" and "Type
of Device" in Table B-4 in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Authorization for
Message Notification" and
"Beeper Callback No. Entry
Mode" in Table B-6 and Table
B-7 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "System Callback No." in
Table B-32 in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-1-1-Mailbox No.-Y-2-Device No.(1-3)
(Program-Mailbox Setting-Enter/Edit-Mailbox
No. Entry-Do you want to edit this mailbox?Notification Setting-Device No. Entry).
For the Dial Number parameter: enter your
PBX’s line access code before the beeper
number for dialing outward; enter an X after
the beeper number. (The X is for the caller to
enter his number as the callback number
which will later appear on your beeper.)
Finally, select "Beeper" in the Type of Device
parameter.
Installation Manual
225
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Call Transfer to
Outside
DESCRIPTION
enables the VPS to transfer a call to an
outside line from the following services:
•
Custom Service
•
Call Transfer Service
•
Personal Custom Service
•
Caller ID Callback
REFERENCES
•
•
Note
This feature is not supported when the •
VPS is connected to the following PBXs:
•
KX-TA624
•
KX-TDA/KX-TAW series Version 1.0
•
(From Version 1.1, this feature will
be supported.)
Class of Service
(COS)
There are 62 COS levels for subscribers.
COS 63 is for the Message Manager and
COS 64 is for the System Manager.
Either the System Administrator (using a
personal computer) or the System Manager
(using a telephone) can change COS
assignments.
•
•
•
•
Company
Greeting
226
Installation Manual
is a prerecorded message designed to greet •
all incoming callers and provide relevant
information. This feature allows the use of up •
to 32 different greetings for each individual
Time Service period (Day, Night, Lunch and
Break) as well as holidays*. Available for both
Port and Trunk services.
•
Note
The System Manager can change the
Company Greeting setting remotely by
simply calling the VPS (see C6
•
CHANGING THE COMPANY
GREETING AND INCOMING CALL
SERVICE SETTING).
•
* Only the System Administrator can assign
•
specific greetings for holidays.
See "Call Transfer to Outside"
in Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Transfer to Outside
Parameters" in B7.3 PBX
Interface Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See 4.17 Setting Telephone
Numbers for Call Transfer to
CO in the Subscriber’s Guide.
See 7.3.2 COS (Class of
Service) Assignments.
See B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See 6.1.3 Company Greetings
(Enter #6*998,5,1).
See C6 CHANGING THE
COMPANY GREETING AND
INCOMING CALL SERVICE
SETTING.
See "Company Greeting No."
in Table B-8 and Table B-9 in
B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
See "Company Greeting No."
in Table B-25 in B6.3 Holiday
Setting.
See D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
See "Company Greeting" in the
Glossary.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Company Name
Covering
Extension
Custom Service
DESCRIPTION
is used by External Message Delivery
Service when the intended receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times. The VPS
announces the Company Name so that the
receiver realizes what company placed the
call to him.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
forwards calls to a second extension when
the first extension’s subscriber is not available
to take the call. The caller can also access the
Covering Extension by pressing [0] while a
Personal Greeting is being played, or while •
leaving a message.
See D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
See "Company Name" in the
Glossary.
See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See "Covering Extension" in
Table B-3 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Covering Extension" in
the Glossary.
•
See 4.2 Covering Extension in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
allows callers to access specific functions by •
entering numbers or symbols through the
telephone keypad.
•
See 5.2 PORT SETTING
OPTIONS.
See 6.1.5 Custom Service
Greetings (Enter #6*998,5,4).
See 7.2.11 Custom Service
Report (CREP).
See 7.2.12 Custom Service
Menu Access Count Clear
(CCLR).
See B5.2 Custom Service.
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in D6
RECORDING MESSAGES.
See "Custom Service Setting"
in the Glossary.
The Message Manager can record up to 100
•
Custom Service menus. These menus can be
recorded in various foreign languages, and
•
help guide outside callers to the desired
extension, mailbox, System Group
Distribution List, Department Dialing menu,
•
operator, fax machine, etc.
•
Note
Callers cannot jump between Custom
Service menus more than 8 times.
•
Daylight Saving
Time
Assignment
changes the internal clock of the VPS for the •
start and end of Daylight Saving Time.
See B6.4 Daylight Saving Time
(DST).
Delete Message
Confirmation
•
requests confirmation from mailbox owner
before erasing a message left in the mailbox.
See "Delete Message
Confirmation" in Table B-6 and
Table B-7 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
Installation Manual
227
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Department
Dialing
DESCRIPTION
is a speed-dialing feature that permits the
caller to quickly reach the desired extension
by dialing a 1 digit number either during or
after the playing of the Department Dialing
message.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
Dialing by Name
allows the caller to reach the intended
mailbox/extension (when the number is not
known) by entering the first 3 or 4 letters of
the mailbox owner’s last name. The VPS
identifies all subscribers with that letter
combination and states each name for the
caller. The caller selects the desired
subscriber by entering the appropriate
number.
•
DID Call Routing allows the System Administrator to assign up •
(DPT Integration
Only)
to 200 DID numbers and program the route
for calls from these assigned numbers to the •
desired extension, mailbox (including System
Group Distribution List) or Custom Service. It
•
also forwards "Private" (the caller’s number is
not received) and "Out of Area" calls to a
desired extension, mailbox or Custom
Service.
The Company Greetings will not play when
calls are routed as programmed by this
feature.
Note
This feature is only available when the
VPS is connected to the following PBXs
with DPT Integration.
•
KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
•
KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
•
KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
228
Installation Manual
See 5.4.2 Department Dialing.
See "Department Dialing" in
B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" in D6
RECORDING MESSAGES.
See "Department Dialing" in
the Glossary.
See "Owner Last Name" in
Table B-3 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "DID Call Routing" in B5.3
Intelligent Call Handling.
See "DID Call Routing" in the
Glossary.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Direct Mailbox
Access
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
allows subscribers to call the VPS and
access their mailbox without entering the
mailbox number.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
DPT Integration
is the interface data link that permits certain
information and command functions to be
transmitted between the VPS and PBX. The
information and command functions include:
Remote Call Forwarding Set, Auto
Configuration, Caller ID Call Routing, DID
Call Routing, Caller Name Announcement
(System/Personal), Direct Mailbox Access,
Intercom Paging, Live Call Screening,
Personal Greeting for Caller ID, Time
Synchronization with PBX, Two-Way Record,
Two-Way Transfer and Toll Saver.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note
Depending on the model and/or the
software version of the connected PBX,
you may not be able to utilize some of the •
features available only with DPT
Integration. For more information, call
National Parts Center at 1-800-8339626.
Extension Group places several extensions into the same
mailbox to share information using an
Extension Group List. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
Extension
Numbering Plan
permits the VPS to recognize an extension
number as valid.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Direct Mailbox Access" in
the Glossary.
See "VOICE MAIL" in 1.3.3
Which Phone Systems are
Compatible?
See 1.4.1 General.
See 1.4.4 DPT Integration.
See 1.4.5 Connection
Example—DPT Integration.
See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?
See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL
PBX.
See "DPT Integration" in the
Glossary.
•
•
See 5.2.8 Extension Groups.
See "System Group
Assignment-Extension Group"
in B6.1 System Group
Assignment.
•
See "Other ParametersExtension Numbering Plan" in
B6.8 Other Parameters.
Installation Manual
229
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
External
Message
Delivery List
External
Message
Delivery Service
DESCRIPTION
allows a subscriber to send a message to
outside parties and/or extensions with a
single operation. One subscriber can
maintain up to 2 lists with a maximum of 8
entries on each.
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorized for
the subscriber’s COS.
allows a subscriber to send a message to
several subscribers and non-subscribers
(including outside parties) at a specified time
(or immediately). This feature also permits
the receiver to reply to the message without
having to specify the mailbox number.
If the sender wishes, he can require the
receiver to enter a 4-digit password to receive
the sender’s message. If the receiver enters
the password incorrectly 3 times, the VPS: (1)
plays the Company Name (if it has been
recorded), (2) plays the Company’s
Telephone Number (if registered), and (3)
plays the sender’s extension (if both the
Company’s Telephone Number and the
Extension of the Owner have been
registered). With this information, the receiver
can possibly track down the message even if
he does not remember the password.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
See 3.3 Setting up an External
Message Delivery List in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
•
See "The Extension of the
Owner" in Table B-3 in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Authorization for External
Message Delivery" in Table B6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Other ParametersExternal Message Delivery" in
B6.8 Other Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
the Glossary.
•
•
•
•
COS programming determines whether this
feature can be used or not.
•
•
•
230
Installation Manual
See "External Message
Delivery Service" in this Table.
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
the Glossary.
See 3.4 Sending External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 3.5 Receiving External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 3.6 Replying to External
Delivery Messages in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
External
Message
Delivery Status
DESCRIPTION
allows the subscriber to check the status of
undelivered and pending external delivery
messages.
This feature is only available when External
Message Delivery has been authorized for
the subscriber’s COS.
REFERENCES
•
•
See "External Message
Delivery Service" in this Table.
See "External Delivery
Message", "External Message
Delivery List", and "External
Message Delivery Redial" in
the Glossary.
•
See 3.7 Checking and Setting
External Message Delivery
Status in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Fax Management allows the VPS to automatically route an
•
incoming fax signal to a specific fax machine.
Up to 2 fax machines can be assigned using
this feature. Outside callers can also reach
•
the fax machine via Custom Service
•
selection, if programmed.
A special mailbox can be assigned to the Fax
•
Manager. In this way, the VPS can notify the
Fax Manager of the status of faxes.
See "Fax Management (1-5-88)" in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
See 7.3.12 Fax Call Report.
See 7.3.13 Fax Call Statistics
Clear.
See "Other Parameters-Fax
Management" in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Group
Distribution
List—Personal
allows a subscriber to simultaneously send a •
message to several mailboxes using a Group
Distribution List. This list is established by the •
subscriber. Each subscriber can maintain a
maximum of 4 lists with up to 20 entries on
each list.
See "Group Distribution List—
System" in this Table.
See "Personal Group
Distribution List" in the
Glossary.
•
See 4.5 Personal Group
Distribution Lists in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.6 Deleting Group
Distribution Members in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.7 Deleting Group
Distribution List Names in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
•
•
Group
Distribution
List—System
•
allows a subscriber to send a message to
several mailboxes using a Group Distribution
List. Also allows a caller to record a message
into all mailboxes within the list. The System
Administrator must establish this list. The
•
VPS can maintain up to 20 lists with a
maximum of 20 entries on each.
•
See "System Group
Assignment-Mailbox Group" in
B6.1 System Group
Assignment.
See C8 DELIVERING
MESSAGES.
See "System Group
Distribution List" in the
Glossary.
Installation Manual
231
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Hold
•
provides the caller with the option of
temporarily holding the call when the line is
busy. The VPS automatically recalls the
extension after a specified period of time.
When several callers hold their calls to the
same extension, callers are connected in the
order in which they originally called.
See "Other Parameters-Call
Hold" in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Holiday Service
permits the VPS to record, store, and play
•
several different holiday greetings. Up to 20
Holiday Service settings can be programmed.
See B6.3 Holiday Setting.
It is possible to either specify a single day or
a range of days on which to enable the
Holiday Service setting.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap.
Inband
Integration
allows the PBX, using Inband Integration, to
send information to the VPS using
Touchtones. Inband integration is
characterized as Voice Mail Integration and
Touchtone Integration. Voice Mail Integration
works with the Call Forwarding Feature of the
PBX to permit a caller to leave a message
when the mailbox number of the called
extension is not known. Touchtone
Integration works with the Automated
Attendant Service to enable the VPS to
immediately recognize the state of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, etc.) and improve its
call handling performance.
•
•
•
•
•
Incomplete Call allows the subscriber to offer callers several •
Handling Service service options when the extension is busy or
there is no answer: Leaving a Message,
Transfer to Covering Extension, Returning to •
the Automated Attendant Top Menu, Intercom
Paging, Calling a Beeper, or Calling
Operators.
•
232
Installation Manual
See "VOICE MAIL" in 1.3.3
Which Phone Systems are
Compatible?
See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
See 3.1.1 APT/DPT or Inband
Signaling?.
See Section 3 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
See "Inband Signaling" in the
Glossary.
See "Calling a Beeper" and
"Intercom Paging" in this
Table.
See "Incomplete Call Handling
Service" in the Glossary.
See 4.3 Incomplete Call
Handling Status in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Intercom Paging permits callers to page subscribers by PBX
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
paging (there are different kinds of PBX
paging, and these can be specified by VPS
programming) when the subscribers have set
Intercom Paging for Call Transfer or when the
subscribers have set Intercom Paging for
Incomplete Call Handling. The caller is briefly
placed on hold while the VPS announces the
page and until the subscriber answers the
page. The subscriber can answer the page
from any extension using the paging answer
code; this code is specified in the PBX User
Manual. For a Caller ID Caller, if his name has
been recorded for the Caller Name
Announcement feature, the name will be
announced at the end of the page. If the
caller’s name has been recorded for both the
System and Personal Caller Name
Announcement, the VPS will use the
personal caller name.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
•
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Intercom Paging (1-5-87)" in 5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
See "Intercom Paging Group"
in Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Other ParametersIntercom Paging Parameter" in
B6.8 Other Parameters.
See "Intercom Paging" in the
Glossary.
To utilize this feature, follow the procedure
below.
1)
Go to the System Administration Top Menu,
and type 1-2 (Program-Class of Service) and
COS No.(1-62). Select an Intercom Paging
Group (1-17) for this COS. If set to Group 17,
the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all
groups.
2)
From the System Administration Top Menu,
type 1-5-8-7 (Program-System Parameter
Setting-Others-Intercom Paging
Parameters). Adjust the "No Answer Time for
Intercom Paging" to your preference (the
default is 5 s). For the Intercom Paging Group
you selected in Step 1, set the Intercom
Paging access code in "Paging Code for
Group 1-16" and "Paging Code for All
Groups".
Installation Manual
233
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
caller accesses the service. The caller is
•
provided an opportunity to answer each
question after it has been asked. Subscribers
are able to record questions directly into their
own Interview Mailbox.
Interview Service plays a set of recorded questions when a
•
•
•
234
Installation Manual
See 5.2.9 Interview Service.
See "Interview Mailbox
Number" in Table B-3 in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
See "Interview Service" in the
Glossary.
See 4.9 Interview Mailbox in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Live Call
Screening
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
permits the subscriber to monitor incoming
calls as messages are being recorded. The
subscriber has the option of answering calls
while monitoring or allowing the message to
be recorded without interruption. There are
two modes in this feature: Hands-free and
Private.
•
Hands-free permits the subscriber to hear the
caller through the telephone’s speaker and
answer the call by lifting the handset. The
Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the
telephone handset to be lifted before the
message can be monitored. Two-way
communication is established by pressing the
feature button.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See 4.6 DIGITAL
INTEGRATION FEATURES
AND SETUP PROCEDURES
FOR THE PANASONIC KXTA624, KX-TA1232 AND KXTD SERIES.
See 4.6.1 Live Call Screening
(LCS) Programming.
See 4.6.2 Live Call Screening
Password Assignment.
See 4.6.3 Live Call Screening
Password Canceling.
See 4.6.4 Live Call Screening
Recording Mode Assignment
via System Programming.
See 4.6.5 Live Call Screening
Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment via Station
Programming.
See 4.6.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC
Programming.
See 4.6.7 Live Call Screening
Button Assignment via Station
Programming.
See 4.6.8 Live Call Screening
Cancel Button Assignment via
Station Programming.
See 4.6.13 Live Call Screening
Activation.
See 4.6.14 Live Call Screening
Password Control.
Installation Manual
235
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Live Call
Screening
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
permits the subscriber to monitor incoming
calls as messages are being recorded. The
subscriber has the option of answering calls
while monitoring or allowing the message to
be recorded without interruption. There are
two modes in this feature: Hands-free and
Private.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
Hands-free permits the subscriber to hear the
caller through the telephone’s speaker and
•
answer the call by lifting the handset. The
Private Mode alerts by tone and requires the
•
telephone handset to be lifted before the
message can be monitored. Two-way
communication is established by pressing the •
feature button.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
236
Installation Manual
See 4.7 DIGITAL
INTEGRATION FEATURES
AND SETUP PROCEDURES
FOR THE PANASONIC KXTDA/KX-TAW SERIES PBX.
See 4.7.1 Live Call Screening
(LCS) Programming.
See 4.7.2 Live Call Screening
Password Assignment.
See 4.7.3 Live Call Screening
Password Canceling.
See 4.7.4 Live Call Screening
Recording Mode Assignment.
See 4.7.5 Live Call Screening
Private/Hands-Free Mode
Assignment.
See 4.7.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC
Programming.
See 4.7.7 Live Call Screening
Button Assignment.
See 4.7.8 Two-Way Recording
(TWR) Button Assignment.
See 4.7.13 Live Call Screening
Activation.
See "Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening" in Table B-6 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Live Call Screening" in
the Glossary.
See 4.13 Live Call Screening in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Logical
Extension (All
Calls Transfer to
Mailbox)
is an extension that always receives calls
directly into its mailbox. This feature is used
by subscribers that are often unavailable or
that do not have a telephone.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
Mailbox
is a place where all messages to a subscriber •
are stored. Several mailbox options exist:
Subscriber Mailbox, Interview Mailbox,
•
System Manager’s Mailbox, and Message
Manager’s Mailbox (General Delivery
•
Mailbox).
•
•
•
•
allows the VPS to automatically deliver a
Message
Delivery, Internal single message to multiple mailboxes.
See "All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox" in Table B-3 in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Creating and Editing a
Mailbox" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
See "Logical Extension (All
Calls Transfer to Mailbox)" in
the Glossary.
See 5.5 SETTING
MAILBOXES.
See 6.2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
See 7.3.1 Mailbox
Assignments.
See 7.3.10 Mailbox Usage
Report.
See 7.3.11 Mailbox Usage
Statistics Clear.
See B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
•
See Section 1 Mailbox Setup in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
•
See "Group Distribution List—
Personal", "Group Distribution
List—System" and "Message
Delivery Status" in this Table.
Installation Manual
237
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Message
Delivery Status
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
allows a subscriber to check the status of
messages that have been sent. The sending
subscriber has the option of canceling any of
the messages after checking their status. If a
recorded message has not been received,
the VPS will voice report the following: the
message’s destination mailbox number and
its contents.
See 3.2 Checking Mailbox
Distribution in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Message delivery status information is
automatically deleted after the message has
been received by the subscriber, or when the
subscriber cancels the delivery, or when a
new message arrives after 84 delivery status
messages have been stored in the
subscriber’s mailbox (the oldest status
message is always deleted first).
Message
Reception Mode
Message Scan
allows incoming calls to be received by either •
a subscriber’s regular or interview mailbox.
This mode is effective for: (1) Incomplete Call
Handling Service (when the subscriber’s line
is busy, or he cannot take the call, or when he •
has enabled Call Blocking), and (2) when the
transfer destination of calls is set to a Logical
Extension.
See "Interview Service" and
"Logical Extension (All Calls
Transfer to Mailbox)" in this
Table.
See "All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox" in Table B-3" in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
•
See 4.4 Message Reception
Mode in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
permits the subscriber to scan the first 4 s of •
each message. The subscriber can replay the
previous message, play the next message, or
play the entire message.
•
•
•
238
Installation Manual
See "Message Scanning with
Information" in Table B-6" in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Scanning Messages" in
the Glossary.
See 2.1 Receiving Messages
in the Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Message
Transfer
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
allows the subscriber to transfer messages to •
other mailboxes after playing. The subscriber
can also add a personal comment at the
beginning of the message to be transferred if
desired.
•
One or more individual mailboxes can be
specified for message transfer. Messages
can also be transferred using either the
•
System or Personal Group Distribution Lists.
Message Waiting automatically notifies the subscriber/
Message Manager of the reception of new
Notification—
message(s) by calling either a specified
Device
•
telephone or beeper number. The message
will automatically play when the subscriber/ •
Message Manager answers a call to the
telephone. When a beeper is called, the
subscriber/Message Manager must call the
VPS and access the message from the
•
mailbox. Notification can be scheduled either
on or off for a maximum of 2 times during any
24 h period.
The subscriber/Message Manager can
program a maximum of 3 telephones or
beepers in sequence. The VPS will recall the
•
number or number sequence for a specified
number of times until answered.
•
Notification is terminated when the
subscriber/Message Manager has received
the message, when the last number has been
called a specified number of times, or at the •
completion of the programmed time period.
•
•
See "Transferring Messages"
in D2 MANAGING THE
GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX.
See "Message Transfer" in the
Glossary.
See 2.3 Message Transfer in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
Integration.
See "Notification Setting" in B2
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Authorization for
Message Notification" in Table
B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Other ParametersMessage Waiting Notification"
in B6.8 Other Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION.
See "Message Waiting
Notification" in the Glossary.
See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
Installation Manual
239
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
Message Waiting automatically illuminates the message
waiting lamp on the subscriber’s or the
Notification—
Message Manager’s telephone when there
Lamp
are unplayed messages waiting in the
mailbox.
REFERENCES
•
•
Note
•
The extension assigned for Operator 1 in
the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
telephone. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this
feature. When using this feature, you
must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering
•
Plan.
•
•
•
Multilingual
Service
permits up to 3 languages to be used for
prompt options. If the "Selective" mode is
selected, callers are able to choose their
desired language.
•
See 4.8 Message Waiting
Notification in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
•
See "Incoming Call Service
Prompt" in Table 5-5 in 5.3.1
Port Service Menu.
See "System Prompt Selection
Number", "User 1 Prompt
Selection Number", and "User
2 Prompt Selection Number" in
Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt
Setting.
See "Recording Menus and
Voice Labels" and "Recording
User Prompts" in D6
RECORDING MESSAGES.
See "Multilingual Selection
Menu" in the Glossary.
•
•
•
240
Installation Manual
See "Message Waiting
Notification from an SLT" in
3.1.4 PBX Requirements for
Integration.
See 7.2.13 Message Waiting
Lamp Retry Times (MWL).
See "MWL Notification for
Unreceived Message" in Table
B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Other ParametersMessage Waiting Notification"
in B6.8 Other Parameters.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See D3 SETTING UP
MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION.
See "Message Waiting Lamp"
in the Glossary.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
No Answer
Coverage Mode
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
specifies how the calls will be handled when •
Operator 1, 2 and/or 3 do not answer them
within the specified "Operator No Answer
Time". There are 4 options:
•
Caller Select*1—caller may leave a message
or call another extension.
Leave Message*1—caller may leave a
message in Operators’ mailbox.
See "No Answer Coverage
Mode" in Table 5-6 in 5.4.3
Operator’s Parameters.
See "No Answer Coverage
Mode" in Table B-11, Table B12 and Table B-13 in B5.1
Automated Attendant
Parameters.
Disconnect Message*1—caller is
disconnected from the VPS after hearing
"Thank you for calling."
Next Operator*2—caller is transferred to the
next operator (Operator 2 or 3) extension.
*1: Assignable for Operator 1, 2 and 3
*2: Assignable for Operator 1 and 2
•
One-Touch Two- Permits a subscriber to record two-way
conversations into another person’s mailbox
Way Transfer
(DPT Integration
only)
with one-touch. Available only with KX-TDA/ •
KX-TAW series.
•
•
•
•
•
•
pressing [0] on the telephone keypad. Up to 3
operators can be specified to receive calls in •
the Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
Operator Service permits callers to request a live operator by
•
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See 4.7 DIGITAL
INTEGRATION FEATURES
AND SETUP PROCEDURES
FOR THE PANASONIC KXTDA/KX-TAW SERIES PBX.
See 4.7.6 Live Call Screening
Assignment via PC
Programming.
See 4.7.10 One-Touch TwoWay Transfer (One-Touch
TWT) Button Assignment.
See 4.7.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
See 4.7.16 One-Touch TwoWay Transfer (One-Touch
TWT) into Mailbox.
See "One-Touch Two-Way
Transfer (One-Touch TWT)" in
the Glossary.
See 5.4.3 Operator’s
Parameters.
See "Operator’s Parameters"
in B5.1 Automated Attendant
Parameters.
See "Operator’s Extensions" in
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE
MESSAGE MANAGER’S
MAILBOX.
Installation Manual
241
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Password
Administration
allows the System Administrator or System •
Manager to clear a subscriber password (so •
that a new one can be assigned).
See 5.5.4 Password Reset.
See "Resetting a Mailbox
Password" in C2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
PBX Integration
allows the VPS and PBX to work together as •
an integrated unit. Three integration options •
are available: Inband Integration, APT
Integration and DPT Integration.
See 2.6 CONNECTIONS.
See Section 3 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH PANASONIC
KX-T PHONE SYSTEMS.
See Section 4 INTEGRATING
THE VPS WITH THE
PANASONIC KX-T DIGITAL
PBX.
•
Personal Custom allows a subscriber to set the following
Custom Services in his personal greeting
Service
•
(Personal Custom Service):
•
Transfer to Mailbox
•
•
Transfer to Extension
•
Transfer to Outside
•
Custom Service
•
VM Service (Voice Mail Service)
•
AA Service (Call Transfer Service)
A caller can select a desired service from
those above while listening to the personal
greeting or recording a message.
You can also choose what happens if a caller
does not dial anything after your personal
greeting (No DTMF Input Operation) as
follows:
•
Message Recording—He will be
guided to leave a message.
•
Disconnect—The line will be
disconnected.
242
Installation Manual
See "Personal Custom
Service" in the Glossary.
See 4.19 Setting Personal
Custom Service in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Personal
Greeting for
Caller ID
(APT/DPT
Integration Only)
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
•
permits subscribers to record up to 4
personal greetings for calls from preassigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting •
supports up to 8 caller ID numbers.
This feature can be enabled or disabled in the
COS (Class of Service) settings.
•
•
•
•
Personal
Greetings
Play System
Prompt After
Personal
Greeting
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See "Personal Greeting for
CID" in Table B-6 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Personal Greeting for
Caller ID" in the Glossary.
See 4.10 Recording Personal
Greetings for Caller ID in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.11 Assigning Caller ID
Numbers for Personal Greeting
for Caller ID in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
permit the subscriber to record the following 3 •
personal message greetings:
•
No Answer—Plays when unavailable to
answer the call during business hours.
Busy Signal—Plays whenever the line is
•
busy.
After Hours—Plays when the VPS is in the
Night Mode.
•
The No Answer Greeting will also play:
•
when the caller accesses the
mailbox directly.
•
when the Busy Signal or the After
Hours Greeting has not been
recorded.
See 6.2 SETTING UP
MAILBOXES.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Personal Greetings" in
the Glossary.
•
allows the "Guidance for Recording"
message to be played for the caller after the
"Personal Greeting". The "Guidance for
Recording" message instructs the caller how
to terminate the call, access more features,
and rerecord the message.
•
See "Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting" in Table B6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See 1.3 Changing and Erasing
Personal Greetings in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
Installation Manual
243
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Port Service
DESCRIPTION
allows assignment of call services to each
port.
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
REFERENCES
•
•
See 5.2 PORT SETTING
OPTIONS.
See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
Note
The System Manager can change the
Company Greeting setting remotely by
simply calling the VPS (see C6
CHANGING THE COMPANY
GREETING AND INCOMING CALL
SERVICE SETTING).
Private Message allows a subscriber and the System Manager •
to specify a message as "Private" when
sending it to other subscribers, the Message
Manager and/or the System Manager. A
•
message specified as "Private" cannot be
transferred. It is also possible to specify
messages recorded in the Voice Mail Service
•
as "Private".
Receive Message allows subscribers to access messages left in •
their mailboxes. Three options are available
to subscribers:
Reply to Message Sender—permits
subscribers to reply to the message sender
without specifying the extension.
Message Transfer—permits subscribers to
transfer their messages to other mailboxes.
Message Scan—permits subscribers to
listen to the first 4 s of each message.
244
Installation Manual
•
•
See "Delivering Messages to
Specified Mailboxes" in C8
DELIVERING MESSAGES.
See "Private Message" in the
Glossary.
See 3.1 Delivering Messages
to Other Subscribers in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See "Message Transfer" and
"Message Scan" in this Table.
See 2.1 Receiving Messages
in the Subscriber’s Guide.
See 2.2 Replying to Messages
in the Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Remote Call
Forwarding Set
(DPT Integration
only)
DESCRIPTION
allows a subscriber and the Message
Manager to program his extension from a
remote location to forward various types of
calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone.
There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number.
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a
desired extension number when the line is
busy.
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming
calls to a desired extension number when
there is no answer.
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all
incoming calls to a desired extension number
when the line is busy or there is no answer.
FWD to CO*—Forward all incoming calls to
the Telephone number 1 or 2 (programmed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other number.
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Must be enabled in the COS (Class of
Service) settings to be utilized.
See 5.5.2 Entering a Mailbox.
See "Remote Call Forward to
CO" in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
MAILBOXES.
See "Remote Call FWD to CO"
in Table B-6 and Table B-7 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See D7 REMOTE CALL
FORWARDING SET.
See "Remote Call Forwarding
Set" in the Glossary.
See 4.16 Remote Call
Forwarding Set in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
With respect to PBX programming, it is
possible that "Call Forward to CO" is
disabled. To enable VPS Remote Call
Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example,
must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to
be forwarded to a CO line, enable the
following: [504] Call Forward to Outside
Line.
Note
The extension assigned for Operator 1 in
the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
extension. However, its default extension
number (0) cannot be used with this
feature. When using this feature, you
must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering
Plan.
Rotary
Telephone
Service
•
provides guidance to callers using rotary
telephone systems or when several seconds
pass without anything being entered by the
caller.
•
See "Other Parameters-Rotary
Telephone Service" in B6.8
Other Parameters.
See "Rotary Telephone" in the
Glossary.
Installation Manual
245
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Service Access
Commands
DESCRIPTION
allow the caller to directly access several
standard features.
(0) to repeat the Help Menu or call the
operator
REFERENCES
•
•
See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
See 5.2.10 Automated
Attendant.
•
See 1.6 Service Access
Commands in the Subscriber’s
Guide.
( ) to return to previous menu
(#) (1) to dial by name
(#) (2) Custom Service Menu
(#) (3) Department Dialing
(#) (5) Login
(#) (6) Voice Mail Service
(#) (7) to restart (Subscriber’s main menu)
(#) (8) to call transfer
(#) (9) to exit
Service Mode
246
Installation Manual
•
allows the System Administrator or the
System Manager to change the call handling
method that is programmed for each Time
•
Group 1-8.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it •
is retained unless the System Manager or
System Administrator changes it again, even
after the power turns off.
There are 6 Service Modes available:
Automatic Mode—Operates according to
the setting in Time Service.
Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day
Mode.
Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night
Mode.
Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in
Lunch Mode.
Manual Break Mode—Operates only in
Break Mode.
PBX Control Mode—Operation changes
depending on PBX time period (APT/DPT
Integration only).
See "Time Service" in this
Table.
See "Time Service-Service
Mode" in B6.2 Time Service.
See C5 CHANGING THE
SERVICE MODE SETTING.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Special Feature
Authorization
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
permits mailbox owners to use the following •
special features: Remote Call Forward to CO,
Delete Message Confirmation, Message
Waiting Notification, External Message
Delivery, and Auto Forwarding.
But the Message Manager can only utilize the
following features: Remote Call Forward to
CO, Delete Message Confirmation, and
Message Waiting Notification; and the
System Manager can only utilize the Delete
Message Confirmation feature.
•
•
Subscriber
Tutorial
•
guides and assists a subscriber who
accesses his mailbox for the first time to set •
up the following items:
•
Password
•
Owner’s Name
•
Personal Greetings (No Answer
Greeting/Busy Greeting/After Hours •
Greeting)
•
•
System Clock
allows the correct setting of the date and time •
to be made for proper VPS operation.
•
•
See "Remote Call FWD to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", "Authorization
for Message Notification",
"Authorization for External
Message Delivery", and
"Authorization for Auto
Forwarding" in Table B-6 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See "Remote Call FWD to
CO", "Delete Message
Confirmation", and
"Authorization for Message
Notification" in Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See 6.2.1 Subscriber Tutorial.
See "Subscriber Tutorial" in
Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "DID Call Routing" in the
Glossary.
See 1.2 Subscriber Tutorial in
the Subscriber’s Guide.
See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
See C4 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
See D5 SETTING THE
SYSTEM CLOCK.
Installation Manual
247
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
REFERENCES
Eight System Reports are available to the
System Administrator and System Manager
to monitor VPS operating status. These
reports include: Mailbox Assignments, COS
Assignments, System Service Report, Call
Account Report, Port Usage Report, Flash
Memory Usage Report, Mailbox Usage
Report, and the Fax Call Report.
•
•
System Security By default, the System/Message Managers
•
System Reports
•
See 7.3 SYSTEM REPORTS.
See C7 CHECKING SYSTEM
USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS).
See "System Report" in the
Glossary.
See B6.7 System Security.
cannot access the VPS from their telephones
until the System Administrator enables the
relevant settings and sets a password for
access. The System/Message Managers
always need to enter this password to access
the VPS.
The System Administrator can also choose to
set a default password for subscribers’
mailboxes. If this setting is enabled, a default
password is automatically assigned when
mailboxes are created.
Time Service
•
is a timer function that initiates the
appropriate call handling method depending
on the time of day: Day, Night, Lunch, and
•
Break Service periods.
Each Time Group (1-8) can have different
Time Service setting.
•
See "Service Mode" in this
table.
See "Time Service (1-5-2-2)" in
5.2.2 Custom Service
Features.
See "Time Service-Time
Service" in B6.2 Time Service.
Time
Synchronization
occurs between the VPS and PBX when the •
PBX sets a new date and time, or when DPT
Integration is established. The date and time •
are automatically sent from the PBX to the
•
VPS.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See 7.2.4 Set Time (TIME).
See "Time Synchronization" in
the Glossary.
(DPT Integration
only)
248
Installation Manual
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Toll Saver
(DPT Integration
only)
DESCRIPTION
permits a subscriber to check his mailbox
from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers or by
dialing a pre-assigned DID number without
telephone charges.
REFERENCES
•
Note
DID number setting for this feature is only •
available when the VPS is connected to
the following PBXs with DPT Integration.
•
KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
•
KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
•
•
KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
•
•
Trunk Service
(Universal Port)
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
allows call services to be assigned to each
trunk (CO line) group.
•
See 4.18 Setting Telephone
Numbers for Toll Saver in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
•
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
•
The incoming call service determines which
service is used when answering incoming
calls. These services include: Voice Mail
Service, Automated Attendant Service,
Interview Service and Custom Service.
See "Caller ID Number 1 for
Toll Saver", "Caller ID Number
2 for Toll Saver", and "DID
Number for Toll Saver" in
Table 5-7 in 5.5 SETTING
MAILBOXES.
See "Toll Saver" n Table B-6 in
B3 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See B5.4 Toll Saver.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Toll Saver" in the
Glossary.
Note
The System Manager can change the
Company Greeting setting remotely by
simply calling the VPS (see C6
CHANGING THE COMPANY
GREETING AND INCOMING CALL
SERVICE SETTING).
Installation Manual
249
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
Two-Way
Recording
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
DESCRIPTION
permits a subscriber to record two-way
conversations into his mailbox.
REFERENCES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two-Way
Transfer
(APT/DPT
Integration only)
permits a subscriber to record two-way
•
conversations into another person’s mailbox.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
250
Installation Manual
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See 4.6.9 Two-Way Recording
Button Assignment via Station
Programming.
See 4.6.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
See 4.6.15 Two-Way
Recording into Mailbox.
See 4.6.17 A Restriction on
TWR/TWT Activation.
See 4.7.8 Two-Way Recording
(TWR) Button Assignment.
See 4.7.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
See 4.7.14 Two-Way
Recording (TWR) into Mailbox.
See "Two-Way Recording" in
the Glossary.
See 4.14 Recording a TwoWay Conversation in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
See 4.1 GUIDELINES FOR
DIGITAL INTEGRATION.
See 4.6.10 Two-Way Transfer
Button Assignment via Station
Programming.
See 4.6.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
See 4.6.16 Two-Way Transfer
into Mailbox.
See 4.6.17 A Restriction on
TWR/TWT Activation.
See 4.7.9 Two-Way Transfer
(TWT) Button Assignment.
See 4.7.12 Button Assignment
via PC Programming.
See 4.7.15 Two-Way Transfer
(TWT) into Mailbox.
See "Two-Way Transfer" in the
Glossary.
See 4.14 Recording a TwoWay Conversation in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
Table A-1
FEATURE
DESCRIPTION
permits a mailbox owner to record two-way
Unlimited
Message Length conversations of unlimited length into his or
REFERENCES
•
another person’s mailbox (Two-Way
Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
•
maximum recording time for other messages
will automatically be set to 6 min.
To allow unlimited recording time, the
"Message Length" parameter must be set to
"0: Unlimited" in the COS (Class of Service)
settings.
•
•
See "Two-Way Recording" and
"Two-Way Transfer" in this
table.
See "Message Length" in
Table B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Unlimited Message
Length" in the Glossary.
Utility
Commands
allow the System Administrator to access
critical VPS functions.
•
See 7.2 UTILITY
COMMANDS.
Voice Mail
Service
permits a caller/non-subscriber to leave a
message in any mailbox.
•
•
See 5.2.6 Voice Mail.
See B4 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—PORT/
TRUNK SERVICE.
See "Voice Mail" in the
Glossary.
•
Voice Prompts
are announcements that instruct the caller.
•
•
There are 3 kinds of voice prompts:
(1) System Prompts (recorded at the factory
in English),
(2) User 1 Prompts (not recorded),
and
(3) User 2 Prompts (recorded at the factory
•
in Spanish).
•
•
•
See 6.1.6 Customizing User
Prompts (Enter #6*998,5,6).
See "Prompt Mode" in Table B6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF
SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
See B6.5 Prompt Setting.
See C3 SETTING COS
(CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS.
See "Recording User Prompts"
in D6 RECORDING
MESSAGES.
See "Voice Prompt" in the
Glossary.
Installation Manual
251
A1 SYSTEM FEATURES
252
Installation Manual
Appendix
B
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE
Installation Manual
253
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
B1
SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Use either a VT or RS-232C terminals (ASCII Terminals) to perform System Administration,
which includes the setting and changing of system parameters. This can be a personal
computer with emulation software.
Keyboard Use
RS-232C Terminals (ASCII Terminals)
When using RS-232C Terminals, Type the number of the option desired and Press RETURN
to choose menu options.
Table B-1
KEY
FUNCTIONS
(1)-(9), then (RETURN) Typing any number 1 through 9 will select
the corresponding option for that number.
Pressing RETURN will select the number
entered.
(\)
Backspace
Exits the current screen and returns to the
previous step within the menu.
Used to correct any mis-typed entry.
Using the Interface
Programming Guidance
Each parameter is accessed through a series of menu screens. The Programming Menu
Structure Diagram provided below depicts this menu flow. A menu flow that corresponds to the
Programming Menu Structure Diagram is given at the beginning of each section. This flow is
designed to guide the user through the appropriate menus to the parameter to be setup or
changed. The following example illustrates how the menu flow is used.
Example:
System Administration Top Menu - 1 - 4 - 1 - 1
1. Press 1 at the System Administration Top Menu. Press RETURN.
2. Press 4 at the Program Menu. Press RETURN.
3. Press 1 at the Service Setting Menu. Press RETURN.
4. Press 1 on the Automated Attendant Menu to select "1. Department Dialing," when selected.
5. Press RETURN. Auto. Attn-Department Dialing Menu will be displayed on the terminal.
254
Installation Manual
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
1. Program
1. Mallbox
Setting
2. Class of
Service
3. Port/Trunk
Service
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
2. Operator's
Parameter
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Custom
Service
Installation Manual
255
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
Programming Menu Structure Diagram
Mailbox No
Entry
1. Enter/Edit
1. Program
1. Mailbox
Setting
1. Mailbox
Setting
2. Delete
2. Notification
Setting
3. Password Reset
1. 1st Device
2. 2nd Device
4. Mailbox Listing
3. 3rd Device
2. Class of
Service
3. Remote Call
FWD to CO
COS No. (1-64)
Entry
1. Telephone No.1
2. Telephone No.2
1. Day Mode for each port
2. Night Mode for each port
1. Port Service
3. Lunch Mode for each port
4. Break Mode for each port
3. Port/Trunk
Service
1. Day Mode for each trunk group
2. Night Mode for each trunk group
2. Trunk Service
3. Lunch Mode for each trunk group
4. Break Mode for each trunk group
4. Service
Setting
1. Automated
Attendant
1. Department
Dialing
1. Operator 1
2. Operator's
Parameter
1. Day Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
2. Night Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
3. Lunch Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Operator 1
4. Break Mode
2. Operator 2
3. Operator 3
1. Enter Extension
3. Alternate
Extension
2. Delete Extension
3. Extension Listing
2. Custom
Service
Custom Service No. (1-100) Entry
3. Intelligent
Call Handling
1. Caller ID
Call Routing
1. Enter
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
1. Enter
2. DID
Call Routing
Continued Next Page
256
Installation Manual
2. Delete
3. DID Listing
B1 SYSTEM NAVIGATION
1. Enter
5. System
Parameter
Setting
1. System Group
Assignment
1. Mailbox
Group
2. Delete
3. Listing
1. Enter
2. Extension
Group
2. Delete
3. Listing
2. Time Service
1. Service Mode
1. Day Service
2. Time Service
2. Lunch Service
3. Break Service
3. Holiday Setting
1. Holiday Setting Enter
2. Holiday Setting Delete
4. Daylight Saving
Time
3. Holilay Listing
5. Prompt Setting
1. Enter
6. System Caller Name
Announcement
2. Delete
3. Caller ID Listing
7. System Security
8. Others
6. Hardware
Setting
1. RS-232C
1. Extension Numbering Plan 1-16
2. Dialing Parameter
3. Message Waiting Notification
4. External Message Delivery
5. Call Hold
6. Rotary Telephone Service
7. Intercom Paging Parameters
8. Fax Management
9. Disconnect Parameter
2. Port Setting
for each port
3. PBX Interface
Parameter
1. Dialing
Parameter
2. Inband
Signaling
3. Digit Translation
Table
1. Inter-digit
Timeout
2. Input/Output
4. Transfer to
Outside
5. VPS Port
1. Outside
Transfer Sequence
2. Trunk Group
Trunk Group
No. (1-48) Entry
3. Caller ID
Modify Table
Table No. (1-4) Entry
Installation Manual
257
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
B2
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Up to 62 Subscriber Mailboxes can be created or edited by following the correct sequence of
steps.
To access the menu for mailbox setup, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.
Table B-2
Parameter
Mailbox
Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox number. Mailbox
number length is determined during setup or when
initializing the system. Mailbox numbers cannot begin with
"0". If the length of the mailbox number has been defined as
3 digits, for example, the valid range for all mailbox numbers
would be 100 through 997 (998 and 999 would be reserved
for the Message Manager and the System Manager). The
length of the mailbox number cannot be changed through
the Mailbox Setting screen once it has been specified.
Editing Mailboxes
The parameters of each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
To access the menu for mailbox editing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-1
Table B-3
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
The
Extension of
the Owner
2-5 digits
(None)
Used to transfer calls through the VPS to a subscriber’s
mailbox.
Any valid extension number including an Extension Group
List number can be assigned.
Note
If an Extension Group List number is assigned to a
mailbox, all group members are able to share the
information stored there.
258
Installation Manual
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Table B-3
Parameter
Owner First
Name
Owner Last
Name
Class of
Service No.
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16
alphabetic
characters
(None)
The first 4 letters of both the first and last name is printed
on the Mailbox Assignments report.
The Dialing by Name feature uses the last name.
COS No.1-62 Used to define the set of services available to the
(1)
subscriber.
Notes
•
•
Covering
Extension
2-5 digits
(None)
We recommend that parameters for each COS
number be defined before assigning a Class of
Service (COS) number.
COS No.63 pertains to the Message Manager
while COS No.64 pertains to the System
Manager. These numbers cannot be entered in
the COS No. data field.
Identifies the extension number that will receive
unanswered subscriber calls. The Automated Attendant
Service accomplishes this call transfer. The caller is given
the option of transferring the call or leaving a message in
the subscriber’s mailbox.
The Covering Extension is one of the Incomplete Call
Handling Service options that can be enabled or disabled
by the subscriber using the telephone keypad.
Note
The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned as covering extensions.
Interview
Mailbox
Number
2-5 digits
(None)
Permits a mailbox owner to own an interview mailbox. The
interview mailbox number must be an unassigned mailbox
number.
Note
The replies to an interview session constitute one
message. If the subscriber expects many interview
messages, "Mailbox Capacity Maximum Messages"
(see Table B-6 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS) should be raised to a higher value.
Possibly, the subscriber should be assigned to a
different COS.
Installation Manual
259
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Table B-3
Parameter
All Calls
Transfer to
Mailbox
Value Range
(Default)
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Description/Function
If this parameter is set to "Yes", all calls routed to the
extension are automatically forwarded to the extension’s
mailbox without ringing the telephone. Forwarding is
accomplished through the Automated Attendant service.
Callers are permitted to leave a message.
Note
When this feature has been set to "Yes", the mailbox
owner’s extension does not necessarily need to exist
as a phone extension of the PBX.
Up to 20 digits Specifies up to two Caller ID numbers or a DID number for
Caller ID
Number 1 for consisting of Toll Saver. The subscriber can check whether there are
new messages in his mailbox with these phone numbers
1-9, 0,
Toll Saver
Caller ID
Number 2 for
Toll Saver
DID Number
for Toll Saver
(None)
without incurring telephone charges. Note that when these
phone numbers are specified by the subscriber, the phone
numbers are unavailable to other subscribers in the
system. (The phone numbers must be unique.)
Notes
•
•
260
Installation Manual
If Toll Saver is set to "Caller ID" in your Class of
Service, a DID number for Toll Saver cannot be
assigned. If Toll Saver is set to "DID number" in
your Class of Service, Caller ID Number 1/2 for
Toll Saver cannot be assigned. If Toll Saver is set
to "No" in your Class of Service, neither Caller ID
Numbers nor a DID number can be assigned.
DID number setting for this feature is only
available when the VPS is connected to the
following PBXs with DPT Integration.
• KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
• KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
• KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Table B-3
Parameter
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
1-9, 0, , #, Y,
D, F, R, T, S,
W, X, A
(Y:System)
Specifies how the VPS transfers a call to an extension for
each mailbox (Personal Transfer Sequence).
1-9, 0, , #: DIAL CODE
Y: System
D: Disconnect
F: Flash
R: Ring
T: Tone
S: Silence
W: Transf.Wait
X: Extn
A: Answer
Notes
•
•
•
Call Transfer
No Answer
Time
10-60s,
S: System
(System)
When "System" is selected, the VPS follows the
"Extension Transfer Sequence" pre-assigned for
the system in the "Program - Hardware - PBX
Interface - Dialing Parameters Menu".
"System" cannot be used with other sequence
codes.
This sequence has higher priority than "Alternate
Transfer Sequence".
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait before
retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at the
destination extension. This can be set for each mailbox.
Note
When "System" is selected, the VPS follows the "Call
Transfer No Answer Time" pre-assigned for the system
in the "Program - System Parameter - Others - Dialing
Parameters Menu".
Notification Setting
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for the Message Waiting Notification Device
feature. A maximum of 3 destinations (Device 1, 2, 3) can be specified per mailbox.
•
•
•
Class of Service programming determines if the subscriber is able to use this feature.
If the destination device is a telephone, the subscriber will be called when he has
message(s), and will have a chance to listen to the message(s).
If the destination device is a beeper, the subscriber will be notified when he has
message(s). If the beeper has a display, it is possible to send to it a callback number.
The caller can enter the callback number when he leaves a message. If he does not
Installation Manual
261
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
enter a callback number, either the System Callback No., or the caller’s number if it
is received through a telephone company’s Caller ID service, will be sent instead.
To access the menu for Message Waiting Notification, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-2-Device No. 1, 2, or 3.
Notification Setting-Device 1, 2, or 3
Table B-4
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Dial Number
Up to 32 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0, , #
P, T, M, X
(None)
Assigns a telephone or beeper number to Device 1, 2, or
3. The subscriber can also specify the dial number from
his telephone.
P: Pause
T: Dial Tone Detection
M: Dial Mode Switching Code (Touchtone to Pulse, or
Pulse to Touchtone)
X: Callback Number Entry Code
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Note
The callback number entry code "X" must be
included in the number to be called if the Beeper
Callback No. Entry Mode is enabled through COS
and "Type of Device" is set to "Beeper". The proper
number of "Pauses" must be inserted before the
callback entry code.
Notice
When the VPS calls to a CO line via a PRI (ISDN
Primary Rate Access Interface) card of a Panasonic
PBX, please be sure to add "#" after the telephone
number (1112223333 in the example here):
Example: 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX#
Please contact your System Administrator for more
explanation.
Type of
Device
262
Installation Manual
1. Telephone
2. Beeper
(Telephone)
Specifies the device to receive notification. This is
automatically set to "Beeper" when "X" is used in the Dial
Number (above). The subscriber can also specify the
type of device from his telephone.
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Table B-4
Parameter
Use Mode
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Not Use
Specifies how Device 1, 2, or 3 is to be used. The
2. Continuously
subscriber can also specify the use mode from his
3. Scheduled
telephone.
(Continuously)
1. Not Use—Device 1, 2, or 3 is not used for a
notification call.
2. Continuously—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called whenever
a message is recorded in the mailbox.
3. Scheduled—Device 1, 2, or 3 is called on a schedule
basis when a message has been left in the mailbox.
No. of
Retries
0-9 times
(0)
Specifies the number of times that a notification call to
Device 1, 2, or 3 should be attempted after a busy or no
answer condition is received.
Busy Delay
Time
0-120 min
(3)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after a
busy condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
No Answer
Delay Time
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the VPS must wait after a
no-answer condition is received before making another
notification call to Device 1, 2, or 3.
Time Frame
1, 2
1-12: h
00-59: min
AM/PM:
a.m./p.m.
Specifies the daily schedule for the Message Waiting
Notification service for 1 week for this device.
MON:
TUE:
WED:
THU:
FRI:
SAT:
SUN:
: All Day
Space: No Use
(No Use)
Note
These parameters are active only when "Use Mode"
is set to "Scheduled".
Remote Call Forward to CO
Follow the procedure below to specify the destination outside telephone number(s) to which
the callers are forwarded when the Remote Call Forwarding feature is set to an outside (CO)
line.
Telephone number 1 and Telephone number 2 can be specified per mailbox.
•
Class of Service programming determines if the mailbox owner is able to use this
feature.
•
This feature is only available with DPT Integration.
To access the menu for Remote Forward to CO, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-1-Mailbox No.-3-Telephone Number 1 or
2.
Installation Manual
263
B2 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES
Table B-5
Parameter
Telephone
Number 1, 2
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 digits
(With the KXTD816/TD1232/
TA1232)
or
Up to 24 digits
(With the KXTD500)
(None)
Specifies the telephone number to which the callers are
forwarded when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO
line.
The telephone number can contain the digits "0-9" and
" ".
The telephone number should begin with a Line Access
Code (to seize a CO line).
Note
Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Deleting a Mailbox
When a mailbox is deleted, the Voice Processing System erases all messages in the mailbox,
removes the mailbox from all group distribution lists, deletes the personal group distribution
lists assigned to the mailbox, erases the subscriber’s name, and cancels all external delivery
messages.
To access the menu for Deleting a Mailbox, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-2-Mailbox No.
Resetting a Mailbox Password
Follow the procedure below to set the parameters for clearing a mailbox password.
To access the menu for clearing a mailbox password, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-3-Mailbox No.
Listing Mailboxes
Follow the procedure below to display the mailbox number list.
To display the list of all mailbox numbers, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-1-4
264
Installation Manual
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
B3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING
COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
The COS-Class of Service parameters define the set of services that are available to mailbox
owners. A maximum of 64 (1-64) classes can be specified. A class of service number can be
assigned for each mailbox. More than 1 subscriber can share the same class of service.
•
COS number 63 is only available to the Message Manager while COS number 64 is
only available to the System Manager.
•
The procedure below determines the utilization of the following special features on a
COS basis:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Call Forward to CO (available for COS numbers 1-63)
Delete Message Confirmation (available for COS numbers 1-64)
Message Waiting Notification (available for COS numbers 1-63)
External Message Delivery (available for COS numbers 1-62)
Auto Forwarding (available for COS numbers 1-63)
Caller ID Callback (available for COS numbers 1-64)
Call Transfer to Outside (available for COS numbers 1-62)
To access the menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-64, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-64)
Note
In Table B-6 and Table B-7, sub-parameters can be assigned only when the
corresponding authorization parameter is set to "Yes".
Class of Service Setting
COS Nos. 1-62 (for subscribers)
To access the menu for Class of Service Numbers 1-62 for subscribers, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(1-62)
Installation Manual
265
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message
will remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the
day after the message reception.
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days that a played message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed"
whenever the message is played back. If "0: Unlimited"
is selected, the saved message will remain in the
mailbox until erased by the subscriber.
Message Length
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(3)
Defines the maximum message length.
If set to "0: Unlimited", a subscriber can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person’s mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way
Transfer). The maximum recording time for other
messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(100)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(100)
Specifies the total number of available minutes for
storing (both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
Message Retrieval 1. LIFO
2. FIFO
Order
(LIFO)
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved
(played back for listening).
LIFO:
Messages are retrieved starting with the
most recent.
FIFO:
Messages are retrieved starting with the
oldest.
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender’s name
and the recording date and time to the message during
the message scan.
Prompt Mode
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Specifies the language used for voice prompts played for
the subscriber during a Message Waiting Notification
Call and Subscriber Service.
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the
mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the
mailbox. If set to "No", the message is erased
immediately.
Delete Message
Confirmation
266
Installation Manual
Note
If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but
not recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System
prompts in English.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Envelope
Information
Position
Value Range
(Default)
1. Before
2. After
3. None
(Before)
Description/Function
Specifies the position of Envelope Information—the
name of the person who recorded/transferred a
message, or Caller ID Number information
Before:
The VPS announces Envelope Information
before playing the recorded/transferred
message.
After:
The VPS announces Envelope Information
after playing the recorded message.
None:
The VPS does not announce Envelope
Information.
Note
If you want to skip this information, press 6 while
listening to it.
Time and Date
Stamp Position
1. Before
2. After
3. None
(After)
Specifies the position of Time and Date Stamp
Before:
The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp
before playing the recorded/transferred
message.
After:
The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp
after playing the recorded message.
None:
The VPS does not announce Time and
Date Stamp.
Note
If you want to skip this information, press 6 while
listening to it.
Caller ID Callback 1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Direct Mailbox
Access
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to call back the
message sender with the Caller ID number attached to
the message.
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to directly enter
Subscriber Service. This is accomplished by calling a
VPS extension directly from the subscriber’s extension.
The Subscriber Service Access Code (" " and mailbox
number) need not be dialed. Password entry may be
required if specified beforehand.
Note
The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if
APT/DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA624 or other KX-T series
telephone system.
Installation Manual
267
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Remote Call FWD 1. Yes
2. No
to CO
(No)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an
outside (CO) line; a subscriber can program (either from
a remote location or on-site) his extension to forward
various types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or
"Telephone No.2" (preprogrammed in the Mailbox
Setting), or to any other telephone number.
Note
The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-T series telephone system.
Notice
With respect to PBX programming, it is possible that
"Call Forward to CO" is disabled. To enable VPS
Remote Call Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for
example, must be programmed properly. For the
COS of the extensions whose calls are to be
forwarded to a CO line, enable the following: [504]
Call Forward to Outside Line.
1. Yes
Play System
2. No
Prompt after
(No)
Personal Greeting
If set to "Yes", directions for recording a message are
given to the caller immediately after the personal
greeting has been played.
The following guidance messages are played:
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features".
"To pause and restart recording, press 2".
Use Call Waiting
on Busy
268
Installation Manual
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS signals the busy extension that
another call is waiting.
Note
To use Call Waiting on Busy, you must also enable
the use of the Call Waiting feature at your PBX.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Message Cancel
for Live Call
Screening
Value Range
(Default)
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
Description/Function
The Live Call Screening feature permits the subscriber to
monitor incoming messages as they are being recorded,
or intercept them if desired. If the subscriber chooses to
speak to the caller, if not disabled by the PBX
beforehand, the VPS will record the two-way
conversation. If set to "Yes", the VPS will automatically
delete this recording.
The two-way conversation may be saved in the mailbox
if the PBX allows the conversation to be recorded. If set
to "No", the recording will be automatically saved.
Note
The Live Call Screening feature is available if APT/
DPT Voice Mail Integration is activated with a
Panasonic KX-TA624 or other KX-T series
telephone system.
Intercom Paging
Group
1-17
(COS NO.1-17:
Group 1-17;
COS NO.18-62:
Group 1)
Number of CIDs
for Caller Name
Announcement
0-30
(30)
Personal Greeting 1. Yes
2. No
for CID
Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to
the subscriber.
If set to "17", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for
all groups.
Note
The Intercom Paging feature is available if APT/DPT
Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic
KX-TA624 or other KX-T series telephone system.
Specifies the maximum number of Caller IDs which
subscribers can assign for the Personal Caller Name
Announcement.
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilize the personal
greeting feature for Caller ID.
(Yes)
Caller ID
Screening
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", subscribers can utilize the Caller ID
Screening feature.
Call Transfer to
Outside
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS enables a call to be transferred to
an outside line from the following services: Call Transfer
Service, and Personal Custom Service.
Installation Manual
269
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Toll Saver
Value Range
(Default)
1. No
2. DID
3. Caller ID
(No)
Description/Function
Permits a subscriber to check his mailbox from preassigned Caller ID numbers or by dialing a pre-assigned
DID number without incurring telephone charges.
No:
Disables the Toll Saver feature.
DID:
A subscriber can check his mailbox by
dialing a pre-assigned DID number without
incurring telephone charges.
Caller ID:
A subscriber can check his mailbox from a
pre-assigned Caller ID number without
incurring telephone charges.
Note
DID number setting for this feature is only available
when the VPS is connected to the following PBXs
with DPT Integration.
• KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
• KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
• KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
Subscriber
Tutorial
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is guided to set the following
basic mailbox settings automatically only when he
accesses his mailbox for the first time:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
270
Installation Manual
Password
Owner’s Name
Personal Greetings—No Answer
Personal Greetings—Busy
Personal Greetings—After Hours
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Authorization for
Message
Notification
Value Range
(Default)
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilize the Message
Waiting Notification feature. The sub-parameters to be
set include Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode, MWL
Notification for Unreceived Message, and Device
Notification for Unreceived Message. If set to "No", subparameters cannot be assigned.
Note
This parameter in COS No.1 is set to "Yes" when the
Quick Setup procedure is used to create Subscriber
Mailboxes.
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Permits subscribers to use the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, the caller is
asked if the message is urgent. If urgent,
the caller is asked to enter the callback
number.
Without:
Without recording a message, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Before:
Before recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
After:
After recording a message, the VPS asks
the caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry
feature.
Note
To utilize this feature, the callback number entry
code must be included in the subscriber’s beeper
number. When "Disable" is selected or if the caller
does not enter a callback number, "System Callback
No." (see Table B-32) will be displayed on the
beeper’s display. If a caller’s number is received
through a telephone company’s Caller ID service,
the caller’s number will be displayed instead of
"System Callback No.".
Installation Manual
271
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Yes
MWL
Notification for 2. No
(Yes)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp will illuminate
when unplayed messages remain after the subscriber
has accessed the mailbox for Subscriber Service.
1. Yes
Device
Notification for 2. No
(No)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are
received.
Authorization for 1. Yes
External Message 2. No
(No)
Delivery
Prompt Mode
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
If set to "Yes", subscribers are able to utilize the External
Message Delivery feature. The sub-parameter to be set
is Prompt Mode. If set to "No", sub-parameter cannot be
assigned.
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will
be greeted by the VPS in the specified language
(prompt). However, if "Selective" is enabled, then the
receiver has a choice of prompts. See related
explanation in "Incoming Call Service Prompt" in Table
5-5 in 5.3.1 Port Service Menu.
Note
When "Selective" is enabled and the receiver uses a
rotary telephone, the no-entry selection is specified
by "Prompt for Rotary Callers" in Table 5-5 in 5.3.1
Port Service Menu.
Authorization for
Auto Forwarding
Mailbox
Number
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
2-5 digits
(None)
If set to "Yes", the VPS automatically forwards messages
that have not been accessed for a specific length of time
to another mailbox. The sub-parameters to be set for this
feature include Mailbox Number, Delay Time, and
Forwarding Mode. If set to "No", sub-parameters cannot
be assigned.
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be
forwarded.
Note
The numbers of the System Group Distribution List
cannot be specified as the destination.
272
Installation Manual
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-6
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Delay Time
(h) (min)
00:05 to 99:59
(00:30)
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the
VPS must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note
The delay time must be less than the New Message
Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted
before being forwarded.
Forwarding
Mode
1. Copy
2. Move
(Move)
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the
original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the
messages are retained in the original mailbox after
forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are
forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained
at the original location.
COS Nos. 63 & 64 (for Managers)
To access the menu for Class of Service Numbers 63 & 64 for Managers, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-2-COS No.(63-64)
Only the parameters listed below can be assigned for COS numbers 63 and 64. COS number
64 cannot assign the last 4 parameters—Direct Mailbox Access, Remote Call FWD to CO,
Authorization for Message Notification, and Authorization for Auto Forwarding.
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
New Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days that an unplayed message can
remain in the mailbox. The storage period begins the day after
the message reception.
Saved Message
Retention Time
1-30 days
0: Unlimited
(30)
Defines the number of days a played saved message will
remain in the mailbox. The timing is "refreshed" whenever the
message is played back. If "0: Unlimited" is selected, saved
messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the
mailbox owner.
Installation Manual
273
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-6 min
0: Unlimited
(6)
Defines the maximum message length.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Messages
5-100 msgs
(100)
Specifies the maximum number of (both new and saved)
messages that can be stored in a mailbox.
Mailbox Capacity
Maximum
Message Time
5-100 min
0: Unlimited
(100)
Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing
(both new and saved) messages in each mailbox.
Message Length
Message
Retrieval Order
1. LIFO
2. FIFO
(LIFO)
If set to "0: Unlimited", a manager can record two-way
conversations of unlimited length into his or another person’s
mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The
maximum recording time for other messages will automatically
be set to 6 min.
Specifies the order in which messages will be retrieved (played
back for listening).
LIFO:
Messages are retrieved starting with the most
recent.
FIFO:
Messages are retrieved starting with the oldest.
Message
Scanning with
Information
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS adds the message sender’s name and
the recording date and time to the message during the
message scan.
Prompt Mode
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(User 1)
Specifies the language used for voice prompts.
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox
owner before erasing a message left in the mailbox. If set to
"No", the message is erased immediately.
Delete Message
Confirmation
274
Installation Manual
Note
If User 1 or User 2 is specified as Prompt Mode but not
recorded by the Message Manager, the VPS will
automatically play the factory-recorded System prompts
in English.
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Envelope
Information
Position
Value Range
(Default)
1. Before
2. After
3. None
(Before)
Description/Function
Specifies the position of Envelope Information—the name of
the person who recorded/transferred a message, or Caller ID
Number information
Before:
The VPS announces Envelope Information
before playing the recorded/transferred message.
After:
The VPS announces Envelope Information after
playing the recorded message.
None:
The VPS does not announce Envelope
Information.
Note
If you want to skip this information, press 6 while listening
to it.
Time and Date
Stamp Position
1. Before
2. After
3. None
(After)
Specifies the position of Time and Date Stamp
Before:
The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp
before playing the recorded/transferred message.
After:
The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp after
playing the recorded message.
None:
The VPS does not announce Time and Date
Stamp.
Note
If you want to skip this information, press 6 while listening
to it.
Caller ID Callback 1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Direct Mailbox
Access
1. Yes
2. No
(Yes)
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to call back the message
sender with the Caller ID number attached to the message.
If set to "Yes", a subscriber is able to directly enter Subscriber
Service. This is accomplished by calling a VPS extension
directly from the subscriber’s extension. The Subscriber
Service Access Code (" " and mailbox number) need not be
dialed. Password entry may be required if specified
beforehand.
Note
The Direct Mailbox Access feature is available if APT/DPT
Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KXTA624 or other KX-T series telephone system.
Installation Manual
275
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Remote Call FWD 1. Yes
2. No
to CO
(No)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes", Remote Call Forwarding can be set to an outside
(CO) line; the Message Manager can program (either from a
remote location or on-site) his extension to forward various
types of calls to either "Telephone No.1" or "Telephone No.2"
(preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any other
telephone number.
Note
The Remote Call FWD to CO feature is available if DPT
Voice Mail Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-T
series telephone system.
Notice
With respect to PBX programming, it is possible that "Call
Forward to CO" is disabled. To enable VPS Remote Call
Forwarding, the KX-TD1232, for example, must be
programmed properly. For the COS of the extensions
whose calls are to be forwarded to a CO line, enable the
following: [504] Call Forward to Outside Line.
276
Installation Manual
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Authorization for 1. Yes
2. No
Message
(Yes)
Notification
Beeper
Callback No.
Entry Mode
1. Caller
Select
2. Without
3. Before
4. After
5. Disable
(Disable)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes", the Message Manager is able to utilize the
Message Waiting Notification feature. The sub-parameters to
be set include Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode, MWL
Notification for Unreceived Message, and Device Notification
for Unreceived Message. If set to "No", sub-parameters cannot
be assigned.
Permits the Message Manager to use the Callback Number
Entry feature.
Caller
Select:
After recording a message, the caller is asked if
the message is urgent. If urgent, the caller is
asked to enter the callback number.
Without:
Without recording a message, the caller is asked
to enter the callback number.
Before:
Before recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
After:
After recording a message, the VPS asks the
caller to enter the callback number.
Disable:
Disables the Callback Number Entry feature.
Note
To utilize this feature, the callback number entry code
must be included in the subscriber’s beeper number.
When "Disable" is selected or if the caller does not enter
a callback number, "System Callback No." (see Table B32) will be displayed on the beeper’s display. If a caller’s
number is received through a telephone company’s Caller
ID service, the caller’s number will be displayed instead of
"System Callback No.".
1. Yes
MWL
Notification for 2. No
(Yes)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the message waiting lamp illuminates when
unplayed messages remain after the Message Manager has
accessed the mailbox.
1. Yes
Device
Notification for 2. No
(No)
Unreceived
Message
If set to "Yes", the VPS calls the appropriate device in
numerical order until all unplayed messages are received.
Installation Manual
277
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Table B-7
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Authorization for 1. Yes
Auto Forwarding 2. No
Mailbox
Number
Description/Function
(No)
If set to "Yes", the VPS automatically forwards messages that
have not been accessed for a specific length of time to another
mailbox. The sub-parameters to be set for this feature include
Mailbox Number, Delay Time, and Forwarding Mode. If set to
"No", sub-parameters cannot be assigned.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be
forwarded.
Note
The numbers of the System Group Distribution List cannot
be specified as the destination.
278
Delay Time
(h) (min)
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the VPS
00:05 to 99:59 must wait before forwarding unretrieved messages. The
maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
(00:30)
Note
The delay time must be less than the New Message
Retention Time, or else messages will be deleted before
being forwarded.
Forwarding
Mode
1. Copy
2. Move
(Move)
Installation Manual
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the
original mailbox. When set to "Copy", copies of the messages
are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding. When set
to "Move", messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox
and are not retained at the original location.
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
B4
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK
SERVICE
One of 4 incoming call services can be assigned to each VPS port and each PBX trunk (CO
line) group: Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, or Custom Service.
The Port Assignment menu and Trunk Group Assignment menu allow the Company Greeting
Number, Prompt Mode, and Delayed Answer Time to be programmed.
Services have this order of priority:
Toll Saver > Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk
Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver has the highest priority.)
To access the menu for Port/Trunk Service Menu, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3
B4.1
Port Assignment
To access the menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected port, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)
Port (1-2)-Day Mode
To access the menu for Day Mode features for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-1
Table B-8
Parameter
Company
Greeting No.
Value Range
(Default)
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the port.
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Installation Manual
279
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Table B-8
Parameter
Incoming Call
Service
Value Range
(Default)
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Description/Function
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Notes
•
•
•
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should
also be specified.
When you specify the Custom service, one of 100
(1-100) Custom service numbers should also be
specified.
The System manager can change the "Incoming
Call Service" remotely by simply calling the VPS
(see C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY
GREETING AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE
SETTING).
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this port. When set to "Selective", the caller can select the
language of his choice, provided the Message Manager
has recorded the Multilingual Selection Menu and the
System Administrator has specified Prompt Selection
Number in "System Prompt Selection Number", "User 1
Prompt Selection Number", and "User 2 Prompt Selection
Number" in Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary
Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection Number)
after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been played.
Note
"Prompt for Rotary Callers" can be assigned only when
"Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to "Selective".
Delayed
Answer Time
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the port answers immediately (0) or with
delay (1-60 s).
Port (1-2)-Night Mode
To access the menu for Night Mode features for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-2
280
Installation Manual
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Port (1-2)-Lunch Mode
To access the menu for Lunch Mode features for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-3
Port (1-2)-Break Mode
To access the menu for Break Mode features for the selected port, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-1-Port No.(1-2)-4
B4.2
Trunk Group Assignment
This assignment is effective only with APT/DPT Integration. The trunk (CO line) group
numbers range from 1 to 48.
To access the menu for Day, Night, Lunch or Break Mode for the selected PBX trunk
(CO line) group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)
Notes
•
•
For KX-TD series (except for KX-TD500), "trunk (CO line) group number" in this
section (assignment) means "CO line number".
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Trunk (1-48)-Day Mode
To access the menu for Day Mode features for the selected PBX trunk (CO line)
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-1
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Installation Manual
281
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Table B-9
Parameter
Company
Greeting No.
Incoming Call
Service
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-32
S: System
Greeting
N: None
(None)
Specifies the company greeting to be played on the trunk
(CO line) group.
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
5. None
(None)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services.
Notes
•
•
•
Incoming Call 1. System
Service Prompt 2. User 1
3. User 2
4. Selective
(User 1)
When you specify the Interview Service, one of
subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should
also be specified.
When you specify the Custom service, one of
100 (1-100) Custom service numbers should
also be specified.
The System Manager can change the "Incoming
Call Service" remotely by simply calling the VPS
(see C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY
GREETING AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE
SETTING).
Specifies the language of voice prompts to be played on
this trunk (CO line) group. When set to "Selective", the
caller can select the language of his choice, provided the
Message Manager has recorded the Multilingual
Selection Menu and the System Administrator has
specified Prompt Selection Number in "System Prompt
Selection Number", "User 1 Prompt Selection Number",
and "User 2 Prompt Selection Number" in Table B-27 in
B6.5 Prompt Setting.
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will need to select a
prompt available for rotary callers. See "Prompt for
Rotary Callers" below.
Prompt for
Rotary
Callers
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Specifies which language (System/User 1/User 2) a rotary
caller or an External Delivery Message receiver hears
when he cannot enter any digit (Prompt Selection
Number) after the Multilingual Selection Menu has been
played.
Note
"Prompt for Rotary Callers" can be assigned only
when "Incoming Call Service Prompt" is set to
"Selective".
Delayed
Answer Time
282
Installation Manual
0-60 s
(0)
Specifies whether the trunk (CO line) group answers
immediately (0) or with delay (1-60 s).
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE
Trunk (1-48)-Night Mode
To access the menu for Night Mode features for the selected PBX trunk (CO line)
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-2
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Trunk (1-48)-Lunch Mode
To access the menu for Lunch Mode Features for PBX trunk (CO line) group, follow
the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-3
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Trunk (1-48)-Break Mode
To access the menu for Break Mode Features for the selected PBX trunk (CO line)
group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-3-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)-4
Note
The maximum number of trunk (CO line) groups depends on the VPS model.
Installation Manual
283
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
B5
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE
SETTINGS
B5.1
Automated Attendant Parameters
The Automated Attendant Service has 3 main functions: Department or Speed Dialing,
Operator’s Parameters, and Alternate Extension.
To access the menu for Automated Attendant Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1
Department Dialing
Department Dialing is a speed-dialing feature that permits a caller to reach the intended
extension by dialing a single digit (1-9).
To access the menu for Department Dialing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-1
Table B-10
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Department
Dialing No.1-9
2-5 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies the department extension number.
Notes
•
•
The Extension Group List or Logical
Extension Numbers cannot be assigned.
The Message Manager must record the
Department Dialing menu.
Operator’s Parameters
Use these parameters to specify the operator’s (operator 1, 2, 3) extensions and mailboxes,
as well as how to treat operator-seeking calls.
Operator’s parameters can be individually set for Day, Night, Lunch and Break Modes.
To access the menu for Operator’s Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2
284
Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1
Use this parameter to enable or disable the Operator Service. It specifies Operator 1’s
extension and the treatment of the calls transferred to that extension. The extension number
assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode will be for the Message Manager. When Operator
service is enabled, operator-seeking calls first reach Operator 1’s extension.
Notes
•
•
Because the extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is for the
Message Manager, you cannot assign this extension to any other mailbox.
By default, the extension number for the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature and the Remote Call Forwarding
Set feature. When using these features, You must assign the extension number that
is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
To access the menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 1, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-1
Table B-11
Parameter
Operator
Service
Operator’s
Extension
Value Range
(Default)
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
1-5 digits
(0)
Description/Function
Enables or disables the Operator Service feature.
Note
All non-touchtone input calls in Automated
Attendant Service will be transferred to the General
Delivery Mailbox when the Operator Service is
disabled.
Specifies the extension number for Operator 1.
Notes
•
•
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(998)
The default setting (0) cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature.
An extension number must be assigned that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
The extension number must not be assigned
anywhere else (in particular, the extension must
not have a mailbox). Otherwise, you will get an
error message.
Callers to Operator 1 are prompted to leave a message
in this mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage
or No Answer Coverage modes are set.
Installation Manual
285
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-11
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator No
Answer Time
10-60 s
(30)
When a call to Operator 1, 2, or 3 is not answered within
the time set, the VPS will offer other options as defined
by the "No Answer Coverage Mode".
Notes
•
•
Busy
Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
This timer applies to Operator 1, 2, and 3.
If more than 1 operator is assigned, we
recommend to reduce the time on the "Operator
No Answer Time" to 15 s.
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 1
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 1 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 1 when another
call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the
PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 1 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 1’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 2.
Message
Repeat Cycle
*
286
1-3 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times the VPS will play the
Automated Attendant top menu.
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s
mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
•
No input to Automated Attendant.
•
No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to
"C. Operator" in Table B-15 in B5.2 Custom Service.
Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
•
No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage (Day/
Night/Lunch/Break)" is set to "Operator Extension" in Table B-35 in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Note
Extension Call Forwarding to the VPS can override the operator call coverage settings
depending on the timing parameters of the PBX and VPS. Even if the operator call
coverage parameters are set to "Next Operator" on Busy/No Answer, the call may go to
the VPS (if the Operator has set the call forwarding to the VPS).
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2
Operator 2 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 1 is busy or does not answer and
Operator 1’s parameters are set as follows:
•
•
Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
No Answer Coverage Mode—Next Operator
To access the menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 2, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-2
Table B-12
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator’s
Extension
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 2. Any valid
extension number can be assigned.
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 2. Callers to
Operator 2 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 2
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 2 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals the Operator 2 when another
call is waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the
PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
Installation Manual
287
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-12
Parameter
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1. Caller Select
2. Leave Message
3. Disconnect
Message
4. Next Operator
(Caller Select)
Specifies how to handle Operator 2 calls when not
answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
Answer Time" mode.
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 2’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
4. Next Operator—Transfers the caller to Operator 3.
*
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s
mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
•
No input to Automated Attendant.
•
No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to
"C. Operator" in Table B-15 in B5.2 Custom Service.
•
No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage (Day/
Night/Lunch/Break)" is set to "Operator Extension" in Table B-35 in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Operator’s Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3
Operator 3 receives operator-seeking calls when Operator 2 is busy or unanswered and
Operator 2’s parameters are set as follows:
•
•
Busy Coverage Mode—No Answer Coverage
No Answer Coverage Mode—next Operator
To access the menu for Operator Parameters-Day Mode-Operator 3, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-2-1-3
Table B-13
Parameter
Operator’s
Extension
288
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number for Operator 3. Any valid
extension number can be assigned.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-13
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Operator’s
Mailbox No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the mailbox number for Operator 3. Callers to
Operator 3 are prompted to leave a message in this
mailbox depending upon how the Busy Coverage or No
Answer Coverage modes are set.
Busy
Coverage
Mode
1. Hold
2. No Answer
Coverage
3. Call Waiting
4. Disconnect
Message
(Hold)
Specifies how to handle calls when the Operator 3
extension is busy.
1. Hold—Automatically places the caller on hold and the
Operator 3 extension is called again.
2. No Answer Coverage—Offers the option specified by
the No Answer Coverage Mode to the caller.
3. Call Waiting—Signals Operator 3 when another call is
waiting using the Call Waiting feature of the PBX.
4. Disconnect Message—Disconnects the call after
playing "Thank you for calling".
No Answer
Coverage
Mode
1. Caller Select
Specifies how to handle Operator 3 calls when not
2. Leave Message answered within the time period set by the "Operator No
3. Disconnect
Answer Time" mode.
Message
(Caller Select)
1. Caller Select*—Allows the caller to leave a message
or call another extension. (In some cases, a call to
another extension is not available.
2. Leave Message—Instructs the caller to leave a
message in Operator 3’s mailbox.
3. Disconnect message—Disconnects the caller after
playing "Thank you for calling".
*
In the following cases, the caller cannot "select". He is directed to Operator 1’s
mailbox when he is transferred to the operator but the operator does not answer:
•
No input to Automated Attendant.
•
No input to Custom Service menu when "No DTMF Input Operation" is set to
"C. Operator" in Table B-15 in B5.2 Custom Service.
•
No input to Voice Mail service when "Rotary Telephone Call Coverage (Day/
Night/Lunch/Break)" is set to "Operator Extension" in Table B-35 in B6.8 Other
Parameters.
Notes
•
•
An operator-seeking call will always reach Operator 1 first. The call will then be
transferred to Operator 2 and Operator 3 sequentially, depending on system
programming.
"Next Operator" is not applicable for "No Answer Coverage Mode" of Operator 3.
Installation Manual
289
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Operator’s Parameters-Night Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator’s Parameters-Lunch Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Operator’s Parameters-Break Mode-Operator 1, 2, 3
Same as Day Mode.
Alternate Extension Assignment
Assigns extensions that should be transferred differently from the normal extension transfer
sequence. Calls to the extensions in this group will be transferred following the sequence
defined by "Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence" (see "Alternate Extension Transfer
Sequence" in Table B-44 in B7.3 PBX Interface Parameters).
To access the menu for Alternate Extension Assignment Parameter, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3
Alternate Extension Group-Enter
The system can create up to 32 extensions that use the same alternate transfer sequence.
To access the menu for Alternate Extension-Enter Parameter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-1
Table B-14
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Alternate
Extension (1-32)
2-5 digits
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies an extension, which requires a different
transfer sequence than normal.
Note
The Extension Group List or Logical Extension
Numbers cannot be assigned.
290
Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Alternate Extension-Delete
The system can delete extension numbers from the alternate extension group.
To access the menu for Alternate Extension-Delete Parameter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-2
Alternate Extension-Listing
Lists all of the extensions registered in the alternate extension group.
To access the menu for Alternate Extension-Listing Parameter, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-1-3-3
B5.2
Custom Service
Custom Service is one of 4 incoming call services. By assigning a function to each key, you
can provide callers with a customized key operation service. You can establish a maximum of
100 Custom Services with the possible depth of 8 layers. The Message Manager should
record Custom Service Menus so that callers will know which key to press.
Note
Callers cannot jump between Custom Service menus more than 8 times.
To access the menu for Custom Service Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-2-Custom Service No.(1-100)
Table B-15
Parameter
Description
Prompt
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
Up to 32
characters
(None)
1. System
2. User 1
3. User 2
(System)
Description/Function
The information typed in this field is for reference only. Any
ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Specifies the language of services within Custom Service.
Note
This parameter overrides "Incoming Call Service Prompt".
Installation Manual
291
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-15
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Menu Repeat
Cycle
1-3 times
(3)
Call Transfer
Anytime
Extn./Mbx/No
(Extn.)
Description/Function
Specifies the number of times Custom Service menu
messages will be repeated to the caller.
Specifies the destination to which the call will be transferred.
The "Extn." setting (enter "E") enables callers to be transferred
directly to their intended party by dialing the extension number.
The "Mbx" setting (enter "M") enables callers to leave
messages in a mailbox by entering the mailbox number. The
"No" setting (enter "N") disables extension transfer and
mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries work (following the
Custom Service menu).
Note
This parameter should be set to "No" when Subscriber
Service is specified as a Custom Service option and it is
desired that digits can be entered very quickly to specify a
mailbox. Therefore, in most cases, "No" is the best setting
for this parameter. This is especially true if you do not want
to explain "Call Transfer Any Time" in your Custom
Service menu recording.
Wait for
Second Digit
No DTMF
Input
Operation
292
Installation Manual
1-5 s
(1)
Resolves the problem when the first digit of the extension or
mailbox number is the same as one of the Custom Service
menu choices. The VPS waits the specified period of time for
a second digit to be dialed. If the time period expires without a
second digit being entered, the system assumes the caller has
selected a menu choice. Use this parameter only if "Call
Transfer Anytime" is set to "Extn." or "Mbx".
a-f, o
(c)
*See the following
"Keypad
Assignment".
Specifies how to handle a call when there is no response to the
menu message. No response usually indicates that the caller
is using a rotary phone. The factory setting is "C. Operator",
which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an
operator after message playback.
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-15
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Keypad
Assignment
0-9, , #
a-o
( : d, 0: c
Others: None)
Description/Function
Any of the 15 services listed below (a-o) can be assigned to
the 0 through 9, , and # keys on the telephone keypad.
Callers are able to access these services by pressing the
corresponding keys on their telephones.
(a) Transfer to Mailbox—Allows the caller to leave messages
in a specific mailbox. Enter "a" followed by a mailbox
number.
(b) Transfer to Extension—Transfers the caller to a specific
extension. Enter "b" followed by an extension number.
(c) Operator—Connects the caller to the operator.
(d) Exit—Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and
disconnects the caller. The Message Manager is
responsible for recording this prompt.
(e) Previous Menu—If programmed, returns the caller to the
previous menu.
(f) Custom Service—If programmed, transfers the caller to
another Custom Service.
(g) Voice Mail Service—Allows the caller to access Voice
Mail Service.
(h) Call Transfer Service—Allows the caller to access
Automated Attendant Service.
(i) Subscriber Service—Allows the caller to access
Subscriber Service. If this option is enabled, it is strongly
recommended that each subscriber establish a
password; this will prevent unauthorized callers from
accidentally or intentionally accessing subscribers’
mailboxes.
(j) Department Dialing—Transfers the caller to the
Department Dialing menu.
(k) Dial by Name—Requests the caller to enter the first 3 or
4 letters of a last name of the person they wish to reach,
then transfers him to the corresponding extension.
(l) Repeat Menu—Repeats the Custom Service menu
prompts.
(m) Main Menu—Returns the caller to the Custom Service
top menu.
(n) FAX Transfer—Allows the caller to send fax messages to
an extension specified as the fax extension.
(o) Transfer to Outside—Transfers the caller to a specific
outside line. Enter "o" followed by the PBX CO line
access code (e.g., "9") then the destination outside
telephone number.
Installation Manual
293
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
B5.3
Intelligent Call Handling
Caller ID Call Routing
Up to 200 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired
destination. The VPS automatically forwards calls from the assigned Caller ID numbers to a
programmed extension, mailbox (including System Group Distribution List) or Custom
Service. It also forwards "Private" (the caller’s number is not received) and "Out of Area" calls
to a desired extension, mailbox or Custom Service.
The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature.
Services have this order of priority:
Toll Saver > Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk
Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver has the highest priority.)
To access the menu for Caller ID Call Routing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1
Caller ID Call Routing-Enter
To access the menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Enter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1-1-Caller ID List No.(1-200)
Table B-16
294
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No.
P, O or
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0,
(None)
Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies
automatic forwarding to a desired destination. " "
substitutes any number (=wild card). For example, to
route all calls from Area Code 201, enter "201
".
To have a "Private" call automatically forwarded to a
desired destination, enter "P".
For an "Out of Area" call, enter "O".
Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-16
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 20
characters
(None)
Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID number.
Any ASCII character (except "\") can be used.
Custom/Extn./
Mbx/None
(None)
Specifies the destination to which the call from an
assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded.
Call Transfer can be set for each Time Service period—
Day, Night, Lunch, and Break. The "Custom" setting
(enter "C") forwards callers to the specified Custom
Service menu. The "Extn." setting (enter "E") forwards
callers to the specified extension. The "Mbx" setting
(enter "M") enables callers to leave messages in the
specified mailbox. A System Group Distribution List
number can be specified here instead of a mailbox
number.
Call
Transfer
(Day/Night/
Lunch/
Break)
Note
When nothing is registered in this parameter but the
caller’s name is transmitted from the Central Office,
the name will be automatically registered in this
parameter. When this is done, an asterisk " " will
appear with the Call Transfer parameter if "PUTD" is
enabled. See 7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display
(PUTD) for more information. For example, you
might see this: "Custom 3 ". This indicates the
name was automatically registered in the VPS.
Caller ID Call Routing-Delete
Permits specified Caller ID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
To access the menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Delete, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1-2-Caller ID List No.(1-200)
Caller ID Call Routing-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the menu for Caller ID Call Routing-Listing, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-1-3
Installation Manual
295
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
DID Call Routing
Up to 200 DID numbers can be assigned to be automatically forwarded to a desired
destination. The VPS automatically forwards calls from the assigned DID numbers to a
programmed extension, mailbox (including System Group Distribution List) or Custom
Service.
The company greetings will not play for calls forwarded by this feature.
Note
This feature is only available when the VPS is connected to the following PBXs with
DPT Integration.
•
KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
•
KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
•
KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
Services have this order of priority:
Toll Saver > Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk
Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver has the highest priority.)
To access the menu for DID Call Routing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2
DID Call Routing-Enter
To access the menu for DID Call Routing-Enter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2-1-DID List No.(1-200)
Table B-17
296
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
DID Number
Up to 20 digits
consisting of 1-9,
0,
(None)
Assigns the telephone number to which the VPS applies
automatic forwarding to a desired destination. " "
substitutes any number (=wild card). For example, to
route all calls from Area Code 201, enter "201
".
Installation Manual
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
Table B-17
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Description
Up to 20
characters
(None)
Enters a name and/or description of the DID number. Any
ASCII character (except "\") can be used.
Custom/Extn./
Mbx
(None)
Specifies the destination to which the call from an
assigned DID number is automatically forwarded. Call
Transfer can be set for each Time Service period—Day,
Night, Lunch, and Break. The "Custom" setting (enter
"C") forwards callers to the specified Custom Service
menu. The "Extn." setting (enter "E") forwards callers to
the specified extension. The "Mbx" setting (enter "M")
enables callers to leave messages in the specified
mailbox. A System Group Distribution List number can be
specified here instead of a mailbox number.
Call
Transfer
(Day/Night/
Lunch/
Break)
Note
When nothing is registered in this parameter but the
caller’s name is transmitted from the Central Office,
the name will be automatically registered in this
parameter. When this is done, an asterisk " " will
appear with the Call Transfer parameter if "PUTD" is
enabled. See 7.2.19 Touchtone Information Display
(PUTD) for more information. For example, you
might see this: "Custom 3 ". This indicates the
name was automatically registered in the VPS.
DID Call Routing-Delete
Permits specified DID List numbers to be deleted from the list.
To access the menu for DID Call Routing-Delete, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2-2-DID List No.(1-200)
DID Call Routing-Listing
Displays all DID List numbers.
To access the menu for DID Call Routing-Listing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-3-2-3
Installation Manual
297
B5 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SERVICE SETTINGS
B5.4
Toll Saver
This feature permits a subscriber to check his mailbox from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers
or by dialing a pre-assigned DID number without incurring telephone charges. When called
from the assigned number, the VPS notifies the subscriber whether or not there is a new
message in his mailbox by changing the delayed answer time (see Table B-18). The
subscriber can reduce his telephone charges by entering his mailbox only when there is a new
message. If this feature is activated, the subscriber will access his mailbox directly.
Note
DID number setting for this feature is only available when the VPS is connected to the
following PBXs with DPT Integration.
•
KX-TD816 (P311Q or higher)
•
KX-TD1232 (P211Q or higher)
•
KX-TD500 (V4M or higher)
To access the menu for Toll Saver Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-4-4
Table B-18
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Delayed
Answer Time
for New
Message
5-60 s
(12)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) before the
subscriber accesses a mailbox that has new
messages.
Delayed
Answer Time
for No New
Message
5-60 s
(24)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) before the
subscriber accesses a mailbox that has no new
messages.
Note
The Delayed Answer Time specified for Toll Saver has higher priority than the one
specified for the Port/Trunk Service.
298
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM
PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.1
System Group Assignment
To access the menu for System Group Assignment, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1
System Group Assignment-Mailbox Group
This parameter allows a caller to send a message simultaneously to several mailboxes. These
mailboxes may be assembled into a list called a System Group Distribution List. The VPS is
able to maintain up to 20 System Group Distribution Lists. Each list can have up to 20
destination mailbox numbers. Mailboxes can be added to or deleted from these lists and
reviewed as needed.
To access the menu for Mailbox Group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1
Mailbox Group-Enter
To access the menu for Mailbox Group-Enter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-1-Group List No.
Table B-19
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies any vacant mailbox number. The caller can
specify that the VPS transfers or delivers messages to all
members of a group by simply specifying the System
Group Distribution List No.
Group Name
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
Member 1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Group List
No.
Specifies mailbox numbers belonging to this group.
Installation Manual
299
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Mailbox Group-Delete
Deletes specified mailboxes from the list.
To access the menu for Mailbox Group-Delete, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-2-Group List No.
Mailbox Group-Listing
Displays all System Group Distribution List numbers.
To access the menu for Mailbox Group-Listing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-1-3
System Group Assignment-Extension Group
You can assemble several extensions into a single list. The VPS is able to maintain up to 20
Extension Group Lists. Each list can support up to 20 extensions. You can add, delete, and
review the extensions. Members within a list are able to share the same mailbox and be
notified by the Message Waiting Notification—Lamp feature (if authorized) when a message
is present.
Extension Group-Enter
To access the menu for Extension Group-Enter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-1-Group List No.
Table B-20
Parameter
Group List
No.
Group Name
300
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
2-5 digits
(None)
Up to 16
characters
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies any vacant extension number.
Note
The Extension Group List number can be assigned
as "The Extension of the Owner" of a mailbox. This
permits all group members to share the information
in the mailbox.
Specifies a group name. If a group name is not required,
press RETURN, and specify the mailbox numbers.
Any alphanumeric character and [(space)] can be used.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-20
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Member 1-20
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the extension number belonging to the group.
Note
Members cannot have a personal mailbox.
Extension Group-Delete
Deletes specified extensions from the list.
To access the menu for Extension Group-Delete, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-2-Group List No.
Extension Group-Listing
Displays all Extension Group List numbers.
To access the menu for Extension Group List Numbers, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-1-2-3
Installation Manual
301
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.2
Time Service
To access the menu for Time Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2
Time Service-Service Mode
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day/Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Administrator
or the System Manager can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
To access the menu for Time Service-Service Mode for the selected time group,
follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-1
Table B-21
Parameter
Service
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. Automatic
Mode
2. Manual Day
Mode
3. Manual
Night Mode
4. Manual
Lunch Mode
5. Manual
Break Mode
6. PBX Control
Mode
(Automatic
Mode)
Description/Function
Assigns a specific Service Mode. There are 6 options
available:
1. Automatic Mode—Operates according to the setting in
the Time Service.
2. Manual Day Mode—Operates only in Day Mode.
3. Manual Night Mode—Operates only in Night Mode.
4. Manual Lunch Mode—Operates only in Lunch Mode.
5. Manual Break Mode—Operates only in Break Mode.
6. PBX Control Mode—Operation changes depending
on PBX time period.
Note
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is
retained unless the System Manager or System
Administrator changes it again, even after the power
is cut and restored.
PBX Control Mode is available only if APT/DPT
Integration is activated with a Panasonic KX-TA624 or
other KX-T series telephone system. If PBX Control
Mode does not function after it has been selected, the
VPS will operate in Automatic Mode.
302
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
In Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Toll Saver > Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing >DID Call Routing > Trunk
Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver has the highest priority.)
In Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), services have this order of priority:
Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver and Holiday Service are disregarded.)
Time Service-Time Service
Time Service is a timer function that selects the desired call handling method based upon time
of day: Day, Night, Lunch and Break Services are available.
Night Service can be assigned within Day Service parameters; Night Service starts when Day
Service ends, and ends when Day Service starts. There are 3 periods for Break Service:
Break 1 Service, Break 2 Service and Break 3 Service.
In each Time Service period, the parameters for Port Service, Trunk Group Service and
Operator’s Parameters can be specified differently.
Note
Break Service and Lunch Service are only available when they are in Day Service period.
If Break 3 Service is out of Day Service period, for example, Break 3 Service does not
work.
To access the menu for Time Service-Time Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2
Time Service-Day Service
To access the menu for Day Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-1
Table B-22
Parameter
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Day Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m. Day Mode: Day Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
Night Mode: Night Mode in effect around the clock (24 h)
D: Day Mode
N: Night Mode
(9:00 AM-5:00 PM)
Installation Manual
303
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Time Service-Lunch Service
To access the menu for Lunch Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-2
Table B-23
Parameter
Mon
(Start/End)
|
Sun
(Start/End)
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Lunch
Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m.
(None)
Time Service-Break Service
To access the menu for Break Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-2-2-3
Table B-24
Parameter
Mon
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
|
Sun
Break 1 Service
Break 2 Service
Break 3 Service
(Start/End)
304
Installation Manual
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-12: h
Specifies the "Start" and "End" times of the Break
Service.
00-59: min
AM/PM: a.m./p.m. Note
(None)
When Break Service periods overlap Lunch
Service period, Lunch Service has priority.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.3
Holiday Setting
You can program special settings for up to 20 Holiday Services. On the day(s) specified as
holiday(s), settings in this parameter have priority over settings for Trunk Service, Port Service
and Caller ID Call Routing.
When setting specific day(s) as holiday(s), you have the following 2 options:
•
The first option is to specify a single day on which to enable the Holiday Service
setting. For example, you can specify the New Year’s Day as a holiday.
•
The second option is to specify a range of days to enable the Holiday Service setting
on all days within the specified range. For example, you can specify the start and the
end dates of your Christmas vacation.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap. For example, if you have set Dec. 22nd to Jan. 6th as holidays,
you cannot set Jan. 1st as a holiday.
To provide a special message to callers on a holiday (for example, "Today is New Year’s Day
and our office is closed. If you wish to record a message, please press 1 now".), you can create
a Custom Service menu. Use this setting to direct calls to this Custom Service on Jan. 1st.
Use foreign languages where appropriate.
To access the menu for Holiday Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3
Holiday Setting-Enter
To access the menu for Holiday Setting-Enter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-1-Holiday No.(1-20)
Table B-25
Parameter
Name of
Holiday
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Up to 16 characters For reference. Any alphanumeric character, and
(None)
[(space)], [-], [.] and [’] can be used.
Installation Manual
305
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-25
Parameter
Date
Value Range
(Default)
MM/DD-MM/DD
or
MM/DD
(MM: Month
DD: Day)
(None)
Description/Function
Specifies the day or the range of days on which to
enable Holiday Service setting.
•
•
If you want to set a single day as a holiday, specify
only one date.
If you want to set a range of days as holidays,
specify both the start and the end dates of the
range.
Note
Holidays cannot overlap.
Retain
Holiday
1. Yes
2. No
(No)
Stores the Holiday Service setting for future use. If set
to "Yes", the same setting will be activated
automatically on the same day every year. If set to
"No", the setting will be canceled automatically after
the holiday is over.
Service
1. Voice Mail
2. Auto. Attn.
3. Interview
4. Custom
(Auto. Attn.)
Specifies one of 4 incoming call services for the
holiday.
Note
When Interview Service is specified, one of
Subscriber’s Interview Mailbox numbers should
also be specified. When the Custom Service is
specified, one of Custom Service numbers (1100) should also be specified.
1-32
Specifies the Company Greeting to be played on the
Company
Greeting No. S: System Greeting holiday.
N: None
(None)
Port Affected
Port No.
(1-2)
The System Greeting is: "Good Morning/Afternoon/
Evening. Welcome to the Voice Processing System".
(However, the Message Manager can change this.)
Specifies the port number on which the Holiday
Service setting is activated. The unspecified ports
provide the usual incoming call service.
Note
Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
Trunk
Affected
Trunk No.
(1-48)
Specifies the trunk (CO line) number on which the
Holiday Service setting is activated. The unspecified
trunks (CO lines) provide the usual incoming call
service.
Note
Pressing [(back space)] will clear the parameter.
306
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Holiday Setting-Delete
Cancels the Holiday Service Setting by specifying a holiday number (1-20).
To access the menu for Holiday Setting-Delete, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-2
Holiday Setting-Listing
Displays all of the specified holiday names and dates.
To access the menu for Holiday Setting-Listing, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-3-3
B6.4
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Adjusts the internal clock of the VPS to the starting and ending date of daylight saving time.
To access the menu for Daylight Saving Time, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-4
Table B-26
Parameter
Start Date/
End Date
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
MM: Month
DD: Day
(None)
Specifies the starting and ending dates of daylight
saving time. The VPS advances 1 h on the starting
date of daylight saving time, and restores the time on
the ending date. Both the starting date and the ending
date must be set. The same date cannot be used for
both settings.
WARNING
Time Synchronization (see 7.2.4 Set Time
(TIME)) overrides the DST setting of the
VPS.
Installation Manual
307
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Note
The VPS changes to and from DST at 2:00 AM. According to current U.S. guidelines, in
most of the United States, DST begins at 2:00 AM on the first Sunday in April and ends
at 2:00 AM on the last Sunday in October.
B6.5
Prompt Setting
This setting is required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
To access the menu for Prompt Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-5
Table B-27
Parameter
System
Prompt
Selection
Number
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-9
(None)
Assigns a selection number (1-9) to each prompt. Callers
use the numbers to select the desired language for their
message prompts. This setting is required when either
one or both of the following parameters are set to
"Selective".
User 1
Prompt
Selection
Number
Port Assignment—Incoming Call Service Prompt
Authorization of External Message Delivery—Prompt
Mode
User 2
Prompt
Selection
Number
Example:
For service in English, press (7).
For service in French, press (8).
For service in Chinese, press (9).
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this
Multilingual Selection Menu.
Note
The Prompt Selection Number should not match the
first digit of any mailbox number, because mailbox/
extension access is possible during and after the
Multilingual Selection Menu.
308
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-27
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 1
Prompt
1. Before
2. After
3. 24-h
(After)
This parameter setting is functional only when User 1 or
User 2 Prompts are in use. This parameter specifies the
following:
Position of
"AM/PM" in
Time Stamp
for User 2
Prompt
1. Before
2. After
3. 24-h
(24-h)
1. Before—the VPS announces "AM/PM" before the time
(e.g., P.M. 3:42).
2. After—The VPS announces "AM/PM" after the time
(e.g., 3:42 P.M.).
3. 24-h—the VPS announces the time in 24-h format
(e.g., 15:42).
Note
When System Prompts are in use, the parameter is
set to "After".
Installation Manual
309
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
B6.6
System Caller Name Announcement
Up to 120 Caller ID numbers can be assigned to announce prerecorded Caller ID caller names
when extension users listen to messages from the assigned numbers left in their mailbox.
Extension users can also hear caller names when the VPS forwards calls from the assigned
numbers to them (Caller ID Screening). The recorded caller names will also play when the
callers use the Intercom Paging features; the recorded names will be added to the end of the
page.
The Caller ID Screening feature is enabled or disabled in the COS (Class of Service) settings.
This feature is also enabled by selecting "Call Screening" in 4.1 Call Transfer Status in the
Subscriber’s Guide.
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" in 4.1 Call Transfer
Status, and/or in 4.3 Incomplete Call Handling Status in the Subscriber’s Guide.
The Message Manager is responsible for recording System Caller Names.
To access the menu for System Caller Name Announcement, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6
System Caller Name Announcement-Enter
To access the menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Enter, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-1-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
Table B-28
Parameter
310
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Caller ID No.
Up to 20 digits
Assigns the telephone number for which the VPS
consisting of 1-9, 0 announces prerecorded caller name to extension
users.
(None)
Description
Up to 20 characters Enters a name and/or description of the Caller ID
(None)
number. Any ASCII character (except \) can be used.
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
System Caller Name Announcement-Delete
Deletes specified Caller ID List numbers from the list.
To access the menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Delete, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-2-Caller ID List No.(1-120)
System Caller Name Announcement-Listing
Displays all Caller ID List numbers.
To access the menu for System Caller Name Announcement-Listing, follow the
menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-6-3
B6.7
System Security
This setting is required for improving the system security.
To access the menu for System Security, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-7
Table B-29
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
1: Disable
System
2: Enable
Manager
(Disable)
Access
from
Telephone
Description/Function
Enables/disables access to the VPS from the System
Manager’s telephone.
Note
The System Administrator will be asked to set a
System Manager password if both of the following
conditions are met:
•
The System Administrator changes this
parameter from "Disable" to "Enable".
•
The System Manager password has not been set
previously.
The password must be entered twice for verification.
Installation Manual
311
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-29
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1: Disable
Message
2: Enable
Manager
(Disable)
Access
from
Telephone
Enables/disables access to the VPS from the Message
Manager’s telephone.
1: No
Default
Password 2: Yes
(No)
for
Subscriber
Defines whether or not the VPS sets a default password to
Subscribers’ Mailboxes when they are created. The default
password depends on the setting in the following "Default
Password Format" parameter.
Note
The System Administrator will be asked to set a
Message Manager password if both of the following
conditions are met:
•
The System Administrator changes this
parameter from "Disable" to "Enable".
•
The Message Manager password has not been
set previously.
The password must be entered twice for verification.
Note
Even if this parameter is changed from "No" to "Yes", a
new default password will not be set to already-created
mailboxes. Pre-assigned passwords remain valid.
The password can be changed in the following ways:
•
Subscribers can change or clear the default
password for their mailboxes within Subscriber
Service.
•
The System Administrator or the System Manager
can reset the password.
After the password is reset, the conditions will be
as follows:
<Subscribers’ Mailboxes>
If this parameter is set to "Yes", the password will
be initialized to the default password. If this
parameter is set to "No", the password will be
cleared.
<Managers’ Mailboxes>
The password is initialized to "No password".
When the System Manager’s password is reset,
the "System Manager Access from Telephone"
parameter will automatically change to "Disable".
When the Message Manager’s password is reset,
the "Message Manager Access from Telephone"
parameter will automatically change to "Disable".
312
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-29
Parameter
Default
Password
Format
B6.8
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1: 1+Mailbox No.
2: 2+Mailbox No.
3: 3+Mailbox No.
4: 4+Mailbox No.
5: 5+Mailbox No.
6: 6+Mailbox No.
7: 7+Mailbox No.
8: 8+Mailbox No.
9: 9+Mailbox No.
0: Mailbox No.
(Mailbox No.)
Defines the password format. This parameter is effective
only when the previous "Default Password for Subscriber"
parameter is set to "Yes".
Example:
Default Password Format = 5 + Mailbox No.
New Mailbox No. = 123
New Mailbox Default Password = 5123
The new mailbox’s password is automatically set to the
default.
Other Parameters
To access the menu for Other Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8
Other Parameters-Extension Numbering Plan
Specifies the extension numbers of the PBX so that the VPS is able to recognize the dialed
extension as valid. This setting promotes the call handling of the Automated Attendant
Service. We recommend that this parameter be set for better integration with the PBX.
To access the menu for Extension Numbering Plan, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-1
Installation Manual
313
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-30
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Numbering
Plan 1-16
2-5 digits
consisting
of 0-9, X
(Numbering
Plan
1: 1XX;
Numbering Plan
2-16: None)
Description/Function
Specifies the first 1 or 2 digits of the PBX extension
numbers. You can add up to 16 entries to the list. Each
entry can contain 2-5 digits "0-9", and a letter "X" which
matches any digit. Extension numbers cannot begin with
"0".
Examples:
a) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 101
through 164 and 201 through 264, specify the numbers
as follows:
1XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "1".
2XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
with "2".
b) If valid PBX extension numbers are to be specified 400
through 450 and 3300 through 3399, specify the
numbers as follows:
4XX: Indicates any 3-digit extension number starting
"4".
33XX: Indicates any 4-digit extension starting "33".
Note
Auto Configuration will set this parameter
automatically.
The Automated Attendant will dial any 2-5 digit PBX
extension number (except numbers beginning with "0")
whether valid or not. If the dialed number is included in the
numbering plan, the Automated Attendant will immediately
send it to the PBX without waiting for further input. If not, the
Automated Attendant will wait until the dialed number is
recognized as an extension number, the internal inter-digit
timer expires, or the caller dials 5 digits.
If the number for an outgoing call is not found on the
Numbering Plan, the VPS will consider it an outside
number. The VPS will then attempt to dial it using the
"Outgoing Call Setup Sequence".
Other Parameters-Dialing Parameter
To access the menu for Dialing Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-2
314
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-31
Parameter
Number of
Digits to
Access
Outside Line
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
0-8 digits
(1)
Specifies the number of digits necessary to access an
outside (CO) line.
Example:
If the PBX requires callers to dial "9" to access an
outside (CO) line, this parameter should be set as "1".
This enables the system to recognize that an outgoing
call setup sequence is completed once the initial "9" has
been dialed (9-123-4567). The full sequence is
therefore: 9-(outgoing call setup sequence)-123-4567.
The VPS can discriminate between local and long
distance calls and can report outgoing calls and calling
times for billing purposes on periodic port usage
reports.
Call Transfer
No Answer
Time
10-60 s
(20)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before retrieving the transferred call when there is no
answer at the destination extension.
Note
Make sure that the duration of Call Transfer No
Answer Time is longer than the duration of Call
Forwarding No Answer Time at the PBX.
Otherwise, the PBX may forward the call
(transferred by the VPS) immediately to its
destination without leaving enough time to answer
the call.
Outgoing Call
No Answer
Time
Pause Time
10-90 s
(30)
1-9 s
(2)
Specifies the length of time that the VPS must wait
before concluding that there is no answer at the outside
number called.
Specifies the pause time between dialed digits.
Installation Manual
315
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-31
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing Call
Setup
Sequence
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #, F, R,
S, T, W
(T)
Specifies the sequence of codes used by the VPS when
calling a CO line. You can set up to 12 digits. The default
value is "T". "T" indicates that the system will dial the
telephone number only after detecting a dial tone.
Example:
9W = (9) - 1-s wait - dial telephone number. "9" is the CO
line access number.
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Other Parameters-Message Waiting Notification
Controls the handling of message waiting notification calls.
To access the menu for Message Waiting Notification Parameter, follow the menu
path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-3
Table B-32
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Outgoing
Call Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Device feature. The VPS makes outgoing
calls using the port specified in this parameter. At least 1
port must be specified.
Message
Waiting
Lamp Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the Message Waiting
Notification Lamp feature.
The VPS turns on the Message Waiting Lamp of the
extension using the port specified in this parameter. At
least 1 port must be specified.
316
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-32
Parameter
Message
Waiting
Lamp for
Every
Message
Value Range
(Default)
1. No
2. Yes
(Yes)
Description/Function
If set to "Yes", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp of the extension each time a new message is
recorded in the mailbox. This will occur even if the
Message Waiting Lamp was not turned off from a
previous message. This setting is useful when the first
attempt is unsuccessful.
If set to "No", the VPS will turn on the Message Waiting
Lamp for the first message only. The VPS will not turn on
the lamp for subsequent messages until the subscriber
has accessed the VPS to retrieve the messages stored
there.
Max. Digits
for Callback
No.
1-48 digits
(20)
Specifies the maximum number of digits the caller can
enter as a callback number. This number will display on
beepers if the "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is
enabled.
Callback No.
Entry
Interdigit
Time-Out
1-10 s
(5)
Sets the maximum allowable time between each digit on
Beeper Callback No. Entry. If the caller does not enter any
digits within the specified time, the VPS will not accept
entry of any additional digits.
System
Callback No.
Up to 32 digits
(None)
Specifies a telephone number that will display on the
subscriber’s beeper as a callback number. The callback
number entry mode "X" must be included in the telephone
number.
Note
If "Beeper Callback No. Entry Mode" is enabled
through COS, the callback number entered by the
caller will display on the destination beeper.
However, if the caller fails to enter a callback number,
the System Callback No. will display instead.
Installation Manual
317
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Other Parameters-External Message Delivery
Controls the handling of External Message Delivery calls.
To access the menu for External Message Delivery, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-4
Table B-33
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Retry Times
0-9 times
(3)
Specifies the number of times to attempt an external
message delivery call when the destination is busy or if
there is no answer.
Busy Delay
1-60 min
(3)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS must wait
after a busy condition is received before trying to deliver
the message again.
No Answer
Delay
60-120 min
(60)
Specifies the length of time in minutes the VPS is to wait
after a no answer condition is received before trying to
deliver the message again.
Outgoing
Call Ports
Port No.
(1-2)
Specifies the port numbers used for the External Message
Delivery feature.
Message
Length
1-6 min
(3)
Specifies the allowable message length of external
delivery messages that the subscriber can record.
1-100 msgs
(3)
Specifies the maximum number of external delivery
messages that can be stored in 1 mailbox.
Max.
Messages
for
Mailboxes
System
External
Message
Delivery
Duration
Time
Callback
Telephone
No.
318
Installation Manual
1-9 min
(3)
Description/Function
Specifies the maximum telephone connect time allowed for
an external message delivery call to prevent excessive
telephone charges. Time begins counting when the
destination number answers the call. The VPS terminates
the call when it exceeds the specified length of time.
However, the VPS does not terminate a call until the whole
message is played even though the specified time expires.
Up to 32 digits Specifies the Callback Telephone Number. When the
(None)
recipient has failed to retrieve the sender’s message
because of incorrect password entries, the VPS
announces the Callback Telephone Number for him to call
in order to retrieve it.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Other Parameters-Call Hold
To access the menu for Call Hold, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-5
Table B-34
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Call Hold Mode 1. Disable
2. Enable
(Enable)
1. Disable
Call Queuing
Announcement 2. Enable
(Enable)
Mode
Call Retrieval
Announcement
Timing
Redialing
Cancel Timing
1-30 s
(2)
1. 15 s
2. 30 s
3. 45 s
4. 60 s
(30)
Description/Function
If set to "Enable", the VPS gives callers the option of
either holding for a specific extension or selecting one
of several Incomplete Call Handling service options.
While on hold, the VPS periodically gives callers the
choice to either continue to hold or select one of the
Incomplete Call Handling service options.
If set to "Disable", the VPS immediately offers callers
the Incomplete Call Handling service.
If set to "Enable", callers on hold are informed of their
current position in the call hold queue.
Example:
"One other person is waiting to connect".
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
message that asks whether or not calls are to be
retrieved during call holding.
Example:
"To cancel holding, press 2 now.
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again".
Specifies the interval between the voice guidance
messages that ask if continuous redials are to be
attempted during call holding.
Example:
"To continue holding, press 1.
Otherwise, press 2".
Other Parameters-Rotary Telephone Service
Specifies how to treat callers who are calling from rotary telephones (unable to input touchtone
signals) or who are unable to properly respond to VPS guidance.
To access the menu for Rotary Telephone Service, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-6
Installation Manual
319
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-35
Parameter
Rotary
Telephone
Call
Coverage
(Day/Night/
Lunch/
Break)
Value Range
(Default)
G: G. D. M
O: Operator
E: Extn.
M: Mbx.
(G. D. M.)
Description/Function
Defines how the VPS treats calls received from rotary
telephones or calls from callers that are unfamiliar with
the VPS operation in the Voice Mail Service.
G.D.M: General Delivery Mailbox.
O: Operator
E: Extension (Enter "E" followed by an extension
number.)
M: Mailbox (Enter "M" followed by a mailbox number.)
Other Parameters-Intercom Paging Parameter
Intercom Paging is a PBX feature that makes it possible to page the caller’s party through
telephone speakers. To utilize this feature, the PBX must have the Intercom Paging feature
available and the VPS must be properly programmed. This feature is available for APT/DPT
Integration mode only.
To access the menu for Intercom Paging Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-7
Table B-36
Parameter
320
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Intercom
Paging
Sequence
Up to 12 digits con- Specifies the intercom paging sequence required
sisting of 0-9, , # by the PBX. This can be programmed using up to
and special codes 12 of the following 8 letters and 12 dial codes.
(FXW)
D: Disconnecting
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Pager Dialing
A: Answer
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
Release for
Intercom
Paging
Up to 12 digits consisting of 0-9, , #
and special codes
(FW)
Installation Manual
Specifies the intercom paging release code
required by the PBX. This can be programmed
using up to 12 of the 8 letters and 12 dial codes as
specified above.
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-36
Parameter
No Answer
Time for
Intercom
Paging
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-30 s
(5)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS
must wait before concluding Intercom Paging when
there is no answer.
The VPS will return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer expires.
Announcement
Repeat Cycle
1-3 times
(1)
Specifies the number of times to announce the
intercom page.
Example:
"I have a call for (mailbox owner’s name)".
Intercom
Paging Retry
1-10 times
(2)
Specifies the number of times to retry paging when
the paging destination is busy or if there is no
answer.
Note
This setting applies only when the subscriber
has enabled "Intercom Paging" in Incomplete
Call Handling Status.
Paging Code
for Group 1-16
Paging Code
for All Groups
Specifies the intercom paging access code
Up to 12 digits
required by the PBX.
consisting of
0-9, ,# for each
Note
group
The Intercom Paging Group Number available
(Group 1-8:
for each subscriber is determined on a COS331-338;
by-COS basis.
All Groups
[Group 17]: 33 )
Other Parameters-Fax Management
You can program the VPS to automatically forward incoming fax calls to a fax extension. You
can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for the Automatic Fax Transfer.
If the main fax extension is not available to receive a fax, the VPS will forward the fax
transmission to the alternate fax extension.
To access the menu for Fax Management, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-8
Installation Manual
321
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-37
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1: Disable
Automatic
2: Enable
Transfer of
(Disable)
Incoming Fax
Call
Enables or disables the Automatic Transfer of Incoming
Fax Call Service.
Main Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the main fax extension number.
Alternate Fax
Extension No.
2-5 digits
(None)
Specifies the alternate fax extension number. When the
main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the
specified "Fax No Answer Time", the VPS forwards the
fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Fax No
Answer Time
5-60 s
(10)
Specifies the length of time (in seconds) the VPS must
wait before taking other action when there is no answer at
either fax extension.
Note
Automatic detection works for only the first 30s.
Note
This timer applies to the fax call that has been
transferred to the main or alternate fax extension.
Fax Manager
Mailbox No.
Fax No
Answer
Coverage
Mode
2-5 digits
(None)
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
Specifies the Fax Manager Mailbox Number. The VPS
will notify the fax manager of the status of fax calls
depending upon the settings of the "Fax No Answer
Coverage Mode" and "Fax Notification Mode"
parameters.
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager’s mailbox.
Example: "The FAX transfer situation is as follows. One
attempt was no answer".
1. If set to "Ext", the VPS will call the Fax Manager’s
extension to specify the number of unanswered fax
calls received.
2. If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
unanswered fax calls in the Fax Manager’s mailbox.
3. If set to "No", the VPS will take no action concerning
unanswered fax calls.
322
Installation Manual
B6 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTINGS
Table B-37
Parameter
Fax
Notification
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. No
2. Mbx
3. Ext
(No)
Description/Function
If set to "Mbx", the VPS will leave the number of
successfully received fax calls in the Fax Manager’s
mailbox.
Example: "You have 1 FAX message".
1. If set to "Ext", after a fax extension successfully
receives a fax call, the VPS will automatically call the
Fax Manager’s extension and play a voice prompt:
"You have 1 FAX message". The VPS will also leave
the total number of received fax calls in the Fax
Manager’s mailbox.
2. If set to "No", the VPS will not take any action
concerning successfully received fax calls.
Other Parameters-Disconnect Parameter
To access the menu for Disconnect Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-5-8-9
Table B-38
Parameter
Maximum
Silence
Time
Value Range
(Default)
5-60 s
(10)
Description/Function
When silence is detected for this amount of time in
seconds, the VPS disconnects the call.
Installation Manual
323
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
B7
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE
SETTINGS
For System Administration (system setup, mailbox setup, and system diagnosis), an RS-232C
terminal must be connected to the serial interface of the VPS.
To access the menu for Hardware Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6
B7.1
RS-232C Parameters
To access the menu for RS-232C Parameter, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-1
Table B-39
Parameter
324
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Baud Rate
1. 300 bps
2. 600 bps
3. 1200 bps
4. 2400 bps
5. 4800 bps
6. 9600 bps
7. 19200 bps
8. 38400 bps
(9600)
Specifies the speed at which the data is transferred in
bits per second.
Word Bit
Length
1. 7 bits
2. 8 bits
(8 bits)
Defines the number of bits in each byte or character.
Parity
1. None
2. Odd
3. Even
(None)
Specifies the parity to use for error detection.
Stop Bit
Length
1. 1 bit
2. 2 bits
(1 bit)
Specifies the number of bits used to signify the end of
the byte.
Installation Manual
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
B7.2
Port Setting
To access the menu for Port Setting, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2
Port Setting Menu
To access the menu Port Setting Menu for the selected port, follow the menu path
as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-2-Port No.(1-2)
Note
The maximum number of ports depends on the VPS model.
Table B-40
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Flash Time
1. 100 ms
2. 300 ms
3. 600 ms
4. 900 ms
(600)
Specifies the length of time the hook switch must be
pressed before the PBX will recognize it as a flash hook
signal. See the PBX manual to determine the correct
value.
CPC Signal
1. None
2. 6.5 ms
3. 150 ms
4. 300 ms
5. 450 ms
6. 600 ms
(None)
Specifies the minimum time necessary to detect an
interruption in the CPC (Calling Party Control) signal
received from the PBX. The VPS is able to determine
that the line has been disconnected when it detects an
interruption of the CPC signal.
Disconnect
Time
Dial Mode
1-8 s
(2)
1. DTMF
2. Pulse 10 pps
3. Pulse 20 pps
(DTMF)
Specifies the length of time the line will temporarily be
unavailable after a call has ended.
Specifies the dial mode for DTMF (touchtone) or Pulse.
If Pulse is specified, pulse speed (10/20 pps) must be
selected.
Note
This setting only affects outward dialing from the
VPS. The VPS can only receive DTMF (touchtone)
signals.
Installation Manual
325
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
B7.3
PBX Interface Parameters
Three separate parameters are used to program the VPS for optimal signaling and
performance with the PBX.
To access the menu for PBX Interface Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3
Dialing Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing
calls, and control message waiting lamps on extensions. The procedure for verifying the
correct code sequences for non-Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems is to manually
execute the sequences from a single line telephone (SLT) with the PBX.
To access the menu for Dialing Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-1
Table B-41
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
PBX Type 1. Other Manufacturers Specifies the type of PBX connected to the VPS. In
2. KXT Series
1. T308/T616
2. T1232
3. T96
4. T336
5. TD816/TD1232/
TA1232
6. TD308
7. TA624
8. TD500
9. TDA/TAW series
(TD816/TD1232/
TA1232)
326
Installation Manual
the case of a Panasonic KX-T series telephone
system, the model number should also be specified.
Note
The Dialing Parameters are set automatically to
each PBX default value after selecting the PBX
type.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-42
KX-T series
PBX Type
Integration
Mode
Other
ManuT308/
facturers T616
None
T1232
T96
T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308/TD500
None
None
None
None
None
Inband
Inband Inband Inband Inband
TDA/TAW
series
TA624
None
*1DPT
Inband
None
*2APT
Inband
*1DPT
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
FXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
FXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
FTXA
FXA
Reconnect
Sequence
on Busy
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
FWW
F
Reconnect
Sequence
on NoAnswer
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
FWW
F
Reconnect
Sequence
on Refused
Call
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
FWW
F
FWW
F
FWW
F
Light-On
Sequence
for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
T701X# T#91X T 9X
T701X
—
T701X
#
—
T 70
1X
—
Light-Off
Sequence
for
Message
Waiting
Lamp
None
N/A
T702X# T#90X
T#9X
T700X
—
T702X
#
—
T 70
0X
—
Call
Waiting
Sequence
None
N/A
N/A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N/A
Installation Manual
327
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-42
KX-T series
PBX Type
Release
Sequence
for Call
Waiting
Other
ManuT308/
facturers T616
None
N/A
T1232
T96
T336
F
N/A
N/A
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308/TD500
F
F
TDA/TAW
series
TA624
F
F
F
F
*1 When your KX-T series telephone system is in DPT Integration mode.
*2 When your KX-TA624 telephone system is in APT Integration mode.
N/A Not available
— Not needed
Table B-43
Parameter
Integration
Mode
Value Range
(Default)
1. None
2. Inband
3. DPT
(DPT)
Description/Function
Specifies the method of integrating the VPS with the
PBX.
1. None—Both PBX and VPS work independently,
without accessing information concerning the status
of the other.
2. Inband—The PBX sends touchtone codes to the
VPS to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
disconnect, etc.). Inband Integration improves the
VPS performance because call state recognition is
faster than with standard call progress tone
detection. The PBX code for each call state must be
set in the Inband Signaling Parameters. If PBX type
is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband
Signaling Parameters will automatically default to the
proper codes. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems:
T1232, TA624, T96, T336, TD816, TD1232, TA1232,
TD500, TD308, and TDA/TAW series.
3. APT—The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
APT interface. This is available only with Panasonic
KX-TA624.
4. DPT—The VPS communicates with the PBX via the
DPT interface. This is available with any of the
following Panasonic KX-T series telephone systems:
TD816, TD1232, TA1232, TD500, TD308, and TDA/
TAW series.
328
Installation Manual
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
To program the following 10 Parameters in the next table, use the Special Commands and Dial
Codes listed below. You can set up to 12 digits for each parameter.
D: Disconnecting
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
X: Extension dialing
A: Answer
1-9, 0,
, #: Dial Codes
Table B-44
Parameter
Operator
Transfer
Sequence
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
Alternate
Extension
Transfer
Sequence
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
(FXA)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to the operator’s extension.
(FXA)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to any extension except the operator’s.
(FXA)
The VPS performs this sequence when transferring calls
to extensions in the Alternate Extension Group.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Busy
(F)
If an extension is busy, this sequence allows the VPS to
reconnect to the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
No Answer
(F)
If the extension does not answer, this sequence allows the
VPS to reconnect with the caller.
Reconnect
Sequence on
Refuse Call
(F)
Light-On
Sequence
for Message
Waiting
Lamp
Light-Off
Sequence
for Message
Waiting
Lamp
The VPS performs this sequence to retrieve a call placed
on hold after the extension (in the Call Screening mode)
has refused to accept it.
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to
enable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
(None)
This is the dialing sequence that the VPS must perform to
disable the Message Waiting Lamp at an extension.
(None)
Installation Manual
329
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-44
Parameter
Call Waiting
Sequence
Release
Sequence
for Call
Waiting
Value Range
(Default)
(1)
Description/Function
The VPS carries out this sequence when performing call
waiting if the extension being called is busy.
The VPS performs this sequence to release call waiting.
(F)
Inband Signaling Parameters
Use these parameters if the PBX sends touchtones to the VPS to indicate the state of a call
(busy, answered, disconnected, etc.). The integration mode must be set to "Inband". If PBX
type is set to a KX-T series telephone system, the Inband Signaling parameters will
automatically default to the proper codes.
To access the menu for Inband Signaling Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-2
The following parameters can be programmed using "0-9", " ", "#", and "A-D".
Table B-45
Parameter
Ringback
Value Range
(Default)
(1)
Indicates "Ringback Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialed is ringing.
(2)
Indicates "Busy Tone". Sent to the VPS when the
extension dialed is busy.
(3)
Indicates "Reorder Tone". Sent to the VPS when an
invalid extension number is dialed or when inadvertently
connected to another VPS.
(4)
Indicates "Do Not Disturb Tone". Sent to the VPS if the
dialed extension has the Do Not Disturb feature enabled.
(5)
Sent to the VPS when the called extension answers the
call.
Forward to
VM Ringing
(6)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is available to
accept the call.
Forward to
VM Busy
(7)
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to a
voice mail port and that voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.
Busy
Reorder
DND
Answer
330
Description/Function
Installation Manual
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-45
Parameter
Forward to
Other
Extension
Confirmation
Disconnect
Value Range
(Default)
(8)
Description/Function
Sent to the VPS if the called extension is forwarded to
another, non-Voice Mail extension.
(9)
Sent to the VPS when it successfully dialed a Message
Waiting Lamp On or Message Waiting Lamp Off Code.
(#9)
Sent to the VPS when the other party goes "on-hook".
Note
Default values in the above table vary depending on the settings of "PBX type" and
"Inband Integration" (PBX Interface Parameters).
Table B-46
KX-T series
Parameter
Other
Manufacturers T308/
T616
T1232
T96
T336
TD816/
TD1232/
TA1232/
TD308/
TD500
TA624
TDA/
TAW
series
Ringback
N/A
N/A
1
A1
A1
1
1
1
Busy
N/A
N/A
2
B1
B1
2
2
2
Reorder
N/A
N/A
3
B2
B2
3
3
3
DND
N/A
N/A
4
B3
B3
4
4
4
Answer
N/A
N/A
5
A2
A2
5
5
5
Forward to
VM Ringing
N/A
N/A
6
C1
C1
6
6
6
Forward to
VM Busy
N/A
N/A
7
C2
C2
7
7
7
Forward to
Other
Extension
N/A
N/A
8
C3
C3
8
8
8
Confirmation
N/A
N/A
9
D1
D1
9
9
9
Disconnect
N/A
N/A
#9
DD
DD
#9
#9
#9
N/A: Not available
Installation Manual
331
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Digit Translation Table Parameters
Use the Digit Translation Table to translate the Follow On ID Signal from the PBX into the
proper codes for the VPS. This translation table is only effective for the incoming signal.
To access the menu for Digit Translation Table Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Inter-Digit Timeout
To access the menu for Inter-Digit Timeout, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-1
Table B-47
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
1-4 s
(1)
Defines the incoming signal interval (Follow on ID). The
Digit Translation Table is translated by a series of signals
received within the specified time period.
Inter-Digit
Timeout
Digit Translation Table Parameters-Input/Output
To access the menu for Input/Output, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-3-2
Table B-48
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Table Input digit
1-8
Up to 8
digits
consisting of
Output
digit
332
Installation Manual
0-9, , #,
A-D, S, K
(None)
Description/Function
Do not assign more than 1 code to an incoming
signal. If this occurs, the system will take the first
assignment.
Note
S: Skip (ignore) the code.
K: Keep the code as it is.
In each table, the number of "K" used for the
Input digit must be the same as the one used for
the Output digit.
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Transfer to Outside Parameters
These parameters specify how the VPS will transfer calls to outside lines from the following
services: Custom Service, Call Transfer Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID
Callback.
To access the menu for Transfer to Outside Parameters, follow the menu path as
shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-4
Transfer to Outside Parameters-Outside Transfer Sequence
To access the menu for Outside Transfer Sequence, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-4-1
Table B-49
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to transfer
Up to 12 digits
Call Transfer
calls to outside lines.
consisting of
to Outside
0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
Sequence
S, W, A, N
(APT/DPT
Integration: FND,
other Integration:
FTND)
Note
The default setting (FND/FTND) includes the
sequence code "D" (Disconnect), which
executes a "blind" transfer. Removing "D" from
the sequence results in a "screened" transfer,
which is only supported with the KX-TD500
(V4M or higher). Therefore, please do not
remove "D" from the sequence unless your PBX
is the KX-TD500 (V4M or higher).
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect
Up to 12 digits
Call Transfer
the line when the transferred party is busy.
consisting
of
to Outside
0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
Reconnect
S, W, A, N
Sequence on
(APT/DPT
Busy
Integration: F,
other Integration:
FWW)
Installation Manual
333
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-49
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect
Up to 12 digits
Call Transfer
the line when the transferred party does not answer.
consisting
of
to Outside
0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
Reconnect
S, W, A, N
Sequence on
(APT/DPT
No Answer
Integration: F,
other Integration:
FWW)
EFA Transfer
Sequence
Up to 12 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
S, W, A, N
(F6TN)
Up to 12 digits
EFA Transfer
consisting of
Reconnect
Sequence on 0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
S, W, A, N
Busy
(F6)
Up to 12 digits
EFA Transfer
consisting of
Reconnect
Sequence on 0-9, , #, D, F, R, T,
S, W, A, N
No Answer
(F6)
334
Installation Manual
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to transfer
calls to outside lines using EFA (External Feature
Access).
Note
The default value is only activated when the
VPS is connected to a default PBX (KXTD1232/KX-TD500/KX-TA624).
For other PBX types, the default value differs
depending on the EFA Transfer Sequence
specified in the PBX. For example, when the
PBX Type is changed to a KX-TDA/KX-TAW
series PBX, the default value becomes
"F 60TN".
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect
the line when the party transferred with EFA
(External Feature Access) is busy.
Note
The default value is only activated when the
VPS is connected to a default PBX (KXTD1232/KX-TD500/KX-TA624).
For other PBX types, the default value differs
depending on the EFA Transfer Sequence
specified in the PBX. For example, when the
PBX Type is changed to a KX-TDA/KX-TAW
series PBX, the default value becomes "F 60".
Specifies the sequence the VPS uses to reconnect
the line when the party transferred with EFA
(External Feature Access) does not answer.
Note
The default value is only activated when the
VPS is connected to a default PBX (KXTD1232/KX-TD500/KX-TA624).
For other PBX types, the default value differs
depending on the EFA Transfer Sequence
specified in the PBX. For example, when the
PBX Type is changed to a KX-TDA/KX-TAW
series PBX, the default value becomes "F 60".
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-49
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
1. Analyze
Outside
2. Guidance
Transfer
Answer Mode (Guidance)
Description/Function
Specifies the answering method the VPS uses to
detect whether the destination party has answered
the transferred outside call.
1. Analyze—the VPS monitors the status of the
outside line, recognizes that the destination party
goes off-hook, and connects the line.
2. Guidance—the VPS plays the following guidance
before connecting the line to the destination
party:
"You have a call. To answer the call, press 1.
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up."
If the destination party presses "1", he will be able to
answer the transferred outside call.
The VPS continues playing this guidance for the time
specified in the Outgoing Call No Answer Time in
Table B-31. If the transferred party does not answer
the call within this time, the VPS considers it as a No
Answer call.
1-9, 0, , #: Dial Codes
D: Disconnect
F: Hook Flash
R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
S: Silence Detection
W: Wait for 1 s
A: Answer
N: Telephone Number
Transfer to Outside Parameters-Trunk Group
To access the menu for Trunk Group, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-4-2-Trunk Group No.(1-48)
Installation Manual
335
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-50
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
EFA Transfer 1. Disable
2. Enable
(Disable)
Caller ID
Callback
1. Disable
2. Enable
(Disable)
Description/Function
Specifies whether or not the VPS uses EFA (External
Feature Access) when transferring an incoming
outside call to an outside line.
If set to "Enable", the VPS transfers an incoming
outside call to an outside line according to the EFA
Transfer Sequence specified in Table B-49. This
parameter is available with DPT Integration only.
If set to "Disable", the VPS transfers an incoming
outside call to an outside line according to the Call
Transfer to Outside Sequence specified in Table B49.
Specifies whether or not the VPS allows a subscriber
to call back the party who left a message in his
mailbox with the Caller ID number sent from the
PBX. This setting applies to the trunk group number
used when the message with the Caller ID number
was left in his mailbox.
Up to 12 digits
Specifies the sequence of outside line access codes
Outside Line
Access
consisting of 0-9, , for Caller ID Callback.
This parameter is available when the VPS executes
#, F, R, T, S, W
Sequence for
Caller ID Callback without using EFA.
(9T)
Caller ID
Callback
Caller ID
Modify Table
(1-4)
1-4
(1)
Specifies the number of the Caller ID Modify Table
that is used when the VPS converts the Caller ID
Number sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Transfer to Outside Parameters-Caller ID Modify Table
To access the menu for Caller ID Modify Table, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-4-3-Table No.(1-4)
Table B-51
336
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Local Area
Code/
International
Code
Up to 6 digits
consisting of 0-9
(None)
Specifies the local area/international codes that are
used when the VPS converts the Caller ID Number
sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Installation Manual
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
Table B-51
Parameter
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
Remove
Digits (0-9)
0-9
(0)
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the
telephone number (sent from the PBX) to make up a
telephone number for a local area/international/long
distance call. Digits are removed from the beginning
of the received digits.
Additional
Dial
Up to 4 digits
consisting of
0-9, , #
(None)
Specifies the number to be added to the telephone
number (sent from the PBX) to make up a telephone
number for a local area/international/long distance
call. The number is added to the beginning of the
received digits.
VPS Port Parameters
These parameters specify the extension numbers of VPS ports.
To access the menu for VPS Port Parameters, follow the menu path as shown:
System Administration Top Menu-1-6-3-5
Table B-52
Parameter
Extension
No. of the
VPS port 1-2
Value Range
(Default)
Description/Function
2-4 digits
Specifies the extension number of each VPS port.
(Port 1-2: 165-166)
Note
Extension numbers of the VPS ports will
automatically be assigned when: (1) Auto
Configuration is executed, or (2) PBX type has
been changed.
Installation Manual
337
B7 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—HARDWARE SETTINGS
338
Installation Manual
Appendix
C
SYSTEM MANAGER’S GUIDE
Installation Manual
339
C1 ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX
C1
ACCESSING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
The System Manager’s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any System Manager
task. To access the System Manager’s Mailbox, three items of information must be known: the
telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service, the System Manager’s
Mailbox Number and the Password for that mailbox (if assigned). The System Manager’s
Mailbox Number is 99, 999 (default), 9999 or 99999 depending upon the mailbox number
length specified in System Programming. The System Manager’s password is assigned
through the System Manager’s Service.
To Access the System Manager’s Mailbox
1. Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS
Extension Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter your party’s mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then Type the System Manager’s Mailbox Number (99, 999, 9999 or
99999).
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of System Manager’s Service will be
played:
You have (number) new message(s).
To receive the message, press [1].
To deliver a message, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To check the mailbox distribution, press [4].
For a system report, press [5].
For other features, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
340
Installation Manual
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
C2
SETTING UP MAILBOXES
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to
maintain system organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot set up mailboxes. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can both create and edit Subscriber Mailboxes by following the steps
below.
At any step, when editing an assigned mailbox’s parameters, change current settings by
Pressing [1]. To leave the current setting unchanged, Press [2].
When creating a new mailbox, the following parameters can be set:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mailbox Number
Subscriber’s Voiced Name—The VPS allows a maximum of 4 s to record the name.
The name must be spoken slowly and clearly. Use the subscriber’s last name.
Extension Number
Initial 3 or 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name—Enter only the first 3 or 4 letters
of the owner’s last name.
Class of Service Number—Enter any COS number (1-62).
Interview Mailbox Number—Interview Mailbox Numbers must be different from
Subscriber Mailbox Numbers
All Calls Transfer Mailbox
Follow the steps listed below to create, edit or delete any mailbox parameter.
1. Log in to the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [1] to Assign or Edit.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [2] to accept the entry.
Installation Manual
341
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
7. As each parameter plays:
a) Press [1] to enter the new parameter or [2] to leave the parameter unchanged.
b) Enter the parameter.
c) Confirm the new parameter is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
8. The All Calls Transfer to Mailbox parameter is the last parameter to be entered. When this
entry is completed, the prompt at Step 4 will appear. Continue assigning or editing other
mailboxes by repeating Steps 5-7.
9. To return to the Main Menu, Press [ ] twice.
Deleting a Mailbox
The System Manager must delete the mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another
person accesses the VPS, the action is automatically canceled.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [2] for Delete.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the mailbox.
342
Installation Manual
C2 SETTING UP MAILBOXES
Resetting a Mailbox Password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must reset the password before it can be
reassigned by the subscriber.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [1] for the Mailbox Setup.
4. Press [3] for Password Reset.
5. Type the mailbox number.
6. Press [1] to delete the password.
Note
After the password is reset, the conditions will be as follows:
<Subscribers’ Mailboxes>
If this parameter is set to "Yes", the password will be initialized to the default password. If
this parameter is set to "No", the password will be cleared.
<Managers’ Mailboxes>
The password is initialized to "No password".
When the System Manager’s password is reset, the "System Manager Access from
Telephone" parameter will automatically change to "Disable". When the Message
Manager’s password is reset, the "Message Manager Access from Telephone" parameter
will automatically change to "Disable".
Installation Manual
343
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
C3
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS
Class of Service defines the set of VPS services available to mailbox owners. A maximum of
64 Class of Services can be established. Each Class of Service can be set using the
telephone. COS No.63 and No.64 are assigned to the Message Manager and the System
Manager respectively.
For a complete explanation of COS parameters, please see Table B-6 and Table B-7 in B3
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS.
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
•
New Message Retention Time—Up to 30 days/0: Unlimited.
•
Saved Message Retention Time—Up to 30 days/0: Unlimited.
•
Message Length—Length ranges from 1-6 min/0: Unlimited.
•
Number of Messages—The number of messages range from 5-100.
•
Total Message Time—Total message time ranges from 5-100 min/0: Unlimited.
•
Message Retrieval Order—Settings are LIFO (Last In First Out) or FIFO (First In First
Out).
•
Message Scanning with Information—Settings are enable or disable.
•
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
1. System Prompt
2. User 1 Prompt
3. User 2 Prompt
•
Delete Message Confirmation—Settings are enable or disable.
344
•
*1Envelope Information Position—Settings are Before, After, or None.
•
•
*1Time and Date Stamp Position—Settings are Before, After, or None.
Caller ID Callback—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Direct Mailbox Access—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*2Remote Call Forward to CO—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Call Waiting on Busy—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Message Cancel for Live Call Screening—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1 Intercom Paging Group Number—1-17
•
*1Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement—0-30
•
*1Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Caller ID Screening—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Call Transfer to Outside—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Toll Saver—Settings are disable, DID, or Caller ID.
•
*1Subscriber Tutorial—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*2Message Notification—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1External Message Delivery—Settings are enable or disable.
•
*1Auto Forwarding—Settings are enable or disable.
Installation Manual
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
*1
*2
Not available for COS No.63 (Message Manager) and COS No.64 (System Manager)
Not available for COS No.64 (System Manager)
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System
Manager cannot set COS parameters. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [2] to set Class of Service.
4. Type the Class of Service Number (1-64).
New Message Retention Time
5.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Saved Message Retention Time
6.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the retention time (up to 30 days or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Length
7.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current length.
b) Type the message length (1-6 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Number of Messages
8.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of messages (5-100).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
345
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Total Message Time
9.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current time.
b) Type the total message time (5-100 min or 0: unlimited).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Retrieval Order
10.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current order (LIFO or
FIFO).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Scanning with Information
11.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Subscriber Service Prompt Mode
12.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the desired mode.
•
•
•
[1] System Prompt
[2] User 1 Prompt
[3] User 2 Prompt
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
Delete Message Confirmation
13.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Envelope Information Position
14.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the current order
(Before, After, or None).
•
[1] Before
•
[2] After
•
[3] None
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
346
Installation Manual
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Time and Date Stamp Position
15.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1], [2], or [3] to change the current order
(Before, After, or None).
•
[1] Before
•
[2] After
•
[3] None
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
Caller ID Callback
16.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Direct Mailbox Access
17.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Remote Call Forward to CO
18.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting
19.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Call Waiting on Busy
20.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Cancel for Live Call Screening
21.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
347
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Intercom Paging Group Number
22.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the group number (1-17).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Note
If set to "17 (Group 17)", the Intercom Paging feature is activated for all groups
(1-16).
Number of Caller IDs for Personal Caller Name Announcement
23.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current number.
b) Type the number of Caller IDs (0-30).
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Play Personal Greeting for Caller ID
24.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Caller ID Screening
25.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Call Transfer to Outside
26.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Toll Saver
27.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the current order (disable, DID,
or Caller ID).
•
[1] disable
•
[2] DID
•
[3] Caller ID
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [4] to accept it.
348
Installation Manual
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Subscriber Tutorial
28.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
b) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
Message Notification
29.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
If the Message Notification is enabled, go to Step 29b below.
b) Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired Beeper Callback Number
Entry Mode.
•
[1] Caller Select Mode
•
[2] Without message mode
•
[3] Before message recording mode
•
[4] After message recording mode
•
[5] Disable All Entry Mode (Caller cannot access beeper)
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [6] to accept it.
d) The current setting of MWL Notification for Unreceived Message plays. Press
[1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
e) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
f)
The current setting of Device Notification for Unreceived Message plays.
Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
g) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 29a
above.
External Message Delivery
30.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
If the External Message Delivery is enabled, set the prompt mode for
receiving External Delivery Messages (go to Step 30b below).
b) The current prompt mode plays. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the
desired mode.
•
[1] System Prompt
•
[2] User 1 Prompt
•
[3] User 2 Prompt
•
[4] Selective Prompt
c) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [5] to accept it. Return to Step 30a
above.
Installation Manual
349
C3 SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS
Auto Forwarding
31.
a) The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting (enable or disable).
If Auto Forwarding is enabled, go to Step 31b below.
b) The current forwarding destination mailbox number plays. Press [1] to
change the mailbox number.
c) Type the mailbox number.
d) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
e) The current delay time is played. Press [1] to change the setting. The delay
time is the period of time that the VPS must wait before forwarding messages.
For example, enter 115# to set the delay time to 1 h 15 min; 30# to set 30 min.
f)
Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
g) The current forwarding mode is played. Press [1] to change the setting (copy
or move).
h) Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Return to Step 31a
above.
350
Installation Manual
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
C4
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The system clock can be set directly from the telephone. It is important to set the exact time
because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery, redialing and
rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion are all
scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and Message Manager are also able
to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins
and ends.
Note
The System Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•
the System Administrator programs via a personal computer,
•
the Message Manager sets the system clock, records the Voice Labels and System
Caller Names, and customizes the Message Manager’s Mailbox.
"The VPS plays Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [3] to set the time and date.
4. Press [1] to change the current time.
5. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o’clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15, press
5, 1, 5, and #".
6. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected for Time Stamp for User Prompts. See
"Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp for User 1 Prompt" and "Position of "AM/PM" in Time
Stamp for User 2 Prompt" in Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
7. Press [2] to accept the time.
8. Press [1] to change the current date.
9. Type the current month and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
Installation Manual
351
C4 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
10. Type the day and Press [#].
11. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
12. Press [2] to accept the date.
352
Installation Manual
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
C5
CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
The VPS automatically activates the appropriate call handling method according to the Time
Service setting (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Services); however, the System Manager or
System Administrator can change the current call handling method by selecting a specific
Service Mode.
Once the Service Mode has been changed, it is retained unless the System Manager or
System Administrator changes it again, even after the power is cut and restored.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Service Mode setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
Assigning the Service Mode
There are 6 Service Modes available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in Lunch Mode
Manual Break Mode: Operates only in Break Mode
PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period (available
only with APT/DPT Integration)
In the Automatic Mode, services have this order of priority:
Toll Saver > Holiday Service > Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk
Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver has the highest priority.)
In the Manual Modes (Day, Night, Lunch, or Break), services have this order of priority:
Caller ID Call Routing > DID Call Routing > Trunk Service > Port Service
(Toll Saver and Holiday Service are disregarded.)
In the PBX Control Mode: (1) under DPT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service (Day,
Night, Lunch or Break) setting from the PBX when a call is received through a PBX and
operates accordingly; (2) under APT Integration, the VPS obtains the Time Service setting
from the PBX when the time period changes at the PBX or APT data link has been established
between the VPS and PBX.
When the Integration Mode is other than APT/DPT Integration and the PBX Control Mode is
selected, the VPS will operate in the Automatic Mode.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, the PBX Control
Mode may not function properly. For more information, call National Parts Center at 1-800833-9626.
Installation Manual
353
C5 CHANGING THE SERVICE MODE SETTING
Follow the steps below to assign a Service Mode.
1. Log in the main menu.
2. Press [6] for other features.
3. Press [4] to change Service Mode setting.
4. The VPS plays the current setting. Press [1] to change the setting.
5. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to choose the desired Service Mode entry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Automatic Mode: Operates according to the setting in Time Service (default)
[2] Manual Day Mode: Operates only in Day Mode
[3] Manual Night Mode: Operates only in Night Mode
[4] Manual Lunch Mode: Operates only in the Lunch Mode
[5] Manual Break Mode: Operates only in the Break Mode
[6] PBX Control Mode: Operation changes depending on PBX time period
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
354
Installation Manual
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE SETTING
C6
CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING
AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE SETTING
Company Greeting greets all incoming callers. The System Manager or System Administrator
can choose the appropriate company greeting to each individual Time Service period (Day,
Night, Lunch, and Break) for each port and trunk (CO line) group. The default is set at the
System Greeting prior to factory shipment.
The System Manager or System Administrator can also choose a desired Incoming Call
Service to each individual Time Service period for each port and trunk (CO line) group. The
default is set at the Automated Attendant Service prior to factory shipment.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot change the Company Greeting setting. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not
available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] for Other Features.
3. Press [5] to change Port/Trunk setting.
4. Press [1] to change the port setting, or [2] to change the trunk service setting.
5. Type 1-2 (port number) or 1-48 (trunk group number).
6. Press [1], [2], [3], or [4] to choose the desired Time Service period entry.
•
•
•
•
[1] Day Time service
[2] Night Time service
[3] Lunch Time service
[4] Break Time service
7. Press [1] to change the Company Greeting setting, or [2] to change the Incoming Call
Service setting.
8. The current setting plays. Press [1] to change the setting, or [2] to accept it.
If you press [1], Go to Step 9 for the Company Greeting setting, or Go to Step 11 for the
Incoming Call Service setting.
9. Press [1], [2], or [3] to choose the desired setting entry.
•
•
•
[1] To change Company Greeting number
[2] To set System Greeting—Go to Step 13
[3] To disable—Go to Step 13
Installation Manual
355
C6 CHANGING THE COMPANY GREETING AND INCOMING CALL SERVICE SETTING
10. Type the Company Greeting number 1-32—Go to Step 13.
11. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], or [5] to choose the desired setting entry.
•
•
•
•
•
[1] To set Voice Mail Service—Go to Step 13
[2] To set Automated Attendant Service—Go to Step 13
[3] To set Custom Service
[4] To set Interview Service
[5] To disable
Note
You cannot disable the setting in the port setting.
12. Type the Custom Service prompt number 1 through 100, or the Interview Mailbox
number.
13. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it.
356
Installation Manual
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)
C7
CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM
REPORTS)
The System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to help monitor the VPS operating
status. The reports are sent from the RS-232C port to either a printer or a terminal. (The
System Administrator is also able to output System Reports.)
Obtaining System Reports
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [6], [7], or [8] to generate the desired report.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] System Service Report
[2] Flash Memory Usage Report
[3] Port Usage Report
[4] Mailbox Usage Report
[5] Mailbox Parameter Report
[6] Call Account Report
[7] Class of Service Parameter Report
[8] Fax Call Report
Note
The Mailbox Parameter Report is displayed as "Mailbox Assignments". The Class of
Service Parameter Report is displayed as "COS Assignments".
4. For Flash Memory Usage Report, Port Usage Report, Mailbox Usage Report, Call
Account Report or Fax Call Report, Press [1]. To generate the Mailbox Usage Report,
Go to Step 5.
5. Mailbox Usage Report—Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be printed and the System Report Menu
will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range, or Press [2] to obtain all mailbox usage counts. This mailbox number is the end of
the mailbox range. The mailbox number entered in Step 5 is the start of the range. For
example, to specify the mailbox range 1001 through 1209, enter 1001 in Step 5 and 1209
in Step 6.
Installation Manual
357
C7 CHECKING SYSTEM USAGE (SYSTEM REPORTS)
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, a System Report will
not be generated. The System Report starts to be generated after the System
Administrator has completed programming and system prompt [<] is displayed on the
personal computer.
Clearing the Reports
The Port Usage, Flash Memory Usage, Mailbox Usage, Fax Call, and Call Account Reports
can be cleared.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] for the System Report Menu.
3. Press [2] to clear the Flash Memory Usage Reports, [3] to clear the Port Usage Reports,
[4] to clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, [6] to clear the Call Account Report, or [8] to clear
the Fax Call Report.
4. Press [2] to clear the report. To clear the Mailbox Usage Reports, Go to Step 5.
5. Type the mailbox number of the start of the range.
Note
If a [#] is entered in place of each digit of the mailbox numbers (e.g., # # # for 3-digit
mailbox numbers), reports for all mailboxes will be cleared and the System Report Menu
will appear. In this case, Step 6 can be skipped.
6. Press [1] to specify the mailbox range, and Type the mailbox number of the end of the
range. Press [2] to clear all Mailbox Usage Reports.
358
Installation Manual
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
C8
DELIVERING MESSAGES
The System Manager can deliver the same message to all or specified subscribers’
mailboxes. When delivering a message to specified mailboxes, he can check the distribution
status of each message.
Delivering Messages to All Mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver the same message
to all subscribers at the same time. The message to broadcast is recorded in the System
Manager’s mailbox. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current VPS
status such as remaining flash memory capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be
erased, etc.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [1] to record a broadcast message.
4. Record a broadcast message and Press [1].
5. Press [2] to accept the message recorded.
Delivering Messages to Specified Mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscriber mailboxes by
specifying their numbers.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to deliver a message.
3. Press [2] to deliver a message.
4. Type the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
Note
Enter by name by Pressing [#] [1] first.
Use a System Group Distribution List by specifying its number.
5. Press [2] to accept the number if it is correct.
Note
Press [2] to add mailbox numbers. Press [3] to review the mailing list. Press [ ] to cancel
message transfer.
Installation Manual
359
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
6. Press [1] to record a message.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the entry.
9. Press [1] to specify the delivery time and the private status.
Note
Press [2] to send the message immediately and return to the Main Menu.
10. Press [1] to specify the delivery time.
11. Type the time and Press [#].
12. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected for Time Stamp for User Prompts. See
"Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp for User 1 Prompt" and "Position of "AM/PM" in Time
Stamp for User 2 Prompt" in Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
13. Type the date (month and day) and Press [#].
14. Press [2] to accept the entry.
15. Press [1] to make this message private; otherwise, Press [2].
360
Installation Manual
C8 DELIVERING MESSAGES
Checking Mailbox Distribution
Use this feature to check if messages have been delivered to recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to check distribution status.
3. Press [3] to cancel the message or delete verification.
Note
Press [1] to listen to messages. Press [1] twice to check the previous message. Press [2]
to check the next message.
4. Press [1] to delete verification of this message, or [2] to cancel message delivery.
Installation Manual
361
C9 CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S MAILBOX
C9
CUSTOMIZING THE SYSTEM MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
In order to ensure system security, establish a password consisting of up to 10 numeric
characters. Anyone requesting access to the System Manager’s service will be required to
enter this password before proceeding.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the System Manager
cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customize the mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the mailbox password.
If a password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current
setting.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
Note
If a password is not needed, Press [#]. It is recommended that the password be set to
maintain security.
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
362
Installation Manual
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES
C10
LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER
MESSAGES
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message
was recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Repeat this message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
Installation Manual
363
C10 LISTENING TO SYSTEM MANAGER MESSAGES
364
Installation Manual
Appendix
D
MESSAGE MANAGER’S GUIDE
Installation Manual
365
D1 ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
D1
ACCESSING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S
MAILBOX
The Message Manager’s Mailbox must be accessed before performing any Message Manager
task. To access the Message Manager’s mailbox, three items of information must be known:
the telephone number connected directly to the Voice Mail Service, the Message Manager’s
Mailbox Number, and the Message Manager’s Password (if assigned). The Message
Manager’s Mailbox Number is 98, 998 (default), 9998, or 99998 depending upon the mailbox
number length specified in System Programming. The Message Manager’s password is
assigned through the Message Manager’s Service.
To Access the Message Manager’s Mailbox
1. Dial the Extension Number connected to the Voice Mail Service. Or Dial any VPS
Extension Number and Press [#] [6] (Service Access Command).
Please enter your party’s mailbox number.
To enter by name, press [#] and [1].
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line.
To call the operator, press [0].
2. Press [ ], then enter the Message Manager’s Mailbox Number 98, 998, 9998 or
99998.
Enter your password, followed by [#].
3. Type the Password followed by [#]. The Main Menu of Message Manager’s Service will
be played.
You have (number) new message(s).
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox messages, press [1].
To set up message waiting notification, press [2].
To customize your mailbox, press [3].
To set the clock, press [4].
To modify message, press [5].
To set station call forwarding, press [6].
To end this call, press [ ].
366
Installation Manual
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX
D2
MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY
MAILBOX
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for
messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (System Group
Distribution Lists may be used). This can be done at any time using the telephone.
Listening to Messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his
mailbox. He can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if
necessary, transfer them to their intended recipients.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. The VPS plays the number of new messages. Press [1] to listen to the messages.
3. The VPS plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message
was recorded. Press [0] to listen to the entire menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Repeat this Message
[1] [1] Replay the Previous Message
[2] Play the Next Message
[3] ([1]) Erase this Message
[4] Reply
[5] Rewind
[6] Fast Forward
[7] Transfer
[8] Message Scan
[9] Save this Message as New
Transferring Messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox must be transferred to their intended recipients
with voice comments attached when necessary. When a message has been transferred, we
recommend that the original be deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [1] to transfer messages from the General Delivery Mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the first (next/last) message. Press [7] to transfer the message.
4. Type the destination mailbox number.
Installation Manual
367
D2 MANAGING THE GENERAL DELIVERY MAILBOX
5. Press [2] to accept the number.
6. Press [2] to transfer with comment.
Note
Press [1] to transfer messages without comment. Press [3] to add a mailbox number.
Press [4] to review the Mailing List.
7. Record the comments and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the comments entered.
368
Installation Manual
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
D3
SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING
NOTIFICATION
The VPS can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his
mailbox. Two types of Message Waiting Notification are available: Notification by Message
Waiting Lamp and Notification by Calling.
Setting Message Waiting Lamp Status
The VPS illuminates the message waiting lamp on the extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager’s Mailbox.
Note
The extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is the Message Manager’s
extension. However, its default extension number (0) cannot be used with the Message
Waiting Lamp feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension number
that is included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4. Press [1] to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status, or [2] to accept it.
Setting Notification by Calling Status
The VPS calls the preset telephone or beeper when a new message is recorded in the
Message Manager’s Mailbox. Set the following parameters as appropriate.
Setting Device Status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The
Message Manager cannot enable a device according to a schedule. The System
Administrator must accomplish this task (see "Time Frame 1, 2" in Table B-4 in B2 SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION—MAILBOXES).
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification.
3. Press [2] to change the Device Status.
4. Type the device number (1-3).
Installation Manual
369
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
Note
If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number, you cannot
set the device status. See "Assigning Notification Numbers" to assign a telephone
number.
5. Press [1], [2], or [3] to select the device status.
•
•
•
[1] Schedule (enabled on the schedule)
[2] Continuously (enabled whole day)
[3] Not Use (disabled whole day)
Assigning Notification Numbers
Up to 3 telephone or beeper numbers can be set for message notification. Use the number
keys 0 to 9, the tone/pulse switch, and the Beeper Callback Number Display Entry Code [X]
to make these assignments.
When the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code is added at the end of a beeper number, the VPS
will ask the caller to enter the callback number that will display on the beeper. System
Programming determines if the Callback Number Entry is to be entered before, after, or
without the message.
It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not to enter a callback number. The
System Manager must authorize the use of the Beeper Callback No. Entry Code.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [2] to set Message Waiting Notification
3. Press [3] to assign Telephone Number.
4. Press [1] to change the first telephone number, [2] to change the second telephone
number, or [3] to change the third telephone number.
5. Press [1] to set the telephone number.
6. Type the telephone number.
7. Press [2] to accept the entry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
370
Installation Manual
[1] Change the telephone number
[2] Accept
[3] Review
[4] Add more digits
[5] Insert a pause
[6] Set dial mode
[7] Insert a wait for dial tone
D3 SETTING UP MESSAGE WAITING NOTIFICATION
•
[8] Insert a beeper display command
8. Press [1] to be notified by telephone or [2] by a beeper.
Installation Manual
371
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
D4
CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE
MANAGER’S MAILBOX
The Message Manager is able to customize the Message Manager’s mailbox by specifying:
(1) the password; (2) the extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3; or (3) Telephone numbers
1 and 2 as the call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to a CO line.
Note
While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot access this service. The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
Message Manager’s Password
The Message Manager can specify the password at any time using the telephone. The
password contains up to 10 numeric characters. It must be entered to execute the message
management operation.
Operator’s Extensions
When callers require help, they can Press [0] on their telephone keypad to be transferred to
an operator extension. In each Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Modes, up to 3 operators
(Operator 1, 2, 3) can be specified. The extension number assigned for Operator 1 in the Day
Mode will be for the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to CO
The customization of the Message Manager’s mailbox only allows you to assign Telephone
number 1 and/or 2; to enable call forwarding to the telephone number assigned by following
the steps below, follow the instructions in D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET.
If you should change the telephone number after you have enabled call forwarding to a CO
line, you must go back to D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET to reset the call forwarding
setting; otherwise, you will be transferring calls to the old telephone number unknowingly.
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [3] to customize Mailbox.
3. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [1] to change the password. If a
password has not yet been assigned, go to Step 4. Press [2] to accept the current
setting—Go to Step 6.
4. Type the password and Press [#].
5. The VPS plays the current password setting. Press [2] to accept it.
372
Installation Manual
D4 CUSTOMIZING THE MESSAGE MANAGER’S MAILBOX
6. The VPS plays the current operator’s extension setting. Press [1] to change or assign the
operator’s extension. Press [2] to accept the current setting, or Press [3] to delete the
current setting—Go to Step 9.
Note
Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Type the extension number.
8. The VPS plays the current extension setting. Press [2] to accept it.
9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch
and Break Modes for each operator.
10. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [1] to change the
telephone number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 11.
Press [2] to accept the current setting—Go to Step 13.
11. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•
•
Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to seize
a CO line).
When connected to the KX-TD500, the maximum number of characters allowed to
be entered is 24; when connected to other KX-T series PBX, 16.
12. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 1 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
13. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [1] to change the
telephone number. If a telephone number has not yet been assigned, go to Step 14.
Press [2] to accept the current setting.
14. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
15. The VPS plays the current Telephone number 2 setting. Press [2] to accept it.
Installation Manual
373
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
D5
SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
The Message Manager can set the system clock directly from the telephone. It is important to
set the exact time because Message Waiting Notification, External Message Delivery,
redialing and rescheduling of External Message Delivery, and Automatic Message Deletion
are all scheduled using this setting. The System Administrator and System Manager are also
able to set the clock.
The system automatically adjusts the time as appropriate when daylight saving time begins
and ends.
Note
The Message Manager cannot set the system clock while:
•
the System Administrator programs via a personal computer,
•
the System Manager sets mailboxes and Class of Service (COS), and customizes
the System Manager’s Mailbox.
The VPS plays "Sorry, this function is not available".
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [4] to set the time and date.
3. Press [1] to change the current setting.
4. Type the current time and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter 5 o’clock, press 5 and # or to enter 5:15, press
5, 1, 5, and #".
5. Press [1] for AM or [2] for PM.
Note
This selection is not available if "24-h" is selected for Time Stamp for User Prompts. See
"Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp for User 1 Prompt" and "Position of "AM/PM" in Time
Stamp for User 2 Prompt" in Table B-27 in B6.5 Prompt Setting.
6. Press [2] to accept the time.
7. Press [1] to change the current date.
8. Type the current month and Press [#].
Note
Press [0] for help. "For example, to enter January, press 1 and #".
9. Type the day and Press [#].
374
Installation Manual
D5 SETTING THE SYSTEM CLOCK
10. Type the last 2 digits of the year and Press [#].
11. Press [2] to accept the date entered.
Installation Manual
375
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
D6
RECORDING MESSAGES
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (specifically:
menus, voice labels, user prompts, and system caller names). He is responsible for
maintaining the following:
•
Company Greetings—Up to 32 company greetings for business/non-business and Lunch/
Break hours as well as holidays can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
•
Company Name
•
The Department Dialing Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—A caller can access
departments with the touch of one key. Nine Department Dialing selections (1 to 9) can
be recorded.
•
The Custom Service Menus (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 100 custom service
menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services they require without
the need for a human operator. This is the most useful and powerful feature of your
Panasonic Voice Processing System. For example, the Message Manager can record
menus in a wide variety of foreign languages.
•
* The Voice Labels (maximum length: 6 min each)—Up to 20 System Group Distribution
Lists can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice label.
•
The User Prompts (maximum length: 6 min each)—There are 3 kinds of voice mail
prompts: (1) System Prompts, (2) User 1 Prompts, and (3) User 2 Prompts. Generally, the
System Prompts should be left alone; they are recorded at the factory in English.
However, the Message Manager can record User 1 Prompts and User 2 Prompts in any
language he wishes.
•
The Multilingual Selection Menu (maximum length: 6 min)—With this menu, callers can
select the language they prefer to hear all prompts (mentioned in the previous paragraph,
"The User Prompts"). For example, the Message Manager can record a menu like this:
For English, press (7).
For French, press (8).
For Chinese, press (9).
•
* The System Caller Names (maximum length: 4 s each)—Up to 120 Caller ID numbers
can be registered by the System Administrator. The Message Manager is responsible for
recording a name for each Caller ID number.
* While the System Administrator programs via a personal computer, the Message
Manager cannot record the Voice Labels and System Caller Names. The VPS plays
"Sorry, this function is not available".
376
Installation Manual
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
Recording Menus and Voice Labels
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Select the desired number to be recorded.
•
•
•
•
•
•
[1] Record the Company Greetings.
[2] Record the Company Name.
[3] Record the Department Dialing Menu.
[4] Record the Custom Service Menus.
[5] Record the Voice Labels for System Group Distribution Lists.
[7] Record the Multilingual Selection Menu.
4. For the item selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
•
For the Company Greetings—Enter the Company Greeting Number (1-32).
For the Company Name—Go to Step 5.
For the Department Dialing Menu—Go to Step 5.
For the Custom Service Menus—Enter a Custom Service Number (1-100).
Enter [0] to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
For the Voice Labels—Enter a System Group Distribution Lists number to be
labeled. (The System Administrator assigns list numbers.)
For the Multilingual Selection Menu—Go to Step 5.
5. The VPS plays the current message. Press [1] to change the message. If a message has
not yet been recorded, go to Step 7.
6. Press [1] to record the message. Press [2] to erase the current message and return to
Step 3 or 4.
7. Record the message at the tone and Press [1].
8. Press [2] to accept the message.
Notes
•
•
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded message.
Press [3] to erase the recorded message and try again—Return to Step 7.
Press [4] to add a message.
Press [ ] to erase the recorded message and exit—Return to Step 3.
9. Repeat Steps 4-8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or
Voice Labels.
Installation Manual
377
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
Recording User Prompts
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [6] to modify user prompts.
4. Press [1] to change User Prompt 1, or [2] to change User Prompt 2.
5. To change specific prompts, Go to Step 6.
To change all prompts in a row without reviewing the current recording, Go to Step 7.
6. To change specific prompts:
a) Press [1]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of
modifiable prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number and its prompt. If a prompt has not yet been
recorded, the VPS plays the system prompt. If a prompt is turned off, "The prompt is
now turned off" will play before the prompt.
d) Press [1] to record a new prompt.
Notes
•
•
•
Press [2] to erase the current recording—Return to Step 6b.
(This is not available when the selected prompt is currently turned on and not
recorded, or when the selected prompt has never been recorded and is currently
turned off with the Utility command by the System Administrator.)
Press [3] to turn off the specified prompt—Return to Step 6b.
Press [4] to accept—Return to Step 6b.
e) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
f) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Notes
•
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 6f.
Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Return to Step 6b.
g) Repeat Steps 6b to 6h to record other prompts.
7. To change all prompts in a row:
a) Press [2]
b) Enter the prompt number you want to change. (There is a complete list of
modifiable prompts in D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.)
c) The VPS plays the prompt number.
d) Press [1] to change the prompt.
378
Installation Manual
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
Notes
•
•
Press [2] to go to Step 7g.
Press [3] to turn off the prompt.
e) Record a prompt at the tone and Press [1] to end recording.
f) Press [2] to accept the recorded prompt.
Notes
•
•
•
Press [1] to review the recorded prompt.
Press [3] to erase the recorded prompt and try again—Return to Step 7e.
Press [ ] to erase the recorded prompt and exit—Go to Step 7g.
g) The VPS plays the next prompt number.
h) Repeat Steps 7d to 7g to record other prompts.
Note
User prompts can be saved in a personal computer (command SAVE through the RS232C). Once they have been saved, they can be restored (with the command LOAD) at
any time. There is a complete list of modifiable prompts and prompt numbers in D9 LIST
OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Recording System Caller Names
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [5] to modify messages.
3. Press [8] to modify system caller names.
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number*1 (1-120) to be modified.
Notes
•
•
Enter [ ] to return to Step 3.
To record system caller names, first Caller ID numbers must be assigned (see B6.6
System Caller Name Announcement).
5. The VPS plays the Caller ID number and its name. To change the name, Press [1]. If a
name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to Step 6.
Notes
•
•
Press [2] to accept the current name—Return to Step 4.
Press [3] to erase the current name—Return to Step 4.
6. Record the name at the tone and Press [1].
7. The VPS plays the recorded name. Press [2] to accept it.
*1
Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
Installation Manual
379
D6 RECORDING MESSAGES
Notes
•
•
Press [1] to change the recorded name—Return to Step 6.
Press [3] to erase the recorded name—Return to Step 4.
8. Repeat Steps 4-7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
380
Installation Manual
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
D7
REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
The Message Manager can program his extension (assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode)
from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an outside
telephone. There are six forwarding settings available:
•
FWD All—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number.
•
FWD Busy—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when the line is
busy.
•
FWD No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number when there
is no answer.
•
FWD Busy or No Answer—Forward all incoming calls to a desired extension number
when the line is busy or there is no answer.
•
FWD to CO—Forward all incoming calls to Telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in
the Mailbox Setting), or to any other telephone number.
•
FWD Cancel—Cancel the forwarding setting.
Notes
•
•
•
•
The Remote Call Forwarding Set feature is available with DPT Integration only.
By default, the extension number for the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for
Operator 1 in the Day Mode) is "0". However, the default setting cannot be used with
this feature. When using this feature, you must assign the extension number that is
included in the Extension Numbering Plan.
FWD to CO must be enabled in the COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilized (see
"Remote Call FWD to CO" in Table B-7 in B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—
SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE) PARAMETERS).
FWD to CO must also be enabled in the COS setting in the PBX for each extension.
Assigning Remote Call Forwarding Set
1. Log in the Main Menu.
2. Press [6] to set Remote Call Forwarding.
3. Press [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], or [6] to select the desired forwarding setting.
•
•
•
•
•
[1] FWD All
[2] FWD Busy
[3] FWD No Answer
[4] FWD Busy or No Answer
[5] FWD to CO
Installation Manual
381
D7 REMOTE CALL FORWARDING SET
•
[6] FWD Cancel
4. For the items selected in Step 3, follow these steps:
•
•
•
•
•
•
For FWD All—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy—Go to Step 5.
For FWD No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD Busy or No Answer—Go to Step 5.
For FWD to CO—Go to Step 7.
For FWD Cancel—Go to Step 10.
5. Type the extension number.
6. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the extension number—Return to Step 5.
7. Press [1] or [2] to select Telephone number 1 or Telephone number 2 (Go to Step 9), or
Press [3] to select another telephone number.
8. Type the telephone number using "0-9" and " ".
Notes
•
•
Please make sure you begin the telephone number with a Line Access Code (to seize
a CO line).
When connected to the KX-TD500, the maximum number of characters allowed to
be entered is 24; when connected to other KX-T series PBX, 16.
9. Confirm the entry is correct and Press [2] to accept it. Go to Step 11.
Note
Press [1] to change the telephone number. Return to Step 7.
10. Call Forwarding is canceled. Press [2] to accept it.
11. Call Forwarding setting data is transmitted to the PBX. If the forwarding setting or
canceling has been completed properly, you will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call
forwarding is canceled".
Note
If you hear "Call Forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination number", the
forwarding setting has not been completed properly at the PBX, possibly because a
nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. It is also possible that
the model of the connected PBX does not support the Remote Call Forwarding Set
feature, or its software version is lower than required; for more information, call National
Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
382
Installation Manual
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE
D8
LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND
AA SERVICE
There are over 900 voice prompts (all listed in the next section) and they come in 3 types.
(1) System Prompts—in English (cannot be modified)
(2) User 1 Prompts—recordable
(3) User 2 Prompts—in Spanish (can be erased or modified)
However, in many cases it is not necessary to record all the voice prompts (recording over 900
voice prompts is a big undertaking). When an outside party calls AA service or VM service,
he only hears some of the following prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or
modify) these prompts. Please change prompts as needed for your application. For
example, prompt no. [819] could be "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome
to the Voice Processing System". (The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 min.)
Note
To identify the prompt(s) linked to each prompt listed below, refer to the next section, D9
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Table D-1
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
248
Good afternoon
249
Good evening
250
Good morning
819
Welcome to the Voice Processing System
675
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
132
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s last name
198
For ’Q’, press 7
199
For ’Z’, press 9
505
Sorry, there are no more matching names
513
Sorry, this name cannot be found
277
Incorrect entry
274
If you are using a rotary telephone, stay on the line
618
To call the operator, press 0
49
Calling the operator
417
Please wait a moment
818
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
416
Please leave a message at the tone
668
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
Installation Manual
383
D8 LIST OF PROMPTS FOR VOICE MAIL AND AA SERVICE
Table D-1
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
702
To pause and restart recording, press 2
732
To review, press 1
603
To accept, press 2
678
To erase and try again, press 3
614
To add, press 4
677
To erase and exit, press
697
To make this message private, press 1
392
Otherwise, press 2
531
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Table D-2
Prompt No.
413
Modifiable Prompts
Please enter your party’s mailbox number
AA Prompts
Table D-3
Prompt No.
384
Modifiable Prompts
412
Please enter your party’s extension
825
You have a call
502
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
695
To leave a message, press 1
672
To enter another extension, press
510
Sorry, this line is busy
276
If you would like to hold, press 1
622
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
D9
LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
The table below shows the modifiable prompts. Record prompts as User 1 or User 2. Some of
the modifiable prompts are listed along with their linked prompt number. Whenever possible,
record related prompts together so that the assembled sentence flows naturally and sounds
like one voice. You can change all service prompts to User 1 or User 2 by changing the DIP
Switch setting (see Table 1-1 in 1.3.2 System Components).
If you wish to change some of service prompts to User 1 or User 2, but not all of them, please
see the following sections:
•
B3 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—SETTING COS (CLASS OF SERVICE)
PARAMETERS; "Prompt Mode" of Table B-6 and Table B-7.
•
B4 SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION—PORT/TRUNK SERVICE; "Incoming Call Service
Prompt" of Table B-8 and Table B-9.
•
B5.2 Custom Service; "Prompt Mode" in Table B-15.
•
B6.5 Prompt Setting; Table B-27.
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
1
20 members maximum
[509], [ 1]
2
8 members maximum
[509], [ 2]
3
After hours greeting is (message)
[ 3]
4
After hours greeting is not recorded
[ 4]
5
All beeper entry modes are disabled
[ 5]
6
All calls transfer to mailbox disabled
[ 6]
7
All calls transfer to mailbox enabled
[ 7]
8
All mailboxes are assigned
[ 8]
9
All messages erased
[ 9]
10
All transfer services disabled
[ 10]
11
AM
[ 11]
12
and
[ 12]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
[325], [ 12]
13
and transferred via (mailbox number) [ 13]
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
14
Answer length is (number)
[ 14], [454]
15
Any digit on the telephone keypad
can be used
[ 15]
16
APRIL
[ 16]
Installation Manual
385
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
17
at
[ 17]
[594], [ 17]
[304], [432], [ 17]
[323], [17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[158], [379], [ 17]
[318], [ 17]
[305], [816], [ 17]
[159], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
18
(number) attempts were busy
[ 18]
19
(number) attempts were no answer
[ 19]
20
(number) attempts were successful
[ 20]
21
AUGUST
[ 21]
22
Auto forwarding disabled
[ 22]
23
Auto forwarding enabled
[ 23]
24
because message retention time
expired
[157], [815], [ 24]
25
Beeper access disabled
[ 25]
26
Beeper access enabled
[ 26]
27
Beeper callback number entry mode [ 27]
is after message recording
28
Beeper callback number entry mode [ 28]
is before message recording
29
Beeper callback number entry mode [ 29]
is caller select
30
Beeper callback number entry mode [ 30]
is without message
31
being delivered now
[324], [ 31]
32
Busy signal greeting is (message)
[ 32]
33
Busy signal greeting is not recorded
[ 33]
34
Call blocking enabled
[ 34]
35
Call screening enabled
[ 35]
36
Call transferred from the voice
processing system
[ 36]
37
CALLBACK NUMBER
[ 37]
386
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
38
Caller ID (number)
[ 38], [252]
[ 38], [253]
39
Caller ID number and caller name
deleted
[ 39]
40
Caller ID number entries for this box [ 40]
are full, there are 30 entries for caller
ID allowed
41
Caller ID number is (telephone
number)
[ 41]
[ 41], [647], [603]
42
Caller ID number is not assigned
[ 42]
[ 42], [647], [392]
43
Caller ID numbers assigned
[541], [ 43]
44
Caller ID screen disabled
[ 44]
45
Caller ID screen enabled
[ 45]
46
Caller name is (name)
[ 46]
47
Caller name is erased
[ 47]
48
Caller name is not recorded
[ 48]
49
Calling the operator
[ 49], [417]
50
Cannot be retrieved
[ 50]
51
Class of service number is (number) [ 51], [583]
[ 51], [584]
[ 51]
52
Company greeting number (number) [ 52], [154]
53
Company greeting number is
(number)
[ 53]
54
Company name (name)
[ 54]
55
Company name erased
[ 55]
56
Counts cleared
[ 56]
57
Covering extension is (extension
number)
[ 57]
58
Covering extension not assigned
[ 58]
59
Covering extension transfer disabled [ 59]
60
Covering extension transfer enabled [ 60]
61
Custom service menu
[ 61]
[ 61], [154]
62
Custom service number (number)
[ 62]
Installation Manual
387
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
63
Date is (date)
64
Day mode first operator’s extension is [ 64]
(extension number)
65
Day mode first operator’s extension is [ 65]
not assigned
66
Day mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[ 66]
67
Day mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
[ 67]
68
Day mode third operator’s extension [ 68]
is (extension number)
69
Day mode third operator’s extension [ 69]
is not assigned
70
days
[ 70]
[339], [ 70]
[449], [ 70]
71
DECEMBER
[ 71]
72
Delay time is (time)
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
[ 72], [332]
73
deleted
[289], [ 73]
74
Delivering message to (name)
[ 74]
75
Delivery list number is (number)
[ 75]
76
Department dialing menu erased
[ 76]
77
Department dialing menu is (menu)
[ 77]
78
Device notification for unreceived
message disabled
[ 78]
79
Device notification for unreceived
message enabled
[ 79]
80
Device number is (number)
[ 80]
81
DIAL TONE
[ 81]
82
digits
[865], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
[875], [822], [ 82]
83
Direct mailbox access disabled
[ 83]
388
Installation Manual
[ 63]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
84
Direct mailbox access enabled
[ 84]
85
EIGHT
[ 85]
86
EIGHT [HOUR]
[ 86]
87
EIGHT [MINUTE] (OWE EIGHT)
[ 87]
88
EIGHTEEN
[ 88]
89
EIGHTEEN [HOUR]
[ 89]
90
EIGHTEEN [MINUTE]
[ 90]
91
EIGHTEENTH
[ 91]
92
EIGHTH
[ 92]
93
EIGHTY
[ 93]
94
EIGHTY EIGHT
[ 94]
95
EIGHTY FIVE
[ 95]
96
EIGHTY FOUR
[ 96]
97
EIGHTY NINE
[ 97]
98
EIGHTY ONE
[ 98]
99
EIGHTY SEVEN
[ 99]
100
EIGHTY SIX
[100]
101
EIGHTY THREE
[101]
102
EIGHTY TWO
[102]
103
ELEVEN
[103]
104
ELEVEN [HOUR]
[104]
105
ELEVEN [MINUTE]
[105]
106
ELEVENTH
[106]
107
Enter 1 for AM, or 2 for PM
[107]
108
Enter a class of service number from [108]
1 to 64
109
Enter a group number from 1 to 9
[109]
110
Enter a group number, 1 through 4
[110]
111
Enter a mailbox list number
[111]
112
Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes
[112]
113
Enter a message retention time up to [113]
30 days
Installation Manual
389
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
114
Enter a personal greeting length from [114]
8 to 60 seconds
115
Enter delivery list number 1 or 2
[115]
116
Enter device number, 1 through 3
[116]
117
Enter extension number
[117]
118
Enter question number, followed by
the hash sign
[118]
119
Enter question number, followed by
the pound sign
[119]
120
Enter the 4 digits password
[120], [747]
[120], [746]
121
Enter the caller ID number
[121], [822], [ 82]
122
Enter the caller name announcement [122]
number 1 through 120
123
Enter the company greeting number 1 [123]
through 32
124
[124]
Enter the custom service prompt
number 1 through 100
To record custom service exit prompt,
press 0
125
Enter the day of the month, followed
by the hash sign
[125]
126
Enter the day of the month, followed
by the pound sign
[126]
127
Enter the day, followed by the hash
sign
[127]
128
Enter the day, followed by the pound [128]
sign
129
Enter the delay time, followed by the [129]
hash sign
130
Enter the delay time, followed by the [130]
pound sign
131
Enter the destination mailbox number [131], [675]
[131], [674]
132
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the
person’s last name
133
Enter the first 4 letters of the owner’s [133]
last name
134
Enter the interview mailbox number
390
Installation Manual
[132], [198], [199]
[132]
[134]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
135
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the hash sign
[135]
136
Enter the last 2 digits of the year,
followed by the pound sign
[136]
137
Enter the mailbox number
[137]
[137], [812]
[137], [813]
138
Enter the maximum number of caller [138]
IDs for caller name announce Valid
entries are from 0 to 30
139
Enter the maximum number of
messages per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
140
Enter the month, followed by the hash [140], [208]
sign
141
Enter the month, followed by the
pound sign
[141], [208]
142
Enter the new time, followed by the
hash sign
[142], [208]
143
Enter the new time, followed by the
pound sign
[143], [208]
144
Enter the operator’s extension
number
[144]
145
Enter the owner’s extension number
[145]
146
Enter the prompt number
[146]
147
Enter the telephone number and wait [147]
To insert a pause or special
command, enter the partial number
and wait for the options menu
148
Enter the time, followed by the hash
sign
149
Enter the time, followed by the pound [149], [208]
sign
[149], [665], [208]
150
Enter the total message time
available per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes
[150]
151
Enter your party’s mailbox number
[151], [675]
[151], [674]
[139]
[148], [208]
[148], [664], [208]
Installation Manual
391
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
152
Enter your password, followed by the [152]
hash sign
[152], [746]
153
Enter your password, followed by the [153]
pound sign
[153], [747]
154
erased
[ 52], [154]
[ 61], [154]
155
Extension (extension number)
[155]
156
Extension number (extension
number)
[156]
157
External delivery message for (name) [157], [815], [ 24]
158
External delivery message scheduled [158], [379], [ 17]
for (name)
159
External delivery message scheduled [159], [ 17]
on (date)
160
External delivery message will be
sent right away
[160]
161
External delivery message will be
sent to (name)
[161], [447]
162
External message delivery disabled
[162]
163
External message delivery enabled
[163]
164
FAX messages
[824], [164]
165
FEBRUARY
[165]
166
FIFTEEN
[166]
167
FIFTEEN [HOUR]
[167]
168
FIFTEEN [MINUTE]
[168]
169
FIFTEENTH
[169]
170
FIFTH
[170]
171
FIFTY
[171]
172
FIFTY [MINUTE]
[172]
173
FIFTY EIGHT
[173]
174
FIFTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[174]
175
FIFTY FIVE
[175]
176
FIFTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[176]
177
FIFTY FOUR
[177]
178
FIFTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[178]
392
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
179
FIFTY NINE
[179]
180
FIFTY NINE [MINUTE]
[180]
181
FIFTY ONE
[181]
182
FIFTY ONE [MINUTE]
[182]
183
FIFTY SEVEN
[183]
184
FIFTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[184]
185
FIFTY SIX
[185]
186
FIFTY SIX [MINUTE]
[186]
187
FIFTY THREE
[187]
188
FIFTY THREE [MINUTE]
[188]
189
FIFTY TWO
[189]
190
FIFTY TWO [MINUTE]
[190]
191
FIRST
[191]
192
First telephone number is (telephone [192]
number)
193
First telephone number is not
assigned
[193]
194
FIVE
[194]
195
FIVE [HOUR]
[195]
196
FIVE [MINUTE] (OWE FIVE)
[196]
197
for
[197]
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
198
For ’Q’, press 7
[132], [198], [199]
199
For ’Z’, press 9
[132], [198], [199]
200
For a system report, press 5
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
201
For automated attendant status,
press 4
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
202
For department dialing, press *
[412], [675], [202]
[412], [674], [202]
203
For example, to enter 5 o’clock press [203]
5 and the hash sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the hash sign
Installation Manual
393
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
204
For example, to enter 5 o’clock press [204]
5 and the pound sign, or to enter 5:15
press 5, 1, 5 and the pound sign
205
For example, to enter January, press [205]
1 and the hash sign
206
For example, to enter January, press [206]
1 and the pound sign
207
For external message delivery, press [207]
3
208
For help, press 0
[149], [208]
[149], [665], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[143], [208]
[141], [208]
[148], [208]
[148], [664], [208]
[142], [208]
[140], [208]
209
For interview mailbox management,
press 1
[209]
210
For mailbox management, press 5
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
211
For notification by telephone, press 1 [211]
For notification by beeper, press 2
212
For other features, press 6
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
213
For the next name, press 2
[602], [213], [718], [671]
214
FORTY
[214]
215
FORTY [MINUTE]
[215]
216
FORTY EIGHT
[216]
217
FORTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[217]
218
FORTY FIVE
[218]
219
FORTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[219]
220
FORTY FOUR
[220]
221
FORTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[221]
222
FORTY NINE
[222]
394
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
223
FORTY NINE [MINUTE]
[223]
224
FORTY ONE
[224]
225
FORTY ONE [MINUTE]
[225]
226
FORTY SEVEN
[226]
227
FORTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[227]
228
FORTY SIX
[228]
229
FORTY SIX [MINUTE]
[229]
230
FORTY THREE
[230]
231
FORTY THREE [MINUTE]
[231]
232
FORTY TWO
[232]
233
FORTY TWO [MINUTE]
[233]
234
Forwarding mailbox number is
(mailbox number)
[234]
235
Forwarding mailbox number is not
assigned
[235]
236
Forwarding mode is copy
[236]
237
Forwarding mode is move
[237]
238
FOUR
[238]
239
FOUR [HOUR]
[239]
240
FOUR [MINUTE] (OWE FOUR)
[240]
241
FOURTEEN
[241]
242
FOURTEEN [HOUR]
[242]
243
FOURTEEN [MINUTE]
[243]
244
FOURTEENTH
[244]
245
FOURTH
[245]
246
FRIDAY
[246]
247
from (name)
[575], [247]
[266], [247]
[267], [247]
248
Good afternoon
[248], [819]
[248]
249
Good evening
[249], [819]
[249]
Installation Manual
395
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
250
Good morning
[250], [819]
[250]
251
Greeting erased
[251]
252
greeting is (message)
[ 38], [252]
253
greeting is not recorded
[ 38], [253]
254
Group member deleted
[254]
255
Group name erased
[255]
256
Group name not recorded
[256]
257
Group number (number)
[257]
258
has been erased, because message [323], [ 17], [197], [258]
retention time expired
259
has not been received
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
260
HASH(#)
[260]
261
Hello, this is the voice processing
system
[261]
262
(Not available)
263
Hello, this is voice processing system [263]
with the following information
More than 80% of flash memory
space is now utilized
Please erase unnecessary messages
264
hours (time)
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [264]
265
HUNDRED
[265]
266
I have a call for (name)
[266]
[266], [247]
267
I have a call for mailbox (mailbox
number)
[267]
[267], [247]
268
I have a message for (name)
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
269
I was unable to reach (name)
[269]
270
I’ll notify by beeper
[270]
271
I’ll notify by telephone
[271]
272
I’ll redial (number)
[272], [337]
273
I’ll redial only once
[273]
396
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
274
If you are using a rotary telephone,
stay on the line
[274], [618]
[274]
275
If you want me to call back later, press [268], [711], [690], [275]
3
276
If you would like to hold, press 1
[276], [392]
277
Incorrect entry
[277]
278
Intercom paging disabled
[278]
279
Intercom paging enabled
[279]
280
Intercom paging group number is
(number)
[280]
281
Interview mailbox number is (mailbox [281]
number)
282
Interview mailbox number is deleted
[282]
283
Interview mailbox number is not
assigned
[283]
284
JANUARY
[284]
285
JULY
[285]
286
JUNE
[286]
287
Leaving a message is disabled
[287]
288
Leaving a message is enabled
[288]
289
Mailbox
[289]
[289], [ 73]
290
Mailbox is in use
[290]
291
Mailbox list label erased
[291]
292
Mailbox list number (number)
[292]
293
Mailbox number already specified
[293]
294
MARCH
[294]
295
Maximum number of caller IDs for
caller name announce is (number)
[295]
296
Maximum number of messages per
mailbox is (number)
[296]
297
MAY
[297]
298
Message back up disabled
[298]
299
Message back up enabled
[299]
300
Message cancel for live call screening [300]
disabled
Installation Manual
397
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
301
Message cancel for live call screening [301]
enabled
302
Message delivery canceled
[302]
303
Message erased
[303]
304
Message for (name)
[304], [432], [ 17]
305
Message from (name)
[305], [816], [ 17]
306
Message from the interview mailbox
[306]
307
Message from the message manager [307]
308
Message from the system manager
[308]
309
Message length is (time)
[309], [332]
310
Message Manager
[310]
311
Message notification disabled
[311]
312
Message notification enabled
[312]
313
Message reception mode is interview [313]
mode
314
Message reception mode is message [314]
recording mode
315
Message reception mode is set to
interview mode
[315]
316
Message reception mode is set to
message recording mode
[316]
317
Message recorded by (mailbox
number)
[317], [ 13], [ 12]
318
Message recorded on (date)
[318], [ 17]
[318], [ 17], [197], [259]
319
Message retrieval order is first-infirst-out
[319]
320
Message retrieval order is last-in-first- [320]
out
321
Message scanning with information is [321]
disabled
322
Message scanning with information is [322]
enabled
323
Message sent on (date)
[323], [ 17], [197], [259]
[323], [ 17], [197], [258]
324
Message to (name)
[324], [ 31]
398
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
325
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[325], [ 12]
326
Message waiting lamp notification
disabled
[326]
327
Message waiting lamp notification
enabled
[327]
328
Message waiting lamp notification for [328]
unreceived message disabled
329
Message waiting lamp notification for [329]
unreceived message enabled
330
Messages
[330]
[824], [330]
331
(number) messages to verify
[331]
332
minutes
[332]
[309], [332]
[763], [332]
[ 72], [264], [332]
[ 72], [332]
333
MONDAY
[333]
334
more caller ID numbers
[821], [334]
335
more members
[821], [335]
336
MORE THAN ONE HUNDRED
[336]
337
more times
[272], [337]
338
New message
[338]
339
New message retention time is (day) [339], [ 70]
340
new messages
341
Night mode first operator’s extension [341]
is (extension number)
342
Night mode first operator’s extension [342]
is not assigned
343
Night mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[343]
344
Night mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
[344]
345
Night mode third operator’s extension [345]
is (extension number)
346
Night mode third operator’s extension [346]
is not assigned
[824], [340]
Installation Manual
399
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
347
NINE
[347]
348
NINE [HOUR]
[348]
349
NINE [MINUTE] (OWE NINE)
[349]
350
NINETEEN
[350]
351
NINETEEN [HOUR]
[351]
352
NINETEEN [MINUTE]
[352]
353
NINETEENTH
[353]
354
NINETY
[354]
355
NINETY EIGHT
[355]
356
NINETY FIVE
[356]
357
NINETY FOUR
[357]
358
NINETY NINE
[358]
359
NINETY ONE
[359]
360
NINETY SEVEN
[360]
361
NINETY SIX
[361]
362
NINETY THREE
[362]
363
NINETY TWO
[363]
364
NINTH
[364]
365
No answer greeting is (message)
[365]
366
No answer greeting is not recorded
[366]
367
No external delivery message
pending
[367]
368
No letters have been specified
[368]
369
No messages to verify
[369]
370
No more messages
[370]
371
No one specified by this number
[371]
372
No previous message
[372]
373
No question recorded
[373]
374
NOVEMBER
[374]
375
O’CLOCK
[375]
376
OCTOBER
[376]
377
of (company name)
[592], [377]
378
Old message
[378]
400
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
379
on (date)
[158], [379], [ 17]
380
ONE
[380]
381
ONE [HOUR]
[381]
382
ONE [MINUTE] (OWE ONE)
[382]
383
One attempt was busy
[383]
384
One attempt was no answer
[384]
385
One attempt was successful
[385]
386
One message to verify
[386]
387
One other person is waiting to
connect
[387]
388
Only extension call is available
[499], [388], [415]
389
Operator transfer disabled
[389]
390
Operator transfer enabled
[390]
391
(number) other people are waiting to [391]
connect
392
Otherwise, press 2
[676], [392]
[697], [392]
[532], [647], [392]
[651], [392]
[276], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[654], [392]
[720], [392]
[653], [392]
[ 42], [647], [392]
393
Owner’s extension is (extension
number)
[393]
394
Owner’s extension is not assigned
[394]
395
Owner’s extension number is deleted [395]
396
Owner’s name erased
[396]
397
Owner’s name is (name)
[397]
398
Owner’s name is deleted
[398]
399
Owner’s name is not recorded
[399]
400
Password deleted
[400]
401
Password entry failure
Check the password
[401]
Installation Manual
401
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
402
Password is (number)
[402]
403
Password not assigned
[403]
404
PAUSE
[404]
405
Personal greeting for caller ID
disabled
[405]
406
Personal greeting for caller ID
enabled
[406]
407
Personal greeting length is (time)
[407], [454]
408
Play system prompt after personal
greeting disabled
[408]
409
Play system prompt after personal
greeting enabled
[409]
410
Please call (telephone number)
[410]
411
Please enter your callback number
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
412
Please enter your party’s extension
[412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[412], [674]
[412],[674],[202]
413
Please enter your party’s mailbox
number
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[413], [674]
[413], [674], [618]
414
Please hold while I page your party
[414]
415
Please inform system manager
[508], [415]
[499], [388], [415]
416
Please leave a message at the tone
[416]
417
Please wait a moment
[417]
[ 49], [417]
418
PM
[418]
419
POUND(#)
[419]
420
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is caller select
[420]
421
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is system
[421]
422
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 1
[422]
402
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
423
Prompt mode for external message
delivery is user 2
[423]
424
Prompt mode is system
[424]
425
Prompt mode is user 1
[425]
426
Prompt mode is user 2
[426]
427
Prompt number (number)
[427]
428
Prompt restored
[428]
429
PULSE DIALING MODE
[429]
430
Question erased
[430]
431
Question number (number)
[431]
432
received on (date)
[304], [432], [ 17]
433
Record caller name at the tone
[433]
434
Record company name at the tone
[434]
435
Record greeting at the tone
[435]
436
Record label at the tone
[436]
437
Record menu at the tone
[437]
438
Record owner’s name at the tone
[438]
439
Record the group name at the tone
[439]
440
Record the prompt at the tone
[440]
441
Record the question at the tone
[441]
442
Record the recipient’s name at the
tone
[442]
443
Record your name at the tone
[443]
444
Recording accepted
[444]
445
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service disabled
[445]
446
Returning to top menu automated
attendant service enabled
[446]
447
right away
[161], [447]
448
SATURDAY
[448]
449
Saved message retention time is
(day)
[449], [ 70]
450
Saved message retention time is
unlimited
[450]
451
SECOND
[451]
Installation Manual
403
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
452
Second telephone number is
(telephone number)
[452]
453
Second telephone number is not
assigned
[453]
454
seconds
[454]
[ 14], [454]
[407], [454]
455
Selection Menu
[455]
456
Selection menu erased
[456]
457
Selection menu is (selection menu)
[457]
458
Sending report now to terminal or
printer connected to RS-232C port
[458]
459
SEPTEMBER
[459]
460
Set the answer length using the
following options
For 4 seconds, press 1
For 8 seconds, press 2
For 16 seconds, press 3
For 32 seconds, press 4
[460]
461
SEVEN
[461]
462
SEVEN [HOUR]
[462]
463
SEVEN [MINUTE] (OWE SEVEN)
[463]
464
SEVENTEEN
[464]
465
SEVENTEEN [HOUR]
[465]
466
SEVENTEEN [MINUTE]
[466]
467
SEVENTEENTH
[467]
468
SEVENTH
[468]
469
SEVENTY
[469]
470
SEVENTY EIGHT
[470]
471
SEVENTY FIVE
[471]
472
SEVENTY FOUR
[472]
473
SEVENTY NINE
[473]
474
SEVENTY ONE
[474]
475
SEVENTY SEVEN
[475]
476
SEVENTY SIX
[476]
477
SEVENTY THREE
[477]
404
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
478
SEVENTY TWO
[478]
479
SIX
[479]
480
SIX [HOUR]
[480]
481
SIX [MINUTE] (OWE SIX)
[481]
482
SIXTEEN
[482]
483
SIXTEEN [HOUR]
[483]
484
SIXTEEN [MINUTE]
[484]
485
SIXTEENTH
[485]
486
SIXTH
[486]
487
SIXTY
[487]
488
SIXTY EIGHT
[488]
489
SIXTY FIVE
[489]
490
SIXTY FOUR
[490]
491
SIXTY NINE
[491]
492
SIXTY ONE
[492]
493
SIXTY SEVEN
[493]
494
SIXTY SIX
[494]
495
SIXTY THREE
[495]
496
SIXTY TWO
[496]
497
Sorry
[497]
498
Sorry, I cannot add any more
[498]
499
Sorry, I cannot call this number
[499], [388], [415]
500
Sorry, mailbox in use, cannot be
deleted
[500]
501
Sorry, maximum of 20 destinations
exceeded
[501]
502
Sorry, no one is available to answer
the call
[502]
503
Sorry, no space for recording
[503]
504
Sorry, Operator is not available to
answer the call
Please call back later
[504]
505
Sorry, there are no more matching
names
[505]
[505], [756]
506
Sorry, there is no space for recording [506]
Installation Manual
405
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
507
Sorry, there is no space for recording [507]
in this mailbox
508
Sorry, this function is not available
[508], [415]
[508]
509
Sorry, this group is full
[509], [ 2]
[509], [ 1]
510
Sorry, this line is busy
[510]
511
Sorry, this list is in use for delivery If [511]
this list is edited, all the deliveries will
then be canceled
512
Sorry, this mailbox is in use
[512]
513
Sorry, this name cannot be found
[513]
514
Sorry, this number is not assigned
[514]
515
Sorry, this pager is not available
[515]
516
Sorry, this report is not available
[516]
517
Sorry, you cannot deliver the
message The maximum number of
delivery has already been reached
[517]
518
Sorry, you cannot reply
[518], [538]
[518], [593]
[518], [589]
519
Sorry, you cannot transfer a private
message
[519]
520
STAR( )
[520]
521
State your comment at the tone
[521], [669], [702]
522
SUNDAY
[522]
523
Telephone number deleted
[523]
524
Telephone number is (telephone
number)
[524]
525
Telephone number is not assigned
[525]
526
TEN
[526]
527
TEN [HOUR]
[527]
528
TEN [MINUTE]
[528]
529
TENTH
[529]
530
Thank you
[530]
531
Thank you for calling
[531]
406
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
532
The callback number is (telephone
number)
[532], [647], [392]
533
The callback number is not assigned [533], [647], [392]
534
The FAX transfer situation is as
follows
[534]
535
The first 4 letters of the owner’s last
name are (name)
[535]
536
The mailbox number entry failure
Check the mailbox number
[536]
537
The message is (message)
[537]
538
The message sender is unknown
[518], [538]
539
The prompt is now turned off
[539]
540
The system-reserved mailbox cannot [540]
be edited
541
There are (number)
[541], [ 43]
542
There are no messages
[542]
543
There was 1 unsuccessful attempt to [543]
enter this mailbox
544
There were (number of failure)
545
These are the brief segments of your [545]
Message
546
THIRD
547
Third telephone number is (telephone [547]
number)
548
Third telephone number is not
assigned
[548]
549
THIRTEEN
[549]
550
THIRTEEN [HOUR]
[550]
551
THIRTEEN [MINUTE]
[551]
552
THIRTEENTH
[552]
553
THIRTIETH
[553]
554
THIRTY
[554]
555
THIRTY [MINUTE]
[555]
556
THIRTY EIGHT
[556]
557
THIRTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[557]
558
THIRTY FIRST
[558]
[544], [809]
[546]
Installation Manual
407
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
559
THIRTY FIVE
[559]
560
THIRTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[560]
561
THIRTY FOUR
[561]
562
THIRTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[562]
563
THIRTY NINE
[563]
564
THIRTY NINE [MINUTE]
[564]
565
THIRTY ONE
[565]
566
THIRTY ONE [MINUTE]
[566]
567
THIRTY SEVEN
[567]
568
THIRTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[568]
569
THIRTY SIX
[569]
570
THIRTY SIX [MINUTE]
[570]
571
THIRTY THREE
[571]
572
THIRTY THREE [MINUTE]
[572]
573
THIRTY TWO
[573]
574
THIRTY TWO [MINUTE]
[574]
575
This call is for (name)
[575]
[575], [247]
576
This call is from (name)
[576]
577
This caller ID number already exists
[577]
578
This device is for continuous use
[578]
579
This device is for scheduled use
[579]
580
This device is not to be used
[580]
581
This group has no members
[581]
582
This is a new mailbox
[582]
583
This is for message manager
[ 51], [583]
584
This is for system manager
[ 51], [584]
585
This is the General Delivery Mailbox
[585]
586
This is the last message
[586]
587
This is the last prompt number
[587]
588
This is your mailbox
[588]
589
This is your message
[518], [589]
590
This list member already exists
[590]
408
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
591
This mailbox number is already
assigned
[591]
592
This message is from (name)
[592], [377]
[592]
593
This message is from the general
delivery mailbox
[518], [593]
594
This message will be delivered on
(day)
[594], [ 17]
595
THREE
[595]
596
THREE [HOUR]
[596]
597
THREE [MINUTE]
[597]
598
THURSDAY
[598]
599
Time is (time)
[599]
600
times
[764], [600]
601
To accept the prompt, press 2
[732], [601], [678], [677]
602
To accept, press 1
[602], [213], [718], [671]
603
To accept, press 2
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[738], [603]
[647], [603]
[732], [603], [678]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[ 41], [647], [603]
604
To accept, press 4
[612], [660], [733], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [604]
605
To accept, press 5
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
606
To add group members, press 2
[626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
607
To add more caller ID numbers, press [607]
1 To end, press 2
Installation Manual
409
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
608
To add more digits, press 4
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
609
To add more members, press 1
To end, press 2
[609]
610
To add new mailbox number, press 3 [755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
611
To add new member, press 1
[611]
[611], [657], [733]
612
To add, press 1
[612]
[612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
[612], [907], [661], [908]
613
To add, press 2
[647], [613]
614
To add, press 4
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
615
To answer the call, press 1
Otherwise, press 2 and hang up
[615]
616
To assign or edit mailboxes, press 1 [616]
To delete mailboxes, press 2
To reset mailbox passwords, press 3
617
To call message sender, press 1
To record a message, press 2
[617]
618
To call the operator, press 0
[274], [618]
[413], [675], [618]
[618]
[413], [674], [618]
619
To call this person, press 1
[619], [645], [756]
620
To cancel , press
To continue, press 1
[620]
621
To cancel external message delivery, [621], [642]
press 1
622
To cancel holding, press 2 now
Otherwise, I’ll try your party again
[622]
623
To cancel mailing list review, press
any key
[623]
624
To cancel this message or
verification, press 3
[624]
410
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
625
To change caller ID greeting number [625]
1, press 1 To change caller ID
greeting number 2, press 2 To change
caller ID greeting number 3, press 3
To change caller ID greeting number
4, press 4
626
To change group name, press 1
627
To change the answer length, press 1 [627], [748], [749], [689]
628
To change the caller name and
number, press 5
629
[629]
To change the department dialing
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press
7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
630
To change the first telephone number, [630]
press 1
To change the second telephone
number, press 2
To change the third telephone
number, press 3
631
To change the message waiting lamp [631]
status, press 1
To change the device status, press 2
To assign the telephone or beeper
numbers, press 3
632
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1
To change the busy signal greeting,
press 2
To change the after hours greeting,
press 3
633
[633]
To change the no answer greeting,
press 1 To change the busy signal
greeting, press 2 To change the after
hours greeting, press 3 To change the
caller ID greetings, press 4
[626], [606]
[626], [606], [656], [731]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
[632]
Installation Manual
411
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
634
To change the owner’s name, press 3 [637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
635
To change the password, press 1
[635], [642]
636
To change the password, press 2
[641], [636], [638], [643]
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
637
To change the personal greeting,
press 1
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
638
To change the recipient’s name, press [641], [636], [638], [643]
3
639
To change the setting, press 1
[639], [603], [733]
640
To change the specified prompt,
press 1
To change all prompts, press 2
[640]
641
To change the telephone number,
press 1
[641], [636], [638], [643]
642
To change the time and date, press 2 [635], [642]
[621], [642]
643
To change the time and date, press 4 [641], [636], [638], [643]
644
To change this question, press 1
645
To change to the next person, press 2 [619], [645], [756]
646
To change user prompt 1, press 1
To change user prompt 2, press 2
412
Installation Manual
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[646]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
647
To change, press 1
[647], [603]
[532], [647], [392]
[533], [647], [392]
[647], [603], [661]
[647], [603], [682]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [613]
[647], [603], [721]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[ 42], [647], [392]
[ 41], [647], [603]
[647], [750], [757]
[647], [750]
[647], [750], [911]
648
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 3
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
649
To check the mailbox distribution,
press 4
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
650
To clear all mailbox usage counts,
press 2
[751], [650]
651
To continue holding, press 1
[651], [392]
652
To customize your mailbox, press 3
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
653
To delete all caller ID numbers, press [653], [392]
1
654
To delete all group members, press 1 [654], [392]
655
To delete distribution verification of
[655]
this message, press 1
To cancel message delivery, press 2
656
To delete group members, press 3
[626], [606], [656], [731]
657
To delete members, press 2
[611], [657], [733]
658
To delete the password, press 1
[658], [694]
659
To delete, press 1
[659], [708]
[659], [705]
[659], [694]
Installation Manual
413
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
660
To delete, press 2
[612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
661
To delete, press 3
[647], [603], [661]
[612], [907], [661], [908]
662
To deliver a broadcast message,
press 1
[662], [663]
663
To deliver a message, press 2
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
[662], [663]
664
To deliver now, press only the hash
sign
[148], [664], [208]
665
To deliver now, press only the pound [149], [665], [208]
sign
666
[666]
To enable call blocking, press 1
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable beeper access, press 4
To disable all transfer service, press 5
667
To end recording, hang up
To cancel your message, press
you have a touch tone phone
[667]
, if
668
To end recording, hang up or press 1 [668], [702]
for more features
669
To end recording, press 1
[669], [702]
[669]
[521], [669], [702]
670
To end this call, press
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[720], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [699], [868], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
671
To enter a new name or mailbox,
press
[602], [213], [718], [671]
672
To enter another extension, press
[672]
673
To enter another extension, press 2
[695], [673]
414
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
674
To enter by name, press the hash sign [413], [674]
and 1
[413], [674], [618]
[412], [674]
[412], [674], [202]
[151], [674]
[131], [674]
675
To enter by name, press the pound
sign and 1
676
To enter your callback number, press [676], [392]
1
677
To erase and exit, press
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
678
To erase and try again, press 3
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
679
To erase this message, press 3
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
680
To erase this prompt and use system [714], [680], [757]
prompt, press 2
[714], [680], [911]
681
To erase this question, press 1
[681], [748], [749], [689]
682
To erase, press 3
[647], [603], [682]
683
To fast forward, press 6
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
684
To generate fax call report, press 1
To clear fax call counts, press 2
[684]
685
[685]
To generate flash memory usage
report, press 1.
To clear flash memory usage report,
press 2.
[413], [675]
[413], [675], [618]
[412], [675]
[412], [675], [202]
[151], [675]
[131], [675]
Installation Manual
415
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
686
[686]
To generate mailbox usage report,
press 1
To clear mailbox usage counts, press
2
687
To generate port usage report, press [687]
1
To clear port usage counts, press 2
688
[688]
To generate system service report,
press 1
For flash memory usage report
management, press 2
For port usage report management,
press 3
For mailbox usage report
management, press 4
To generate mailbox parameter
report, press 5
To generate call account report, press
6
To generate class of service
parameter report, press 7
To generate fax call report, press 8
689
To go directly to a question, press 4
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
690
To hold this call, press 2
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
691
To insert a beeper display command, [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
press 8
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
692
To insert a pause, press 5
693
To insert a wait for dial tone, press 7 [647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
694
To keep, press 2
[659], [694]
[658], [694]
695
To leave a message, press 1
[695]
[695], [673]
416
Installation Manual
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
696
To let the caller select prompt
language, press 4
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
697
To make this message private, press [697], [392]
1
698
To message scan, press 8
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
699
To modify message, press 5
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
700
To notify your party’s beeper, press 4 [700]
701
To page your party, press 3
702
To pause and restart recording, press [669], [702]
2
[668], [702]
[702]
[521], [669], [702]
703
To play the entire message, press 3
704
[704]
To play the message, press 1
To check the previous message,
press 1 twice
To check the next message, press 2
705
To play the next caller ID number,
press 2
[659], [705]
706
To play the next message, press 2
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[723], [706], [703]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
[724], [706]
[706]
707
To play the next schedule, press 2
[728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
708
To play the next, press 2
[659], [708]
709
To play the previous schedule, press [728], [707], [719], [709]
4
[707], [719], [709]
710
To reach the covering extension,
press 2
[701]
[723], [706], [703]
[710]
Installation Manual
417
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
711
To receive the message, press 1
[268], [711], [690]
[268], [711], [690], [275]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [212], [670]
[711], [663], [648], [201], [210], [670]
[711], [663], [652], [649], [200], [212], [670]
712
To record a message for external
delivery, press 1
To check external delivery message
status, press 2
To set up mailing list, press 3
[712]
713
To record a message, press 1
[713]
To add new mailbox number, press 2
To review the mailing list, press 3
714
To record a new prompt, press 1
[714], [680], [757]
[714], [680], [911]
715
To record the question, press 1
To set the answer length, press 2
To erase the question, press 3
[715]
716
To record, press 1
To erase, press 2
[716]
717
To repeat this message, press 1
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
718
To repeat this name, press 3
[602], [213], [718], [671]
719
To repeat this schedule, press 3
[728], [707], [719], [709]
[707], [719], [709]
720
To repeat, press 1
[720], [670]
[720], [392]
721
To repeat, press 3
[647], [603], [721]
722
To replay the previous message
information, press 1
To play the next message’s
information, press 2
To play the message, press 3
[722]
723
To replay the previous message,
press 1
[723], [706], [703]
418
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
724
To replay the previous message,
press 1 twice
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
[724], [706]
[724]
725
To reply, press 2
[717], [725], [670]
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
726
To reply, press 4
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
727
To report all mailbox usage, press 2
[751], [727]
728
To reschedule, press 1
[728], [707], [719], [709]
729
To retrieve the call, press 2
[729]
730
To review the mailing list, press 4
[755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
731
To review this group, press 4
[626], [606], [656], [731]
732
To review, press 1
[732], [603], [678], [614], [677]
[732], [601], [678], [677]
[732], [603], [678]
733
To review, press 3
[611], [657], [733]
[639], [603], [733]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [693], [691]
[612], [660], [733]
[612], [660], [733], [604]
734
To rewind, press 5
[717], [725], [734], [683], [670]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
735
To select caller select mode, press 1 [735]
To select without message mode,
press 2
To select before message recording
mode, press 3
To select after message recording
mode, press 4
To disable all entry modes, press 5
To accept, press 6
Installation Manual
419
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
736
To send to 1 recipient, press 1
To send by mailing list, press 2
737
[737]
To set call transfer status, press 1
To set up covering extension, press 2
To set message reception mode,
press 3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
738
To set delivery time or make this
message private, press 1
[738], [603]
739
To set delivery time, press 1
For immediate delivery, press 2
[739]
740
To set dial mode, press 6
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693]
[647], [603], [733], [608], [692], [740], [693], [691]
741
[741]
To set leaving a message status,
press 1
To set covering extension transfer
status, press 2
To set intercom paging status, press 3
To set beeper access status, press 4
To set operator transfer status, press
5
To set returning to top menu
automated attendant service status,
press 6
742
To set the clock, press 4
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
743
To set the group distribution lists,
press 4
[637], [636], [634], [743]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
744
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
[744]
745
To set up message waiting
notification, press 2
[745]
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
[752],[745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
746
To skip setting the password, press
the hash sign
[120], [746]
[152], [746]
747
To skip setting the password, press
the pound sign
[120], [747]
[153], [747]
420
Installation Manual
[736]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
748
To skip to the next question, press 2 [627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
749
To skip to the previous question,
press 3
[627], [748], [749], [689]
[644], [748], [749], [689]
[681], [748], [749], [689]
[748], [749], [689]
750
To skip, press 2
[647], [750], [757]
[647], [750]
[647], [750], [911]
751
To specify the mailbox range, press 1 [751], [727]
[751], [650]
752
To transfer General Delivery Mailbox [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [670]
messages, press 1
[752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
753
To transfer this message, press 7
[717], [706], [679], [726], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698]
[717], [706], [679], [753], [208]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698]
754
To transfer with comment, press 2
[755], [754], [610], [730]
755
To transfer, press 1
[755], [610], [730]
[755], [754], [610], [730]
756
To try again, press
[619], [645], [756]
[505], [756]
757
To turn off the prompt, press 3
[647], [750], [757]
[714], [680], [757]
758
To use for scheduling, press 1
To use continuously, press 2
To use not at all, press 3
[758]
759
To use the system prompt, press 1
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
760
To use user 1 prompt, press 2
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
761
To use user 2 prompt, press 3
[759], [760], [761], [604]
[759], [760], [761], [696], [605]
762
TONE DIALING MODE
[762]
Installation Manual
421
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
763
Total message time available per
mailbox is (time)
[763], [332]
764
Transferred (number)
[764], [600]
765
Transferred 1 time
[765]
766
TUESDAY
[766]
767
TWELFTH
[767]
768
TWELVE
[768]
769
TWELVE [HOUR]
[769]
770
TWELVE [MINUTE]
[770]
771
TWENTY
[771]
772
TWENTY [HOUR]
[772]
773
TWENTY [MINUTE]
[773]
774
TWENTY EIGHT
[774]
775
TWENTY EIGHT [MINUTE]
[775]
776
TWENTY EIGHTH
[776]
777
TWENTY FIFTH
[777]
778
TWENTY FIRST
[778]
779
TWENTY FIVE
[779]
780
TWENTY FIVE [MINUTE]
[780]
781
TWENTY FOUR
[781]
782
TWENTY FOUR [HOUR]
[782]
783
TWENTY FOUR [MINUTE]
[783]
784
TWENTY FOURTH
[784]
785
TWENTY NINE
[785]
786
TWENTY NINE [MINUTE]
[786]
787
TWENTY NINTH
[787]
788
TWENTY ONE
[788]
789
TWENTY ONE [HOUR]
[789]
790
TWENTY ONE [MINUTE]
[790]
791
TWENTY SECOND
[791]
792
TWENTY SEVEN
[792]
793
TWENTY SEVEN [MINUTE]
[793]
794
TWENTY SEVENTH
[794]
422
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
795
TWENTY SIX
[795]
796
TWENTY SIX [MINUTE]
[796]
797
TWENTY SIXTH
[797]
798
TWENTY THIRD
[798]
799
TWENTY THREE
[799]
800
TWENTY THREE [HOUR]
[800]
801
TWENTY THREE [MINUTE]
[801]
802
TWENTY TWO
[802]
803
TWENTY TWO [HOUR]
[803]
804
TWENTY TWO [MINUTE]
[804]
805
TWENTYTH
[805]
806
TWO
[806]
807
TWO [HOUR]
[807]
808
TWO [MINUTE]
[808]
809
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
[544], [809]
810
Use call waiting on busy signal
disabled
[810]
811
Use call waiting on busy signal
enabled
[811]
812
Use the hash sign key as a wild card [137], [812]
character
813
Use the pound sign key as a wild card [137], [813]
character
814
Verification deleted
[814]
815
was erased
[157], [815], [ 24]
816
was sent on (date)
[305], [816], [ 17]
817
WEDNESDAY
[817]
818
Welcome to the general delivery
mailbox
[818]
819
Welcome to the Voice Processing
System
[250], [819]
[248], [819]
[249], [819]
[819]
Installation Manual
423
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
820
When you are finished, hang up, or [411], [822], [ 82], [820]
stay on the line to confirm or change
your number
821
You can add up to (number)
[821], [335]
[821], [334]
822
You can enter up to (number)
[865], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82]
[411], [822], [ 82], [820]
[121], [822], [ 82]
[875], [822], [ 82]
823
You can not add any more digits
[823]
824
You have (number)
[824], [340]
[824], [330]
[824], [164]
825
You have a call
[825]
826
You have a call from (name)
[826]
827
You have 1 FAX message
[827]
828
You have 1 message
[828]
829
You have 1 new message
[829]
830
ZERO
[830]
831
Break mode first operator’s extension [831]
is (extension number)
832
Break mode first operator’s extension [832]
is not assigned
833
Break mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[833]
834
Break mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
[834]
835
Break mode third operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[835]
836
Break mode third operator’s
extension is not assigned
[836]
837
Lunch mode first operator’s extension [837]
is (extension number)
838
Lunch mode first operator’s extension [838]
is not assigned
839
Lunch mode second operator’s
extension is (extension number)
424
Installation Manual
[839]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
840
Lunch mode second operator’s
extension is not assigned
[840]
841
Lunch mode third operator’s
extension is (extension number)
[841]
842
Lunch mode third operator’s
extension is not assigned
[842]
843
[843]
To change the company greeting,
press 1
To change the company name, press
2
To change the department dialing
menu, press 3
To change the custom service menu,
press 4
To change the voice label, press 5
To modify the user prompt, press 6
To change the selection menu, press
7
To change the system caller name
announcement, press 8
844
Enter a class of service number from [844]
1 to 62
845
THOUSAND
[845]
846
Enter a message length from 1 to 6
minutes or 0 for unlimited length
[846]
847
Enter the total message time
available per mailbox
Valid entries are from 5 to 100
minutes or 0 for unlimited time
[847]
848
To set station call forwarding, press 4 [848]
849
To forward all calls, press 1
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
850
To forward busy calls, press 2
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
851
To forward no answer calls, press 3
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
852
To forward busy or no answer calls,
press 4
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
853
To forward to a CO line, press 5
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
854
To cancel call forwarding, press 6
[849], [850], [851], [852], [853], [854]
[849], [850], [851], [852], [854]
Installation Manual
425
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
855
Enter the destination extension
number for forwarding
856
Your extension is call forwarded all
[856]
calls to extension (extension number)
857
Your extension is call forwarded busy [857]
calls to extension (extension number)
858
Your extension is call forwarded no [858]
answer calls to extension (extension
number)
859
Your extension is call forwarded busy [859]
or no answer calls to extension
(extension number)
860
Call forwarding accepted
861
Call forwarding not accepted
[861]
Please check the destination number
862
To forward to your Telephone number [862]
1, press 1
863
To forward to your Telephone number [863]
2, press 2
864
To forward to the other number, press [864]
3
865
Enter the destination telephone
number for forwarding
[865], [822], [ 82]
866
Your extension is call forwarded to
telephone number (telephone
number)
[866]
867
Call forwarding is cancelled
[867]
868
To set station call forwarding, press 6 [752], [745], [652], [742], [699], [868], [670]
869
To change Remote Call Forwarding to [637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869]
CO setting, press 6
870
To change Telephone number 1,
press 1
To change Telephone number 2,
press 2
871
Telephone number 1 is not assigned [871]
872
Telephone number 1 is (telephone
number)
873
Telephone number 2 is not assigned [873]
874
Telephone number 2 is (telephone
number)
426
Installation Manual
[855]
[860]
[870]
[872]
[874]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
875
Enter the telephone number
[875], [822], [ 82]
876
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [876]
Forward to CO is not assigned
877
Telephone number 1 for Remote Call [877]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
878
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [878]
Forward to CO is not assigned
879
Telephone number 2 for Remote Call [879]
Forward to CO is (telephone number)
880
Message length is unlimited
[880]
881
Total message time available per
mailbox is unlimited
[881]
882
Remote Call Forward to CO disabled [882]
883
Remote Call Forward to CO enabled [883]
884
Delete message confirmation
disabled
[884]
885
Delete message confirmation
enabled
[885]
886
[886]
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting,
press 4
To change company greeting setting,
press 5
887
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting,
press 4
[887]
888
For port setting, press 1
For trunk setting, press 2
[888]
889
Enter the port number
[889], [890]
890
from 1 to (number)
[889], [890]
[892], [890]
891
Port number is (number)
[891]
892
Enter the trunk group number
[892], [890]
893
Trunk group number is (number)
[893]
Installation Manual
427
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
894
For Day time, press 1
For Night time, press 2
For Lunch time, press 3
For Break time, press 4
[894]
895
Current company greeting setting is
number (number)
[895]
896
Current company greeting setting is
System Greeting
[896]
897
Current company greeting setting is
disabled
[897]
898
To change company greeting number, [898]
press 1
To set system greeting, press 2
To disable, press 3
899
If you really want to erase, press 1
If not, press 2
[899]
900
To set Automatic mode, press 1
To set Manual Day mode, press 2
To set Manual Night mode, press 3
To set Manual Lunch mode, press 4
To set Manual Break mode, press 5
To set PBX Control mode, press 6
[900]
901
Current service mode is Automatic
mode
[901]
902
Current service mode is Manual Day [902]
mode
903
Current service mode is Manual Night [903]
mode
904
Current service mode is Manual
Lunch mode
[904]
905
Current service mode is Manual
Break mode
[905]
906
Current service mode is PBX Control [906]
mode
907
To change, press 2
[612], [907], [661], [908]
908
To review, press 4
[612], [907], [661], [908]
909
To change caller ID number, press 1 [909]
To change caller name, press 2
To accept, press 3
910
All caller ID numbers deleted
428
Installation Manual
[910]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
911
To turn on the prompt, press 3
[647], [750], [911]
[714], [680], [911]
912
The prompt is now turned on
[912]
913
Enter a message retention time up to [913]
30 days or 0 for unlimited days
914
Enter a group number from 1 to 17
[914]
915
Caller ID Callback is enabled
[915]
916
Caller ID Callback is disabled
[916]
917
Toll Saver is disabled
[917]
918
Toll Saver for DID
[918]
919
Toll Saver for Caller ID
[919]
920
To disable Toll Saver, press 1
For DID, press 2
For Caller ID, press 3
To accept, press 4
[920]
921
To change the Number for Toll Saver, [637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869], [921], [922]
press 7
922
To change the personal custom
service, press 8
923
To change Caller ID Number 1, press [923]
1
To change Caller ID Number 2, press
2
924
Caller ID Number 1 is not assigned
[924]
925
Caller ID Number 2 is not assigned
[925]
926
Caller ID Number 1 is (number)
[926]
927
Caller ID Number 2 is (number)
[927]
928
DID Number is not assigned
[928]
929
DID Number is (number)
[929]
930
Enter the number for Toll Saver
[930], [822], [ 82]
931
This number is already assigned
[931]
932
Number deleted
[932]
933
To change the key assignment, press [933]
1
To review current setting, press 2
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869], [921], [922]
[637], [636], [634], [743], [628], [869], [922]
Installation Manual
429
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
934
To enter the key number you want to [934]
change from 3 to 9
If you want to change No DTMF Input
operation, press 1
935
Key (number)
[935], [936]
[935], [937]
[935], [938]
[935], [939]
[935], [940]
[935], [941]
[935], [951]
936
is not assigned
[935], [936]
937
is transfer to mailbox (mailbox
number)
[935], [937]
938
is transfer to extension (extension
number)
[935], [938]
939
is Custom Service number (number) [935], [939]
940
is Voice Mail Service
[935], [940]
941
is Call Transfer Service
[935], [941]
942
Enter the custom service number 1
through 100
[942]
943
No DTMF Input operation is Message [943]
Recording
944
No DTMF Input operation is
Disconnect
945
To assign transfer to mailbox, press 1 [945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
[945], [946], [948], [949], [950]
946
To assign transfer to extension, press [945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
2
[945], [946], [948], [949], [950]
947
To assign transfer to outside
telephone, press 3
[945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
948
To assign custom service, press 4
[945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
[945], [946], [948], [949], [950]
949
To assign voice mail service, press 5 [945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
[945], [946], [948], [949], [950]
950
To assign call transfer service, press [945], [946], [947], [948], [949], [950]
6
[945], [946], [948], [949], [950]
430
Installation Manual
[944]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
951
is transfer to outside telephone
number (telephone number)
[935], [951]
952
You cannot assign more than two
outside transfer
[952]
953
Key assignment is cancelled
[953]
954
To cancel, press 3
[647], [603], [954]
955
Subscriber Tutorial enabled
[955]
956
Subscriber Tutorial disabled
[956]
957
To save this message as new, press 9 [717], [724], [706], [679], [734], [683], [753], [698],
[957]
[717], [724], [706], [679], [726], [734], [683], [753],
[698], [957]
958
To change Port or Trunk setting, press [958]
5
959
[959]
To set up mailbox, press 1
To set class of service, press 2
To set the clock, press 3
To change service mode setting,
press 4
To change Port or Trunk setting, press
5
960
To change Company Greeting
setting, press 1
To change Incoming Call Service
setting, press 2
[960]
961
Current Incoming Call Service is
Voice Mail Service
[961]
962
Current Incoming Call Service is
Automated Attendant Service
[962]
963
Current Incoming Call Service is
Custom Service number (number)
[963]
964
Current Incoming Call Service is
Interview Mailbox (mailbox number)
[964]
965
Current Incoming Call Service is
disabled
[965]
Installation Manual
431
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
966
To set Voice Mail Service, press 1
[966]
To set Automated Attendant Service,
press 2
To set Custom Service, press 3
To set Interview Service, press 4
To disable, press 5
967
To set Voice Mail Service, press 1
[967]
To set Automated Attendant Service,
press 2
To set Custom Service, press 3
To set Interview Service, press 4
968
Envelope Information Position is
Before
969
Envelope Information Position is After [969]
970
Envelope Information Position is
disabled
[970]
971
To set "Before", press 1
To set "After", press 2
To disable, press 3
To accept, press 4
[971]
972
Time and Date Stamp Position is
Before
[972]
973
Time and Date Stamp Position is
After
[973]
974
Time and Date Stamp Position is
disabled
[974]
975
To enable call blocking, press 1
[975]
To enable call screening, press 2
To enable intercom paging, press 3
To enable beeper access, press 4
To enable transfer to mailbox, press 5
To disable all transfer service, press 6
976
Transfer to mailbox enabled
432
Installation Manual
[968]
[976]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
977
[977]
To generate system service report,
press 1
For flash usage report management,
press 2
For port usage report management,
press 3
For mailbox usage report
management, press 4
To generate mailbox parameter
report, press 5
For call account report management,
press 6
To generate class of service
parameter report, press 7
To generate fax call report, press 8
978
To generate call account report, press [978]
1
To clear call account report, press 2
979
Report cleared
[979]
980
Now, trying to reach next operator
[980]
981
New message retention time is
unlimited
[981]
982
You cannot access this Service
[982]
983
Call Transfer to Outside is enabled
[983]
984
Call Transfer to Outside is disabled
[984]
985
To set call transfer status, press 1
[985]
To set up covering extension, press 2
To set message reception mode,
press 3
To set incomplete handling status,
press 4
To set telephone number for transfer,
press 5
986
System Manager
987
Call Forwarding Cancel is not
[987]
accepted
Please check the destination number
988
To forward to some other number,
press 3
[986]
[988]
Installation Manual
433
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
989
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
To confirm your settings, press 1
[989]
To enter subscriber’s service, press 2
To end this call, press
990
Welcome to the Panasonic Voice Mail [990]
System
This is the Subscriber Tutorial
service. In this service, you can set
your password, record your name and
record your personal greetings before
you use this system
You can hear a Help message before
each setup
991
[991]
You can set your password to a
maximum of 10 digits
When you access your subscriber
service
the system asks you to enter your
password
We recommend you change your
password frequently for good security
992
Please record your name
It is used in the following way
If you deliver your message to
another mailbox owner by using
message delivery feature, the
message receiver will hear your
message with your name when he
receives the message
434
Installation Manual
[992]
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Table D-4
Prompt
No.
993
Modifiable Prompts
Linked to Prompt No. (s)
When any caller leaves a message for [993]
your mailbox, your Personal Greeting
is played before the recording
There are three kinds of Personal
Greetings.
A No Answer Greeting is played when
you cannot answer a call
A Busy Greeting is played when you
are on another call
An After Hours Greeting is played
when you are gone for the day
Please record these personal
greetings based on following system
greeting
If you do not record a Personal
Greeting, the system plays the
following pre-recorded system
greeting
Please leave a message at the
tone
To end recording, hang up or
press 1 for more features
To pause and restart recording,
press 2
Refer to the system greeting, but
record your Personal Greeting as you
like
[Linked Prompts List]
Subscriber Service
Table D-5
[824]
You have (number)
[544]
There were (number of failure)
[338]
new message
[809]
unsuccessful attempts to enter this
mailbox
Installation Manual
435
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
Receive Message
Table D-6
[317]
Message recorded by (mailbox number) [325]
Message transferred via (mailbox
number)
[ 13]
and transferred via (mailbox number)
[ 12]
and (mailbox number)
[ 12]
and (mailbox number)
[318]
Message recorded on (date)
[824]
You have (number)
[ 17]
at (time)
[330]
Messages
Message Scan
Table D-7
[305]
Message from (name)
[816]
was sent on (date)
[ 17]
at (time)
Message Delivery
Table D-8
[594]
This message will be delivered on (day)
[ 17]
at (time)
Personal Group Distribution List
Table D-9
[821]
You can add up to (number)
[335]
more members
Check Mailbox Distribution
Table D-10
[304]
Message for (name)
[323]
Message sent on (date)
[432]
received on (date)
[ 17]
at (time)
[ 17]
at (time)
[197]
for (mailbox number)
[197]
for (mailbox number)
[258]
has been erased, because message
retention time expired
[259]
has not been received
436
Installation Manual
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
External Message Delivery
Table D-11
[158]
External delivery message scheduled for [592]
(name)
This message is from (name)
[379]
on (date)
[377]
of (company name)
[ 17]
at (time)
[157]
External delivery message for (name)
[161]
External delivery message will be sent to [815]
(name)
was erased
[447]
right away
[ 24]
because message retention time expired
[324]
Message to (name)
[272]
I’ll redial (number)
[ 31]
being delivered now
[337]
more times
Message Waiting Notification
Table D-12
[411]
Please enter your callback number
[411]
Please enter your callback number
[822]
You can enter up to (number)
[822]
You can enter up to (number)
[ 82]
digits
[ 82]
digits
[820]
When you are finished hang up, stay on
the line to confirm or change your
number
[575]
This call is for (name)
[247]
from (name)
Interview Mailbox Management
Table D-13
[ 14]
Answer length is (number)
[454]
seconds
Fax Management
Table D-14
[824]
You have (number)
[764]
Transferred (number)
[164]
FAX messages
[600]
times
Installation Manual
437
D9 LIST OF MODIFIABLE PROMPTS
438
Installation Manual
Glossary
Alternate Extension Group
Transfers the call coming into the extensions in this group following the sequence specified by
"Alternate Extension Transfer Sequence".
APT Integration
Digital Integration between the KX-TA624 and the VPS.
Auto Configuration
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS can automatically draw information from
the KX-TA624, the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD308,
or the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series. This information includes, among other things, extension
number assignments for each VPS port. This saves time in the initial setup. Auto Configuration
can be executed by DIP Switch settings or by System Administration (Quick Setup).
Auto Forwarding
Allows unretrieved messages to be copied or moved to another mailbox.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant feature of the VPS requests the caller to enter an extension number
and then the VPS dials the number. If there is no answer or the line is busy, the caller is given
some options, including the option to leave a message in a mailbox. This is the advantage of
calling an extension indirectly through the Automated Attendant rather than calling it directly.
Call Blocking
Connects the caller to the Incomplete Call Handling Service without ringing the subscriber’s
extension.
Call Screening
Allows subscribers to screen calls. The VPS prompts the caller with the message "Record your
name at the tone", and records the caller’s name; it then puts the caller on hold while playing
the name to the subscriber who decides whether to take the call or not.
Call Transfer
Transfers a call to the requested destination.
Installation Manual
439
Called Party ID
(Sometimes referred to as Follow-On ID) Allows the PBX to dial extra digits to bring the caller
directly to a specified mailbox, rather than to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Caller ID Callback
Enables a subscriber to call back a message sender with the Caller ID number attached to the
message.
Caller ID Call Routing
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS automatically sends calls from preassigned Caller ID numbers to the specified extension, mailbox (including System Group
Distribution List) or Custom Service.
Caller Name Announcement (System/Personal)
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The VPS announces prerecorded Caller ID callers’
names when: (1) extension users listen to messages from pre-assigned numbers left in the
users’ mailboxes, (2) the VPS transfers calls from pre-assigned numbers to the users (Caller
ID Screening), and (3) the VPS pages the users by intercom (Intercom Paging).
If the same Caller ID number is programmed for both system and personal caller name
announcements, the VPS will use the personal caller name.
Company Greeting
Up to 32 Company Greetings can be recorded to greet callers. One (or System Greeting or
none) can be selected for each Day, Night, Lunch, Break, and Holiday service on a port basis
and trunk (CO line) basis.
Company Name
This is played by the VPS to the intended receiver of an External Delivery Message when he
is unable to enter correctly the password (if required). This helps him to realize where the call
came from.
Covering Extension
This can be a destination for Incomplete Call Handling Service. This can also be accessed by
pressing [0] while a Personal Greeting is being played, or while a caller is leaving a message.
Custom Service Setting
Allows one-touch access to extensions, other custom service menus, fax machine, mailboxes,
etc. A greeting can be recorded for each of the 100 menus to give verbal directions to the nonsubscribers.
Default Setting
A parameter defined for the system at the factory which can be changed through system
programming by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
440
Installation Manual
Delayed Ringing
There are 2 kinds of delayed ringing applications:
(1) The VPS is used as the no-answer destination for the Intercept Routing feature of your PBX.
(2) DIL 1:N (CO line to several extensions) terminates on telephones and VPS ports. To give
the telephone users a chance to answer calls, the VPS lines should be programmed for
delayed ringing. Otherwise, the VPS will answer the calls immediately.
Delete Message Confirmation
The VPS requests confirmation from the mailbox owner before erasing a message left in the
mailbox.
Delivery Time
The time specified by the subscriber for the VPS to deliver a prerecorded message. You can
specify delivery time in External Delivery Message or when delivering a message to other
subscribers (Subscriber’s Guide Section 3.1)
Department Dialing
A speed-dialing feature that permits an outside caller to dial a single digit (1-9) to reach a
specific extension.
DID Call Routing
(Available with DPT Integration only on the KX-TD816 [P311Q or higher], KX-TD1232 [P211Q
or higher], and the KX-TD500 [V4M or higher].) The VPS automatically sends calls from preassigned DID numbers to the specified extension, mailbox (including System Group
Distribution List) or Custom Service.
Direct Mailbox Access
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can enter his mailbox directly when he
calls the VPS from his extension. He does not have to enter any special codes except for his
password, if one is established.
DPT Integration
Digital integration between the VPS and the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the
KX-TA1232, the KX-TD308, or the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series. Requires upgraded software in the
PBX.
Depending on the model and/or the software version of the connected PBX, you may not be
able to utilize some of the features available only with DPT Integration. For more information,
call National Parts Center at 1-800-833-9626.
DTMF
(Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Commonly referred to as touchtone.
Installation Manual
441
Envelope Information Position
Specifies the position of Envelope Information—the name of the person who recorded/
transferred a message, or Caller ID Number information.
(1) Before: The VPS announces Envelope Information before playing the recorded/transferred
message.
(2) After: The VPS announces Envelope Information after playing the recorded message.
(3) None: The VPS does not announce Envelope Information.
External Call Forwarding
(Available on the KX-TD500, the KX-TD816, the KX-TD1232, the KX-TA1232, the KX-TD308,
and the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series.) Forwards calls to an extension that has call forwarding
activated to an outside phone.
External Delivery Message
A message intended for automatic delivery to outside parties and/or extensions.
The message can be delivered immediately or at a specified time.
External Message Delivery List
Allows the subscriber to create 2 lists to deliver messages to outside parties. Each list can have
8 destinations.
External Message Delivery Redial
Allows the System Administrator to instruct the VPS when making external message deliveries
how many attempts to make when the line is busy or when there is no answer.
Fast Forward
Puts the user 4 s ahead in the current message.
Follow-On ID
See Called Party ID.
General Delivery Mailbox
When the caller does not dial anything (either because he does not want to or he is using a
rotary telephone), the VPS sends him to the General Delivery Mailbox.
Periodically (daily is best), the Message Manager should transfer the contents of the General
Delivery Mailbox to the appropriate destinations.
Hash Sign
Same as Pound Sign.
HELP
One of the utility commands that is used to list all utility commands with a brief description of
each.
442
Installation Manual
Immediate Reply
Allows the message receiver to reply to a message without specifying the extension number
or the mailbox number of the sender.
Inband Signaling
The Follow-On ID (or Called Party ID) that integrates the VPS and the PBX. Uses intercom
paths to light message wait light. Does not give "high end" features such as: Intercom Paging,
Direct Mailbox Access, Live Call Screening, etc.
Incomplete Call Handling Service
Calls are considered incomplete when there is no answer or if the line is busy.
There are 6 options for the Incomplete Call Handling Service:
(1) to record a message from the caller,
(2) transfer the caller to a covering extension,
(3) page the mailbox owner via the PBX,
(4) notify the mailbox owner via beeper,
(5) transfer the caller to the operator, or
(6) let the caller try another extension.
Integration
Required between the VPS and the PBX. See Inband Signaling and DPT Integration.
Intercept Routing No Answer
Transfers an unanswered call to another extension or to the VPS.
(This is a PBX feature.)
Intercom Paging
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Although Intercom Paging is generally paging
through telephones ("internal paging"), paging through external speakers ("external paging")
is also supported. Intercom Paging allows up to 16 different paging groups. An outside party
can reach a subscriber who is away from his telephone using one of the paging groups that is
assigned for the subscriber. (A paging group can be either internal or external.) For a Caller ID
caller, if his name has been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature, the name
will be announced at the end of the page.
Interview Service
A special type of subscriber mailbox that enables the subscriber to record up to 10 questions.
After the answers are recorded, the Message Waiting Lamp turns on at the subscriber’s
telephone. (Good for claims departments, order desks, job applications, etc.)
Keypad
All touchtone keys on the telephone.
Installation Manual
443
LCD
Liquid crystal display
Live Call Screening
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) The proprietary telephone works like an answering
machine. The subscriber can hear the caller through the speakerphone or the handset while
the message is being recorded.
LOAD
One of the utility commands that is used to load new or saved data to the VPS from a personal
computer.
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)
An extension that always receives calls directly into its mailbox. This feature is used by
subscribers who are often unavailable or who do not have a telephone.
Mailbox Capacity (messages)
The number of messages that can be recorded in a subscriber’s mailbox: should be set
between 5 and 100 messages by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Capacity (recording time)
The total length of time for messages in a subscriber’s mailbox: should be set between 5 and
100 min or unlimited length by the System Administrator or the System Manager.
Mailbox Extension
Normally the same number as the telephone extension number.
Mailbox Management
Allows a subscriber to alter the setting for personal mailboxes.
Menu
A list of choices from which the user can select by using the telephone keypad or the keys from
a personal computer.
Message Manager
(Mailbox 98, 998, 9998, or 99998) The person who takes care of the General Delivery Mailbox
and records: the Company Greetings, Company Name, Department Dialing Menu, Custom
Service Menus, Voice Labels, User Prompts (User 1/User 2), Multilingual Selection Menu, and
System Caller Names.
444
Installation Manual
Message Retention Time
New Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store a new (unplayed)
message before deleting the message.
Saved Message Retention Time—the length of time the VPS will store an old (played)
message before deleting the message.
Message Retrieval Order
The order in which the subscriber retrieves messages: Last In First Out (LIFO) or First In First
Out (FIFO).
Message Transfer
Allows a subscriber to reroute a message to another mailbox unless the message was marked
"private". Additional comments can be added to this message.
Message Waiting Lamp
Light on proprietary telephones that lights when there are messages in the mailbox.
Message Waiting Notification
The VPS can notify subscribers and the Message Manager when they have received
messages (if authorized by the System Administrator or the System Manager). There are 3
notification methods: (1) by the Message Waiting Lamp, (2) by a telephone, or (3) by a beeper.
Multilingual Selection Menu
The Message Manager is responsible for recording this menu. Allows callers to choose the
language they want (System, User 1 or User 2 prompts) when they call the VPS.
Non-Subscriber
A caller to the VPS who does not own a mailbox.
Notification Method
(See Message Waiting Notification.)
One-Touch Two-Way Transfer (One-Touch TWT)
(Available with DPT Integration only on the KX-TDA/KX-TAW series.) Allows a subscriber to
record a conversation into another person’s mailbox with one touch.
Operator
Up to three destinations can be assigned as operators. This is the extension that receives calls
when the calling party is on a rotary phone or dials [0].
Installation Manual
445
Owner’s Name
After a subscriber records his name, the VPS announces his name during transfers, Intercom
Paging, and confirmation of Dialing by Name.
Independent of this recording is registration of name by System Administrator. This allows
callers to dial parties by name (Dialing by Name) rather than by number. For example, a caller
can dial "S-M-I-T" (Smith) rather than Smith’s mailbox number, which can be hard to remember.
Password
A combination of numbers selected by the subscriber to protect access to his mailbox. If
forgotten, the System Administrator or System Manager can clear it so that the subscriber can
select a new password.
Personal Custom Service
Allows a subscriber to set the following Custom Services in his personal greeting (Personal
Custom Service):
(1) Transfer to Mailbox
(2) Transfer to Extension
(3) Transfer to Outside
(4) Custom Service
(5) VM Service (Voice Mail Service)
(6) AA Service (Call Transfer Service)
A caller can select a desired service from those above while listening to the personal greeting
or recording a message.
Personal Greetings
A subscriber can record messages to greet callers. There are 3 kinds of Personal Greetings:
(1) No Answer Greeting
(2) Busy Signal Greeting
(3) After Hours Greeting
Personal Greeting for Caller ID
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) A subscriber can record up to 4 personal greeting
messages for calls from pre-assigned Caller ID numbers. Each greeting supports up to 8 Caller
ID numbers.
Personal Group Distribution List
A subscriber can maintain up to 4 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20
mailboxes. Using this list, he can send the same message to all members of a specific
distribution list at once.
Port
The point of connection between the PBX and the VPS.
Pound Sign
The [#] key on the telephone keypad.
446
Installation Manual
Private Message
A message recorded as a private message cannot be forwarded. You can specify privacy when
delivering a message to other subscribers (Subscriber’s Guide Section 3.1).
Prompt
Prerecorded VPS sentences that guide subscribers and non-subscribers through specific VPS
functions. The VPS supports 3 prompts: (1) System prompts (prerecorded at the factory in
English), (2) User 1 prompts*, and (3) User 2 prompts*.
Prompts are numbered; the Message Manager can turn off and on the prompts individually.
* freely recorded by the Message Manager
Remote Call Forwarding Set
(Available with DPT Integration only.) A subscriber and the Message Manager can program his
extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to a desired extension or an
outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
(1) Forward All Calls
(2) Forward Busy Calls
(3) Forward No Answer Calls
(4) Forward Busy or No Answer Calls
(5) Forward to a CO Line
(6) Forward Cancel.
See Remote Call Forward to CO.
Remote Call Forward to CO
(Available with DPT Integration only.) Allows the System Administrator to program Telephone
number 1 and Telephone number 2 as the destination to which the callers are forwarded when
the Remote Call Forwarding is set to an outside (CO) line. This feature must be enabled in the
COS (Class of Service) setting to be utilized. See Remote Call Forwarding Set.
Review
Plays back a message.
Rewind
Replays the last 4 s of a message.
Rotary Telephone
A telephone capable of pulse dial only. Callers using a rotary telephone will be automatically
forwarded to the operator or the General Delivery Mailbox.
SAVE
One of the utility commands that is used to save VPS data to a personal computer.
Installation Manual
447
Scanning Messages
Allows the subscriber to listen to only the first 4 s of each message. Another method is to press
[2] while listening to a message; this instructs the VPS to skip to the next message.
Service Mode
The System Administrator or the System Manager can change the call handling method
programmed in the Time Service setting.
Station Programming
Programming via the proprietary telephone.
Subscriber
A person who has an assigned mailbox.
Subscriber Tutorial
When a subscriber accesses his mailbox for the first time, he will be guided to set up these
items simply by following Help messages:
(1) Password
(2) Owner’s Name
(3) Personal Greetings (No Answer Greeting/Busy Greeting/After Hours Greeting)
System Administration
System programming can be performed via 2 ways: (1) Locally (personal computer connected
directly to the RS-232C port of the VPS), or (2) remotely (personal computer connected via the
telephone network and the external modem of the VPS).
Note: Local programming and remote programming are mutually exclusive.
System Administrator
Unlike the Message Manager and the System Manager, who use a telephone to perform their
duties, the System Administrator uses a personal computer to program the VPS. The System
Administrator’s handbook is the Installation Manual.
System External Message Delivery Duration Time
The maximum time allowed for an external message that is to be delivered by the VPS,
specified by the System Administrator.
System Group Distribution List
The VPS can maintain up to 20 distribution lists, each containing a maximum of 20 mailboxes.
Each list is referenced by a System Group Distribution List number and is assigned via system
administration. A recording into a System Group Distribution List number will go into the
mailboxes of all group members.
448
Installation Manual
System Manager
(Mailbox 99, 999, 9999, or 99999) The person who can perform very basic and limited system
programming using a telephone. He can create/delete mailboxes, clear subscriber passwords
when they are forgotten, set Class of Service parameters, set the System Clock, and generate
System Reports.
System Report
The System Administrator or System Manager can generate 8 System Reports to monitor the
VPS operating status as required.
System Security
By default, the System/Message Managers cannot access the VPS from their telephones until
the System Administrator enables the relevant settings and sets a password for access. The
System/Message Managers always need to enter this password to access the VPS.
The System Administrator can also choose to set a default password for subscribers’
mailboxes. If this setting is enabled, a default password is automatically assigned when
mailboxes are created.
TIME
One of the utility commands that is used to confirm or set the time and date of the VPS.
Time and Date Stamp Position
Specifies the position of Time and Date Stamp.
(1) Before: The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp before playing the recorded/transferred
message.
(2) After: The VPS announces Time and Date Stamp after playing the recorded message.
(3) None: The VPS does not announce Time and Date Stamp.
Time Group
A time frame in which Day, Night, Lunch or Break time period can be programmed. It is
possible to assign up to 8 different Time Groups.
Time Synchronization
(Available with DPT Integration only.) When the PBX sets a new date and time or when DPT
Integration is established, the data is sent from the PBX to the VPS.
Toll Saver
Is a cost-saving feature that allows a subscriber to check his mailbox from a pre-assigned DID/
Caller ID number without necessarily making the VPS answer the call. Without Toll Saver, the
VPS will always answer the call and therefore he will incur toll charges. With Toll Saver, the
VPS can let him know that there are no new messages without answering his call.
Installation Manual
449
Two-Way Recording
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into his
mailbox.
Two-Way Transfer
(Available with APT/DPT Integration only.) Allows a subscriber to record a conversation into
another person’s mailbox.
Unlimited Message Length
Permits a mailbox owner to record two-way conversations of unlimited length into his or another
person’s mailbox (Two-Way Recording or Two-Way Transfer). The maximum recording time for
other messages will automatically be set to 6 min.
Voice Mail
A general term used for messages recorded over the phone from one person to another.
Voice Prompt
Recorded VPS instructions to callers. These are either system prompts or user prompts.
VPS
Voice Processing System (e.g., Panasonic KX-TVS95).
450
Installation Manual
Index
Installation Manual
451
Index
A
Group Distribution List—System
Alternate Extension Group
220
APT Integration
220
Auto Configuration
221
Auto Forwarding
221
Automated Attendant
221
231
H
Hardware settings
47, 324
Hold
232
Holiday Service
232
B
I
Broadcasting Messages
221
Busy Coverage Mode
221
Inband Integration
232
Incomplete Call Handling Service
Initializing the system
186
Intercom Paging
233
Interview Service
234
C
Call Services
222
Call Transfer No Answer Time
159, 315
Call Transfer Status
222
Call Transfer to Outside
226
Callback Number Entry
222
Callback Telephone No.
318
Caller ID Call Routing
223
Caller ID Callback
223, 267
Caller ID Screening
223
Caller Name Announcement—Personal
224
Caller Name Announcement—System
224
Calling a Beeper
225
Class of Service (COS)
226
Company Greeting
177, 226, 355
Company Name
227
Connections—PBX
37
Covering Extension
227
Custom Service
227
D
Data—loading new or saved data to the VPS (LOAD)
196
Data—saving the system data to the backup device (SAVE)
182,
194
Daylight Saving Time Assignment
227
Delete Message Confirmation
227
Department Dialing
228
Dialing by Name
228
DID Call Routing
228
DIP switch
22, 35, 91, 98, 108, 116
Direct Mailbox Access
229
DPT Integration
24, 83, 229
E
Envelope Information Position
267
Extension Group
229
Extension Numbering Plan
229
External Message Delivery List
230
External Message Delivery Service
230
External Message Delivery Status
231
L
Live Call Screening
235, 236
LOAD
196
Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)
Fax Management
Mailbox
237
Message Delivery Status
238
Message Delivery, Internal
237
Message Management
20, 176
MESSAGE MANAGER’S GUIDE
365
Message Reception Mode
238
Message Scan
238
Message Transfer
239
Message Waiting Notification—Device
239
Message Waiting Notification—Lamp
240
Multilingual Service
240
N
No Answer Coverage Mode
G
Group Distribution List—Personal
452
Installation Manual
241
O
One-Touch Two-Way Transfer
Operator Service
241
241
P
Password Administration
242
PBX Integration
242
Personal Custom Service
242
Personal Greeting for Caller ID
243
Personal Greetings
243
Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting
Port Service
244
Private Message
244
Q
142, 143, 201
R
231
231
237
M
Quick Setup
F
232
Receive Message
244
Remote Call Forwarding Set
245, 381
Rotary Telephone Service
245
243
Index
RS-232C Parameters
324
S
SAVE
182, 194
Service Access Commands
246
Service Mode
246, 353
Special Feature Authorization
247
Specifications—outline
25
Specifications—VPS
218
Subscriber service prompt selection
266
Subscriber Tutorial
247
System Administration
20
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR’S GUIDE
253
System Clock
177, 247, 351
System Components
21
System Management
20
SYSTEM MANAGER’S GUIDE
339
System Reports
248
System Security
248
T
Time and Date Stamp Position
267
Time Service
248
Time Synchronization
248
Toll Saver
249
Troubleshooting
215
Trunk Service (Universal Port)
249
Twenty-four-hour time stamp
309
Two-Way Recording
250
Two-Way Transfer
250
U
Unlimited Message Length
Utility Commands
251
251
V
Voice Mail Service
251
Voice Prompts
251
Installation Manual
453
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
Panasonic Sales Company
Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5
San Gabriel Industrial Park
Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985
http://www.panasonic.com/csd
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. (PCC).
You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model. Except above, you may not reproduce
this manual in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of PCC and its licensee.
2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX3117ZA KK0304YK0
">